metropolitan foundary theatre - … theatre...project manual for metropolitan foundary theatre...

PROJECT MANUAL For

METROPOLITAN FOUNDARY THEATRE Foundry Center 285 East 3rd Street Loveland, Colorado 80537 May 25, 2018

Thorp Associates, P.C. Architects and Planners 131 Stanley Avenue, Suite 100 PO Box 129 Estes Park, Colorado 80517 970.586.9528 970.586.4145 Fax www.thorpassoc.com

PROJECT MANUAL

FOR

METROPOLITAN FOUNDARY THEATRE

Foundry Center

285 East 3rd Street Loveland, Colorado 80537

THORP ASSOCIATES, P.C. ARCHITECTS AND PLANNERS

May 25, 2018

PROJECT DIRECTORY METROPOLITAN FOUNDARY THEATRE - FOUNDRY CENTER, Loveland, Colorado P# 1709

Metropolitan Theatres Corporation Client/Tenant 8727 W 3rd Street Los Angeles, CA 90048 Brinkman Partners Developer/Landlord 3528 Precision Dr, Ste 100 Fort Collins, CO 80528 970.267.0954 Thorp Associates, P.C., Architects and Planners Architect Roger M. Thorp, AIA, LEED AP, Architect of Record Joseph E. Calvin, AIA, Project Architect 131 Stanley Ave, Ste 100; PO Box 129 Estes Park, CO 80517 970.586.9528 KL&A, Inc. Structural Engineer Heath Stein, P.E. 421 E 4th St Loveland, CO 80537 970.776.4823 Pivotal Engineering LLC Mechanical, Plumbing

James Amodeo, PE 1515 Poydras St., Ste 1875 New Orleans, LA 70112

516.547.5714

Electricon Electrical Engineering, LLC Electrical Larry Smith, P.E. 37127 Cullison Ridge Rd Windsor, CO 80550 970.310.0775 BHA Design Inc. Landscape Design Mike McBride 1603 Oakridge Dr Fort Collins, CO 80525 970.223.7577 Interwest Consulting Group, Inc. Civil Engineer Robert Almirall, P.E. 1218 W. Ash, Suite C Windsor, CO 80550 970.460.8487 Trapp Associates, Ltd. Interior Designer Tim Trapp, President 965 Linden Ave Boulder, CO 80304 303.415.0036 Kamran and Company Kitchen Designer Kamran Amiri 411 East Montecito St Santa Barbara, CA 93101 805.963.3016 Northern Colorado Geotech Inc. Geotechnical Engineer 2956 29th St #21 Greeley, CO, 80631 970.506.9244 Ranack Corporation General Contractor Doug Shirack 652 S. County Rd. 9E Loveland, CO 80537 970.667.3698 Refer all questions during bidding and construction to: Roger M. Thorp, AIA, LEED AP, Architect of Record Joseph E. Calvin, AIA, Project Architect 131 Stanley Ave, Ste 100 PO Box 129 Estes Park, CO 80517 970.586.9528V; 970.586.4145F [email protected] [email protected]

TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR

METROLPOLITAN FOUNDRY THEATRE

FOUNDRY CENTER 285 East 3rd Street

LOVELAND, COLORADO May 25, 2018

SPECIFICATIONS TA P#1709

TITLE PAGE PROJECT DIRECTORY

TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT/ISSUES 00 43 25 Procurement Procedures for Substitutions 00 43 25 Substitution Request Form 00 65 13 COMcheck Code Compliance Certificates

Building Envelope COMcheck Compliance Certificate Mechanical COMcheck Compliance Certificate Lighting COMcheck Compliance Certificate

DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 00 06 Matrix of Responsibility 01 10 00 Administrative Provisions

01 33 00 Submittals 01 40 00 Quality Control 01 50 00 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 01 66 00 Material and Equipment 01 70 00 Contract Closeout

DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 32 00 Geotechnical Subsurface Exploration Report Earth Engineering Consultants,

LLC, 4396 Greenfield Drive, Windsor, Colorado 80550; Project No. 1162092, dated November 1, 2016.

DIVISION 03 CONCRETE 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete

DIVISION 04 MASONRY 04 21 13 Surface-Bonded Brick Masonry 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry

DIVISION 05 METALS

05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 05 21 00 Steel Joist Framing 05 31 00 Steel Decking 05 40 00 Cold Formed Metal Framing 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications

DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 11 00 Asphaltic Dampproofing 07 19 00 Liquid Water Repellant 07 21 00 Building Insulation 07 25 00 Air Barriers 07 54 00 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 07 60 00 Flashing and Sheet Metal 07 72 33 Roof Hatches 07 84 00 Firestopping 07 84 56 Construction Firesafing 07 92 00 Joint Sealers

DIVISION 08 OPENINGS 08 11 00 Steel Doors and Hollow Metal Frames 08 14 00 Wood Doors and Frames 08 31 13 Access Doors 08 33 13 Coiling Counter Doors 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 08 36 13 Glass Overhead Sectional Doors 08 41 13 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 08 56 00 Special Function Windows 08 70 00 Finish Hardware 08 81 00 Glass and Glazing

DIVISION 09 FINISHES 09 20 00 Gypsum Wall Board and Ceiling Systems 09 21 13 Portland Cement Plaster 09 30 10 Ceramic Tile 09 50 00 Acoustical Ceilings 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring and Base 09 68 13 Carpet Glue-Down 09 90 00 Painting and Staining 09 98 13 Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panel System

DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 10 06 10 Interior Plastic Signs 10 21 16 Solid Plastic Toilet Compartments 10 28 13 Toilet Accessories 10 44 16 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets 10 51 13 Metal Lockers

DIVISION 11 LOCK BOX(ES)

11 90 00 Lock Box(es) DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13 48 13 Manufactured Sound and Vibration Control Components DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPRESSION (See Mechanical Drawings) DIVISION 22 PLUMBING

22 10 00 Plumbing Piping and Pumps DIVISION 23 HVAC

23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation 23 08 00 Commissioning of HVAC 23 11 00 Facility Fuel Piping 23 30 00 HVAC Air Distribution 23 74 13 Packaged, Outdoor, Central-Station Air Handling Units

DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 13 Conductors and Cables 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding 26 05 29 Electric Supports and Seismic Restraints 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes 26 05 53 Electrical Identification 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 28 13 Fuses 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 26 51 00 Interior Lighting 26 56 00 Exterior Lighting DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK

31 23 00 Excavation and Fill 31 23 23 Structural Foam Block System 31 63 29 Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts

PROCUREMENT PROCEDURE FOR SUBSTITUTIONS 00 43 25 - 1

DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT/ISSUES Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 00 43 25 PROCUREMENT PROCEDURE FOR SUBSTITUTIONS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 INTENT

A. In order to provide the opportunity for alternate materials, equipment or processes to be introduced into the scope of construction work, outside the strict scope of these Specifications, as separate “Substitution Request Form” is provided with these Specifications. This form is intended to allow the Client and Architect to thoroughly evaluate advantages or disadvantages that a substitute product or process may bring to the Project. Contractors have the option of submitting this “Substitute Request Form” 00 43 25 for consideration by the Architect. If approved, Ranack Corporation shall have the option of including the substitute product, material, or process in its Final Contract Negotiations with Metropolitan Theatres Corporation.

1.02 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 00 43 25 A. Follows immediately.

END OF SECTION 00 43 25 - PROCUREMENT PROCEDURE FOR SUBSTITUTIONS

00 43 25 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM Thorp Associates, P.C. Architects and Planners

131 Stanley Ave, Ste 100; PO Box 129 970.586.9528 Estes Park, CO 80517 [email protected] Project: Metropolitan Foundry Theatre, Loveland, Colorado P#1709 Date: Specification Section: Submitted by: Name: Company: Address: Telephone: E-mail: Product Name: Manufacturer: Model/Product #: Address: Telephone: Website: Product Description: Supporting Data Attached:

Drawings Product Data Samples Tests Reports Other

Describe the reason for the proposed substitution: Describe what benefits the Client will receive from the proposed substitution: Describe all differences between the proposed and specified product (attach separate sheet if needed): Describe differences in dimensions and clearances that are affected by the proposed substitution: Indicate if the proposed product is available in the specified grade and finish, etc. If not, submit finish samples for selection: Describe differences if any in warranty between the proposed and specified products: Describe differences if any in maintenance, service and availability of parts: Describe what affect if any the proposed substitution will have on other trades: Describe what affect if any the proposed substitution will make to the project schedule: Describe what affect if any the proposed substitution will have to project cost: List local projects where the proposed substitute product is installed:

1. 3. 2. 4.

Approval if given will be in the form of a written Addendum.

COMCHECK CODE COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATES 00 65 13 - 1

DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT/ISSUES Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 00 65 13 COMCHECK CODE COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 COMcheck Compliance Certificates are found following this page.

A. Building Envelope COMcheck Compliance Certificate B. Mechanical COMcheck Compliance Certificate C. Lighting COMcheck Compliance Certificate

END OF SECTION 00 65 13 - COMCHECK CODE COMPLAINCE

END OF DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT/ISSUES

Project Title: Metropolitan Theatre at the Foundry Report date: 05/29/18Data filename: C:\Documents and Settings\Chris\Desktop\Foundry COMcheck.cck Page 1 of 2

COMcheck Software Version 4.0.8.2Envelope Compliance Certificate

Section 1: Project InformationEnergy Code: 2009 IECCProject Title: Metropolitan Theatre at the FoundryProject Type: New ConstructionConstruction Site: Owner/Agent: Designer/Contractor:

285 East 3rd StreetLoveland, CO 80537

Building Location (for weather data): Loveland, ColoradoClimate Zone: 5bVertical Glazing / Wall Area Pct.: 10%

Building Use: Activity Type(s) Floor Area1-Lobby (Dining: Bar Lounge/Leisure) : Nonresidential 13002-Rest of Building (Motion Picture Theater) : Nonresidential 22300

Section 2: Envelope Assemblies and Requirements Checklist

Envelope PASSES: Design 3% better than code.

Envelope Assemblies:Component Name/Description Gross

Area or Perimeter

CavityR-Value

Cont.R-Value

ProposedU-Factor

BudgetU-Factor(a)

Primary Roof: Insulation Entirely Above Deck, [Bldg. Use 2 - Rest of Building]

22344 --- 29.8 0.033 0.048

Primary and Elevated Roof: Insulation Entirely Above Deck, [Bldg. Use 1 - Lobby]

1300 --- 29.8 0.033 0.048

Walls between Primary and Elevated Roofs: Steel-Framed, 16" o.c., [Bldg. Use 1 - Lobby]

307 18.0 1.9 0.092 0.064

South Exterior Wall above Grade Beam excluding Poster Cases:Steel-Framed, 16" o.c., [Bldg. Use 2 - Rest of Building]

4151 25.0 1.9 0.079 0.064

Storefront Windows A,B,F,G,H,J,K: Metal Frame Curtain Wall/Storefront, Perf. Type: Energy code default, Double Pane with Low-E, Tinted , SHGC 0.60, [Bldg. Use 2 - Rest of Building]

782 --- --- 0.800 0.450

Doors 100.1,100.2,110.1: Glass (> 50% glazing):Metal Frame, Entrance Door, Perf. Type: Energy code default, Double Pane with Low-E, Clear , SHGC 0.70, [Bldg. Use 2 - Rest of Building]

120 --- --- 0.800 0.800

Overhead Door: Glass (> 50% glazing):Metal Frame, Non-Entrance Door, Perf. Type: Energy code default, Double Pane with Low-E, Tinted , SHGC 0.60, [Bldg. Use 2 - Rest of Building]

196 --- --- 0.800 0.550

South Wall behind Poster Cases: Steel-Framed, 16" o.c., [Bldg. Use 2 - Rest of Building]

105 12.0 1.8 0.104 0.064

SE Corner Diagonal Wall above Grade Beam: Wood-Framed, 16" o.c., [Bldg. Use 2 - Rest of Building]

346 25.0 1.9 0.050 0.064

East Exterior Wall above Grade Beam: Steel-Framed, 16" o.c., [Bldg. Use 2 - Rest of Building]

3733 25.0 1.9 0.079 0.064

Corridor Exit Doors 124.1: Glass (> 50% glazing):Metal Frame, Non-Entrance Door, Perf. Type: Energy code default, Double Pane with Low-E, Tinted , SHGC 0.60, [Bldg. Use 2 - Rest of Building]

42 --- --- 0.800 0.550

Door 4: Insulated Metal, Swinging, [Bldg. Use 2 - Rest of Building] 42 --- --- 0.067 0.700North Exterior Wall above Grade Beam: Wood-Framed, 16" o.c.,

[Bldg. Use 2 - Rest of Building]4617 25.0 1.9 0.050 0.064

Auditorium Exits 134.2,132.3,128.3,204.1: Insulated Metal, Swinging, [Bldg. Use 2 - Rest of Building]

126 --- --- 0.067 0.700

Project Title: Metropolitan Theatre at the Foundry Report date: 05/29/18Data filename: C:\Documents and Settings\Chris\Desktop\Foundry COMcheck.cck Page 2 of 2

Overhead Coiling Delivery Door 128.3: Other Door, Swinging, [Bldg. Use 2 - Rest of Building]

45 --- --- 0.125 0.700

West Exterior Wall above Grade Beam: Wood-Framed, 16" o.c., [Bldg. Use 2 - Rest of Building]

4170 25.0 1.9 0.050 0.064

Storefront Windows Ls,Ms,Ns: Metal Frame Curtain Wall/Storefront, Perf. Type: Energy code default, Double Pane with Low-E, Tinted , SHGC 0.60, [Bldg. Use 2 - Rest of Building]

595 --- --- 0.800 0.450

Lobby Exit Door 102.1: Glass (> 50% glazing):Metal Frame, Non-Entrance Door, Perf. Type: Energy code default, Double Pane with Low-E, Tinted , SHGC 0.60, [Bldg. Use 2 - Rest of Building]

48 --- --- 0.800 0.550

Various HM Doors 15.1,131.3,128.2: Insulated Metal, Swinging, [Bldg. Use 2 - Rest of Building]

70 --- --- 0.067 0.700

Slab on Grade at Theatre Spaces: Slab-On-Grade:Unheated, [Bldg. Use 2 - Rest of Building]

526 --- --- --- ---

Slab on Grade at Dining: Slab-On-Grade:Unheated, [Bldg. Use 1 - Lobby]

98 --- --- --- ---

(a) Budget U-factors are used for software baseline calculations ONLY, and are not code requirements.(b) 'Other' components require supporting documentation for proposed U-factors.

Air Leakage, Component Certification, and Vapor Retarder Requirements:❑ 1. All joints and penetrations are caulked, gasketed or covered with a moisture vapor-permeable wrapping material installed in accordance

with the manufacturer's installation instructions.

❑ 2. Windows, doors, and skylights certified as meeting leakage requirements.

❑ 3. Component R-values & U-factors labeled as certified.

❑ 4. No roof insulation is installed on a suspended ceiling with removable ceiling panels.

❑ 5. 'Other' components have supporting documentation for proposed U-Factors.

❑ 6. Insulation installed according to manufacturer's instructions, in substantial contact with the surface being insulated, and in a manner that achieves the rated R-value without compressing the insulation.

❑ 7. Stair, elevator shaft vents, and other outdoor air intake and exhaust openings in the building envelope are equipped with motorized dampers.

❑ 8. Cargo doors and loading dock doors are weather sealed.

❑ 9. Recessed lighting fixtures installed in the building envelope are Type IC rated as meeting ASTM E283, are sealed with gasket or caulk.

❑ 10.Building entrance doors have a vestibule equipped with self-closing devices. Exceptions:

❑ Building entrances with revolving doors.

❑ Doors not intended to be used as a building entrance.

❑ Doors that open directly from a space less than 3000 sq. ft. in area.

❑ Doors used primarily to facilitate vehicular movement or materials handling and adjacent personnel doors.

❑ Doors opening directly from a sleeping/dwelling unit.

Section 3: Compliance Statement

Compliance Statement: The proposed envelope design represented in this document is consistent with the building plans, specificationsand other calculations submitted with this permit application. The proposed envelope system has been designed to meet the 2009 IECCrequirements in COMcheck Version 4.0.8.2 and to comply with the mandatory requirements in the Requirements Checklist.

Name - Title Signature Date5/29/18Joseph E Calvin - Thorp Assoc

COMcheck Software Version 4.0.8.1

Mechanical Compliance Certificate

Project Title:2015 IECC

Project Type: New Construction

Location: Loveland, ColoradoClimate Zone: 5b

Construction Site:285 EAST 3RD STREETLOVELAND, CO 80537

Owner/Agent: Designer/Contractor:

Project InformationEnergy Code:

METROPOLITAN THEATRE AT THE FOUNDRY

Dedicated Outdoor Air SystemAdditional Efficiency Package(s)

Mechanical Systems ListQuantity System Type & Description

Cooling: 1 each - Single Package DX Unit, Capacity = 136 kBtu/h, Air-Cooled Condenser, Air Economizer Proposed Efficiency = 12.20 EER, Required Efficiency: 11.00 EER + 12.4 IEERFan System: RTU-1 SUPPLY FAN | AUDITORIUM 1 -- Compliance (Motor nameplate HP method) : Passes

Fans: SF1 Supply, Constant Volume, 5000 CFM, 5.0 motor nameplate hp, 0.0 fan efficiency grade

1 RTU-1 (Single Zone):

Cooling: 1 each - Single Package DX Unit, Capacity = 55 kBtu/h, Air-Cooled Condenser, Air Economizer Proposed Efficiency = 15.20 SEER, Required Efficiency: 14.00 SEERFan System: RTU-2 SUPPLY FAN | AUDITORIUM 2 -- Compliance (Motor nameplate HP method) : Passes



Cooling: 1 each - Single Package DX Unit, Capacity = 55 kBtu/h, Air-Cooled Condenser, Air Economizer Proposed Efficiency = 15.20 SEER, Required Efficiency: 14.00 SEERFan System: RTU-3 SUPPLY FAN | AUDITORIJM 3 -- Compliance (Motor nameplate HP method) : Passes









Project Title:Data filename:

METROPOLITAN THEATRE AT THE FOUNDRYP:\PIVOTAL COLORADO\PIVOTAL COLORADO PROJECT LIST\Pivotal Drawings\Pivotal Drawings2017\17-033 Pavilions at Silver Sage Additions\COMCheck\METRO FOUNDRY THEATRES.cck

05/25/18Report date:221 ofPage

Quantity System Type & Description







Cooling: 1 each - Single Package DX Unit, Capacity = 136 kBtu/h, Air-Cooled Condenser, Air Economizer Proposed Efficiency = 12.20 EER, Required Efficiency: 11.00 EER + 12.4 IEERFan System: RTU-8 SUPPLY FAN | DINING, RAMP HOST AREA -- Compliance (Motor nameplate HP method) : Passes



Cooling: 1 each - Single Package DX Unit, Capacity = 55 kBtu/h, Air-Cooled Condenser, Air Economizer Proposed Efficiency = 15.20 SEER, Required Efficiency: 14.00 SEERFan System: RTU-9 SUPPLY FAN | CORRIDORS/TICKET AREA -- Compliance (Motor nameplate HP method) : Passes



Cooling: 1 each - Single Package DX Unit, Capacity = 55 kBtu/h, Air-Cooled Condenser, Air Economizer Proposed Efficiency = 15.20 SEER, Required Efficiency: 14.00 SEERFan System: RTU-10 SUPPLY FAN | UPPER LEVEL -- Compliance (Motor nameplate HP method) : Passes



Cooling: 1 each - Single Package DX Unit, Capacity = 90 kBtu/h, Evaporatively Cooled Condenser, Air Economizer Proposed Efficiency = 12.20 EER, Required Efficiency: 12.10 EER + 12.3 IEERFan System: MUA-1-SUPPLY FAN | KITCHEN -- Compliance (Motor nameplate HP method) : Passes


1 MAU-1 (Single Zone):

Cooling: 1 each - Single Package DX Unit, Capacity = 101 kBtu/h, Air-Cooled Condenser, Air Economizer Proposed Efficiency = 12.20 EER, Required Efficiency: 11.20 EER + 12.8 IEERFan System: MUA-2 SUPPLY FAN | PROJECTION CORRIDOR -- Compliance (Motor nameplate HP method) : Passes


1 MAU-2 (Single Zone):

Gas Storage Water Heater, Capacity: 100 gallons, Input Rating: 250 kBtu/h w/ Circulation Pump Proposed Efficiency: 92.00 % Et, Required Efficiency: 80.00 % Et

1 DWH-1:




Mechanical Compliance StatementCompliance Statement: The proposed mechanical design represented in this document is consistent with the building plans,specifications, and other calculations submitted with this permit application. The proposed mechanical systems have beendesigned to meet the 2015 IECC requirements in COMcheck Version 4.0.8.1 and to comply with any applicable mandatoryrequirements listed in the Inspection Checklist.

Name - Title Signature Date




James Amodeo, P.E.

Inspection ChecklistRequirements: 83.0% were addressed directly in the COMcheck software


Text in the "Comments/Assumptions" column is provided by the user in the COMcheck Requirements screen. For eachrequirement, the user certifies that a code requirement will be met and how that is documented, or that an exceptionis being claimed. Where compliance is itemized in a separate table, a reference to that table is provided.

Energy Code: 2015 IECC

Section#

& Req.IDPlan Review Complies? Comments/Assumptions

C103.2[PR2]1

Plans, specifications, and/orcalculations provide all informationwith which compliance can bedetermined for the mechanicalsystems and equipment anddocument where exceptions to thestandard are claimed. Loadcalculations per acceptableengineering standards andhandbooks.

CompliesDoes NotNot ObservableNot Applicable

Requirement will be met.

C103.2[PR3]1

Plans, specifications, and/orcalculations provide all informationwith which compliance can bedetermined for the service waterheating systems and equipment anddocument where exceptions to thestandard are claimed. Hot watersystem sized per manufacturer'ssizing guide.



C406[PR9]1

Plans, specifications, and/orcalculations provide all informationwith which compliance can bedetermined for the additional energyefficiency package options.



Location on plans/spec: M-0, M-0.1, P-0

Additional Comments/Assumptions:

1 High Impact (Tier 1) 2 Medium Impact (Tier 2) 3 Low Impact (Tier 3)




Section#

& Req.IDFooting / Foundation Inspection Complies? Comments/Assumptions

C403.2.4.5,C403.2.4.6[FO9]3

Snow/ice melting system sensors forfuture connection to controls. Freezeprotection systems have automaticcontrols installed.








Section#

& Req.IDPlumbing Rough-In Inspection Complies? Comments/Assumptions

C404.5,C404.5.1,C404.5.2[PL6]3

Heated water supply piping conformsto pipe length and volumerequirements. Refer to section details.



C404.5,C404.5.1,C404.5.2[PL6]3




C404.5,C404.5.1,C404.5.2[PL6]3



Exception: Requirement does not apply.

C404.5,C404.5.1,C404.5.2[PL6]3




C404.5,C404.5.1,C404.5.2[PL6]3




C404.5,C404.5.1,C404.5.2[PL6]3




C404.5,C404.5.1,C404.5.2[PL6]3




C404.5,C404.5.1,C404.5.2[PL6]3




C404.5,C404.5.1,C404.5.2[PL6]3




C404.5,C404.5.1,C404.5.2[PL6]3




C404.5,C404.5.1,C404.5.2[PL6]3








Section#


C404.5,C404.5.1,C404.5.2[PL6]3




C404.5,C404.5.1,C404.5.2[PL6]3




C404.6.1,C404.6.2[PL3]1

Automatic time switches installed toautomatically switch off therecirculating hot-water system or heattrace.



C404.6.3[PL7]3

Pumps that circulate water between aheater and storage tank have controlsthat limit operation from startup to<= 5 minutes after end of heatingcycle.



C404.6.3[PL7]3




C404.6.3[PL7]3




C404.6.3[PL7]3




C404.6.3[PL7]3




C404.6.3[PL7]3




C404.6.3[PL7]3




C404.6.3[PL7]3




C404.6.3[PL7]3








Section#


C404.6.3[PL7]3




C404.6.3[PL7]3




C404.6.3[PL7]3




C404.6.3[PL7]3




C404.7[PL8]3

Water distribution system that pumpswater from a heated-water supplypipe back to the heated-water sourcethrough a cold-water supply pipe is ademand recirculation water system.Pumps within this system havecontrols that start the pump uponreceiving a signal from the action of auser of a fixture or appliance andlimits the temperature of the waterentering the cold-water piping to104°F.



C404.7[PL8]3




C404.7[PL8]3








Section#


C404.7[PL8]3




C404.7[PL8]3




C404.7[PL8]3




C404.7[PL8]3




C404.7[PL8]3








Section#

& Req.IDMechanical Rough-In Inspection Complies? Comments/Assumptions

C402.2.6[ME41]3

Thermally ineffective panel surfaces ofsensible heating panels haveinsulation >= R-3.5.



C403.2.13[ME71]2

Unenclosed spaces that are heateduse only radiant heat.



C403.2.3[ME55]2

HVAC equipment efficiency verified. CompliesDoes NotNot ObservableNot Applicable

See the Mechanical Systems list for values.

C403.2.4.7[ME113]2

Fault detection and diagnosticsinstalled with air-cooled unitary DXunits having economizers.



C403.2.4.7[ME113]2




C403.2.4.7[ME113]2




C403.2.4.7[ME113]2




C403.2.4.7[ME113]2




C403.2.4.7[ME113]2




C403.2.4.7[ME113]2




C403.2.4.7[ME113]2




C403.2.4.7[ME113]2




C403.2.4.7[ME113]2








Section#


C403.2.4.7[ME113]2




C403.2.4.7[ME113]2




C403.2.6.1[ME59]1

Demand control ventilation providedfor spaces >500 ft2 and >25people/1000 ft2 occupant density andserved by systems with air sideeconomizer, auto modulating outsideair damper control, or design airflow>3,000 cfm.



C403.2.6.2[ME115]3

Enclosed parking garage ventilationhas automatic contaminant detectionand capacity to stage or modulatefans to 50% or less of design capacity.



C403.2.7[ME57]1

Exhaust air energy recovery onsystems meeting Table C403.2.7(1)and C403.2.7(2).



C403.2.8[ME116]3

Kitchen exhaust systems comply withreplacement air and conditionedsupply air limitations, and satisfy hoodrating requirements and maximumexhaust rate criteria.



C403.2.9[ME60]2

HVAC ducts and plenums insulated.Where ducts or plenums are installedin or under a slab, verification mayneed to occur during FoundationInspection.



C403.2.9[ME10]2

Ducts and plenums sealed based onstatic pressure and location.



C403.2.9.1.3[ME11]3

Ductwork operating >3 in. watercolumn requires air leakage testing.



C403.2.9.1.3[ME11]3




C403.2.9.1.3[ME11]3




C403.2.9.1.3[ME11]3








Section#


C403.2.9.1.3[ME11]3




C403.2.9.1.3[ME11]3




C403.2.9.1.3[ME11]3




C403.2.9.1.3[ME11]3




C403.2.9.1.3[ME11]3




C403.2.9.1.3[ME11]3




C403.2.9.1.3[ME11]3




C403.2.9.1.3[ME11]3




C403.3[ME62]1

Air economizers provided whererequired, meet the requirements fordesign capacity, control signal,ventilation controls, high-limit shut-off,integrated economizer control, andprovide a means to relieve excessoutside air during operation.



C403.3[ME62]1




C403.3[ME62]1








Section#


C403.3[ME62]1




C403.3[ME62]1




C403.3[ME62]1




C403.3[ME62]1




C403.3[ME62]1




C403.3[ME62]1




C403.3[ME62]1




C403.3[ME62]1




C403.3[ME62]1








Section#


C403.4.4.6[ME110]3

Multiple zone VAV systems with DDCof individual zone boxes have staticpressure setpoint reset controls.




C403.4.4.6[ME110]3





C403.4.4.6[ME110]3





C403.4.4.6[ME110]3





C403.4.4.6[ME110]3





C403.4.4.6[ME110]3





C403.4.4.6[ME110]3





C403.4.4.6[ME110]3





C403.4.4.6[ME110]3





C403.4.4.6[ME110]3





C403.4.4.6[ME110]3





C403.4.4.6[ME110]3









Section#


C404.2.1[ME111]2

Gas-fired water-heating equipmentinstalled in new buildings: where asingular piece of water-heatingequipment >= 1,000 kBtu/h servesthe entire building, thermal efficiency>= 90 Et. Where multiple pieces ofwater-heating equipment serve thebuilding with combined rating >=1,000 kBtu/h, the combined input-capacity-weighted-average thermalefficiency >= 90 Et. Exclude inputrating of equipment in individualdwelling units and equipment <= 100kBtu/h.



C408.2.2.1[ME53]3

Air outlets and zone terminal deviceshave means for air balancing.



C403.5,C403.5.1,C403.5.2[ME123]3

Refrigerated display cases, walk-incoolers or walk-in freezers served byremote compressors and remotecondensers not located in acondensing unit, have fan-poweredcondensers that comply with SectionsC403.5.1 and refrigeration compressorsystems that comply with C403.5.2..








Section#

& Req.IDFinal Inspection Complies? Comments/Assumptions

C303.3,C408.2.5.3[FI8]3

Furnished O&M manuals for HVACsystems within 90 days of systemacceptance.


C403.2.2[FI27]3

HVAC systems and equipmentcapacity does not exceed calculatedloads.



C403.2.4.1[FI47]3

Heating and cooling to each zone iscontrolled by a thermostat control.Minimum one humidity control deviceper installedhumidification/dehumidificationsystem.



C403.2.4.1[FI47]3




C403.2.4.1[FI47]3




C403.2.4.1[FI47]3




C403.2.4.1[FI47]3




C403.2.4.1[FI47]3




C403.2.4.1[FI47]3




C403.2.4.1[FI47]3








Section#


C403.2.4.1[FI47]3




C403.2.4.1[FI47]3




C403.2.4.1[FI47]3




C403.2.4.1[FI47]3




C403.2.4.1.2[FI38]3

Thermostatic controls have a 5 °Fdeadband.



C403.2.4.1.3[FI20]3

Temperature controls have setpointoverlap restrictions.



C403.2.4.2[FI39]3

Each zone equipped with setbackcontrols using automatic time clock orprogrammable control system.



C403.2.4.2.1,C403.2.4.2.2[FI40]3

Automatic Controls: Setback to 55°F(heat) and 85°F (cool); 7-day clock, 2-hour occupant override, 10-hourbackup



C403.2.4.2.3[FI41]3

Systems include optimum startcontrols.



C403.2.4.2.3[FI41]3




C403.2.4.2.3[FI41]3








Section#


C403.2.4.2.3[FI41]3




C403.2.4.2.3[FI41]3




C403.2.4.2.3[FI41]3




C403.2.4.2.3[FI41]3




C403.2.4.2.3[FI41]3




C403.2.4.2.3[FI41]3




C403.2.4.2.3[FI41]3




C403.2.4.2.3[FI41]3




C403.2.4.2.3[FI41]3




C404.3[FI11]3

Heat traps installed on supply anddischarge piping of non-circulatingsystems.



C404.4[FI25]2

All piping insulated in accordance withsection details and Table C403.2.10.



C404.6.1[FI12]3

Controls are installed that limit theoperation of a recirculation pumpinstalled to maintain temperature of astorage tank. System return pipe is adedicated return pipe or a cold watersupply pipe.







Section#


C406.6[FI52]1

Dedicate outdoor air system efficiencypackage: Buildings with hydronicand/or multiple-zone HVAC systemsare equipped with an independentventilation system designed toprovide >= 100-percent outdoor air toeach individual occupied space, asspecified by the IMC. The ventilationsystem is capable of total energyrecovery and includes HVAC systemcontrols that manage temperatureresets >= 25 percent of delta designsupply-air / room-air temp.



Location on plans/spec: M-0, M-0.1

C408.2.1[FI28]1

Commissioning plan developed byregistered design professional orapproved agency.


C408.2.3.1[FI31]1

HVAC equipment has been tested toensure proper operation.


C408.2.3.2[FI10]1

HVAC control systems have beentested to ensure proper operation,calibration and adjustment of controls.


C408.2.3.3[FI32]1

Economizers have been tested toensure proper operation.


C408.2.4[FI29]1

Preliminary commissioning reportcompleted and certified by registereddesign professional or approvedagency.


C408.2.5.1[FI7]3

Furnished HVAC as-built drawingssubmitted within 90 days of systemacceptance.


C408.2.5.3[FI43]1

An air and/or hydronic systembalancing report is provided for HVACsystems.


C408.2.5.4[FI30]1

Final commissioning report due tobuilding owner within 90 days ofreceipt of certificate of occupancy.








Interior Lighting Compliance Certificate



Construction Site:285 E 3rd StLoveland, CO 80537

Owner/Agent: Designer/Contractor:Lawrence Smith, P.E.Electricon, LLC37127 Cullison Ridge RdSeverance, CO [email protected]


Metropolitan Theatre at the Foundry

Reduced interior lighting power. Requirements are implicitly enforced within interior lighting allowance calculations.

Additional Efficiency Package

Allowed Interior Lighting PowerA

Area CategoryB

Floor Area(ft2)

CAllowed

Watts / ft2

DAllowed Watts

(B X C)

1-Theater (Motion picture theater) 26850 0.83 2228622286Total Allowed Watts =

Proposed Interior Lighting PowerE

(C X D)D

FixtureWatt.

AFixture ID : Description / Lamp / Wattage Per Lamp / Ballast

BLamps/Fixture

C# of

Fixtures

1-Theater (Motion picture theater)LED 1: C1: 48" LED Pendant: Other: 1 1 144 144LED 2: D1: 4" LED Downlight: Other: 1 57 21 1197LED 3: DW: 4" LED Wall Washer: Other: 1 8 23 184LED 4: L1: 4' Linear LED: Other: 1 1 40 40LED 5: L2: 8' Linear LED: Other: 1 7 80 560LED 6: L3: 2' Linear LED: Other: 1 5 20 100LED 7: SD1: 1 Head LED: Other: 1 5 35 175LED 8: SD2: 2 Head LED: Other: 2 5 70 350LED 9: SD3: 3 Head LED: Other: 3 2 105 210LED 10: SD4: 4 Head LED: Other: 4 3 140 420LED 11: SD8: 8 Head LED: Other: 8 1 175 175LED 12: R6: 6' Dia Ring Pendant: Other: 1 7 56 392LED 13: R8: 8' Dia Ring Pendant: Other: 1 5 75 375LED 14: R12: 12' Dia Ring Pendant: Other: 1 1 113 113LED 15: R14: 14' Dia Ring Pendant: Other: 1 1 132 132LED 16: R16: 16' Dia Ring Pendant: Other: 1 2 151 302LED 17: R18: 18' Dia Ring Pendant: Other: 1 1 169 169LED 18: R20: 20' Dia Ring Pendant: Other: 1 1 188 188LED 19: U52: 52' Length of LED Rope: Other: 1 1 204 204LED 20: V18-11: 60' Length of LED rope: Other: 1 1 120 120


Metropolitan Theatre at the FoundryC:\Electricon\17119 Foundry Theatre\Design\Foundry.cck


E(C X D)

DFixtureWatt.


BLamps/Fixture

C# of

FixturesLED 21: Z1: Decorative LED Lamp: Other: 1 4 12 48LED 22: Z2: Decorative LED Lamp: Other: 1 3 12 36LED 23: A2: 2x4 LED Volumetric Troffer: Other: 1 4 31 124LED 24: B: 2x4 LED Prismatic Troffer: Other: 1 27 40 1080LED 25: B1: 2x4 LED Prismatic Troffer: Other: 1 12 40 480LED 26: B2: 2x2 LED Prismatic Troffer: Other: 1 1 35 35LED 27: C2: 2' LED Strip: Other: 1 1 22 22LED 28: C4: 4' LED Strip: Other: 1 5 42 210LED 29: D: 4" LED Dome Light: Other: 1 20 13 260LED 37: D2: 4" LED Recessed Can: Other: 1 12 10 120LED 30: EE: 4' LED Wall Mount: Other: 1 3 40 120LED 31: F: 2x4 LED Prismatic Troffer: Other: 1 8 40 320LED 32: G: LED Linear Ceiling Light: Other: 1 66 60 3960LED 33: M: 6" LED Recessed Can: Other: 1 13 35 455LED 34: R: 1x4 LED Flat Panel: Other: 1 7 39 273LED 35: S: LED Step Lighting: Other: 1 201 10 2010LED 36: W1: Decorative LED Wall Sconce: Other: 1 26 9 234

15337Total Proposed Watts =

Interior Lighting Compliance StatementCompliance Statement: The proposed interior lighting design represented in this document is consistent with the building plans,specifications, and other calculations submitted with this permit application. The proposed interior lighting systems have beendesigned to meet the 2012 IECC requirements in COMcheck Version 4.0.6.0 and to comply with any applicable mandatoryrequirements listed in the Inspection Checklist.


Interior Lighting PASSES: Design 31% better than code





Exterior Lighting Compliance Certificate



Construction Site:285 E 3rd StLoveland, CO 80537

Owner/Agent: Designer/Contractor:Lawrence Smith, P.E.Electricon, LLC37127 Cullison Ridge RdSeverance, CO [email protected]


Metropolitan Theatre at the Foundry

2 (Residential mixed use area)Exterior Lighting Zone

Allowed Exterior Lighting PowerA

Area/Surface CategoryB

QuantityC

AllowedWatts / Unit

DTradableWattage

EAllowed Watts

(B X C)

Front Doors (Main entry) 12 ft of door 20 Yes 240Side Doors (Other door (not main entry)) 33 ft of door 20 Yes 660

Total Tradable Watts (a) =Total Allowed Watts =

Total Allowed Supplemental Watts (b) =

900900600

(a) Wattage tradeoffs are only allowed between tradable areas/surfaces.(b) A supplemental allowance equal to 600 watts may be applied toward compliance of both non-tradable and tradable areas/surfaces.

Proposed Exterior Lighting PowerE

(C X D)D

FixtureWatt.


BLamps/Fixture

C# of

Fixtures

Front Doors ( Main entry 12 ft of door width): Tradable WattageLED 1: T180: 180 LED Linear Tape: Other: 1 1 540 540

Side Doors ( Other door (not main entry) 33 ft of door width): Tradable WattageLED 2: T100: 100 LED Linear Tape: Other: 1 1 300 300LED 3: N: Decorative LED Surface: Other: 1 4 15 60LED 4: WW: LED Wall Mount: Other: 1 4 27 108LED 5: WW1: Decorative LED Wall Mount: Other: 1 20 7 140

1148Total Tradable Proposed Watts =

Exterior Lighting Compliance StatementCompliance Statement: The proposed exterior lighting design represented in this document is consistent with the building plans,specifications, and other calculations submitted with this permit application. The proposed exterior lighting systems have beendesigned to meet the 2012 IECC requirements in COMcheck Version 4.0.6.0 and to comply with any applicable mandatoryrequirements listed in the Inspection Checklist.

Exterior Lighting PASSES: Design 23% better than code




Inspection ChecklistRequirements: 76.0% were addressed directly in the COMcheck software


Text in the "Comments/Assumptions" column is provided by the user in the COMcheck Requirements screen. For eachrequirement, the user certifies that a code requirement will be met and how that is documented, or that an exceptionis being claimed. Where compliance is itemized in a separate table, a reference to that table is provided.

Energy Code: 2012 IECC

Section#

& Req.IDPlan Review Complies? Comments/Assumptions

C103.2[PR4]1

Plans, specifications, and/orcalculations provide all informationwith which compliance can bedetermined for the interior lightingand electrical systems and equipmentand document where exceptions tothe standard are claimed. Informationprovided should include interiorlighting power calculations, wattage ofbulbs and ballasts, transformers andcontrol devices.



C103.2[PR8]1

Plans, specifications, and/orcalculations provide all informationwith which compliance can bedetermined for the exterior lightingand electrical systems and equipmentand document where exceptions tothe standard are claimed. Informationprovided should include exteriorlighting power calculations, wattage ofbulbs and ballasts, transformers andcontrol devices.



C406[PR9]1

Plans, specifications, and/orcalculations provide all informationwith which compliance can bedetermined for the additional energyefficiency package options.







Section#

& Req.IDRough-In Electrical Inspection Complies? Comments/Assumptions

C405.2.2.1[EL22]2

Automatic controls to shut off allbuilding lighting installed in allbuildings.



C405.2.1.1[EL23]2

Independent lighting controls installedper approved lighting plans and allmanual controls readily accessible andvisible to occupants.



C405.2.1.2[EL15]1

Lighting controls installed to uniformlyreduce the lighting load by at least50%.


Exception: Areas that are controlled by an occupancy sensor.

C405.2.2.3[EL16]2

Daylight zones provided withindividual controls that control thelights independent of general arealighting.



C405.2.3[EL17]3

Sleeping units have at least onemaster switch at the main entry doorthat controls wired luminaires andswitched receptacles.



C405.2.2.2[EL18]1

Occupancy sensors installed inrequired spaces.



C405.2.2.3[EL20]1

Primary sidelighted areas areequipped with required lightingcontrols.



C405.2.2.3[EL21]1

Enclosed spaces with daylight areaunder skylights and rooftop monitorsare equipped with required lightingcontrols.



C405.2.4[EL25]2

Automatic lighting controls for exteriorlighting installed.



C405.2.3[EL4]1

Separate lighting control devices forspecific uses installed per approvedlighting plans.



C405.3[EL19]3

Fluorescent luminaires with oddnumbered lamp configurations thatare within 10 feet center to center (ifrecess mounted) or are within 1 footedge to edge (if pendant or surfacemounted) shall be tandem wired.



C405.4[EL6]1

Exit signs do not exceed 5 watts perface.







Section#

& Req.IDRough-In Electrical Inspection Complies? Comments/Assumptions

C405.6[EL24]1

Exterior grounds lighting over 100 Wprovides >60 lm/W unless on motionsensor or fixture is exempt from scopeof code or from external LPD.



C405.2.3[EL8]1

Additional interior lighting powerallowed for special functions per theapproved lighting plans and isautomatically controlled andseparated from general lighting.








Section#


C408.2.5.1[FI16]3

Furnished as-built drawings forelectric power systems within 30 daysof system acceptance.


C303.3,C408.2.5.2[FI17]3

Furnished O&M instructions forsystems and equipment to thebuilding owner or designatedrepresentative.


C405.5.2[FI18]1

Interior installed lamp and fixturelighting power is consistent with whatis shown on the approved lightingplans, demonstrating proposed wattsare less than or equal to allowedwatts.


See the Interior Lighting fixture schedule for values.

C405.6.2[FI19]1

Exterior lighting power is consistentwith what is shown on the approvedlighting plans, demonstratingproposed watts are less than or equalto allowed watts.


See the Interior Lighting fixture schedule for values.

C408.3[FI33]1

Lighting systems have been tested toensure proper calibration, adjustment,programming, and operation.


C408.3[FI48]1

Lighting systems have been tested toensure proper calibration, adjustment,programming, and operation.







MATRIX OF RESPONSIBILITY 01 00 06 - 1

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 01 00 06 MATRIX OF RESPONSIBILITY 1.01 INTENT

A. The Table called “Matrix of Responsibility” is a separate document and a part of the overall Contract Documents to clarify and distinguish the Scopes of Work to be performed by General Contractor (GC), Landlord (L), Tenant (T), or Others (O). 1. Work to be performed by the General Contractor and/or its subcontractors and suppliers to be

included in the Base Bid to the Owner for the primary construction of this Building and Site. 2. Work to be performed partly or in its entirety by the Landlord, Tenant or by Others is Not In

Contract (N.I.C.). However, a certain degree of coordination, or at least awareness is required on behalf of the General Contractor.

B. The Matrix of Responsibility supersedes all Notes on Drawings and elsewhere in this Specifications for Work “NIC” (Not Included in Contract) or called for “By Owner”, “By Others”, etc. Please notify Architect of any such conflicts if encountered. Items listed in Matrix of Responsibility Table as “By Landlord”, “By Tenant”, or “By Others” may be performed by Suppliers, Vendors, and Specialty Contractors working directly for the Landlord and Tenant, but in any case are not to be included in the Scope of Work for the General Contract. Items marked in the Table as “GC” or as “Contractor” may be performed by Subcontractors. It is the General Contractor’s responsibility to divide the Work among various trades. Work by Contractor (“GC”) is included in the Matrix of Responsibility for clarification purposes. All other work shown on the Drawings and/or described in the Specifications shall be assumed to be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

END OF SECTION 01 00 06 – MATRIX OF RESPONSIBILITY

METR

OPO

LITAN FO

UN

DR

Y THEATR

E - MATR

IX OF R

ESPON

SIBILITY - MAY 25, 2018 1 of 7

GC

Land lord

TenantO

thersG

CLand lord

TenantO

thers

Pre-Construction, Testing and Site Logistics

1.1

Builder’s Risk Insurance & D

eductibleX

1.3H

VAC Testing & Balance

X1.4

Materials Testing

XX

1.4.1 Vapor M

itigation System Testing

XX

As required by Colorado D

ept of Public Health and Environm

ent1.5

Structural Special InspectionsX

X1.6

Soils Testing & Engineer Observation during

constructionX

X

1.7Building Perm

its & Agency ApprovalsX

XAny additional Subcontractor Fees to be paid by G

C or direct by

Subcontractors.1.7.1

Separate City of Loveland Sign Perm

itX

1.7.2 Larim

er County H

ealth Departm

ent ApprovalX

1.7.3 All Fees (Im

pact, Recording, Assessm

ent etc.) not otherw

ise listedX

1.8Site Access

G

C to coordinate through C

ity and BCI.

1.8.1 G

C R

eceiving & Staging AreasX

GC

to coordinate with Landlord.

1.8.2 Trash rem

oval associated w/ Tenant-supplied

items

X

1.8.3 Storage of Landlord-supplied equipm

ent & m

aterialsX

Items to be stored outside of building perim

eter.

1.8.4 Storage of Tenant-supplied equipm

ent & m

aterialsX

Items to be stored inside building perim

eter: Only item

s GC

is installing. Alternately, the Tenant and Landlord, at their agreed upon option, m

ay negotiate for storage in vacant space within other

surrounding buildings. 1.8.5

Off-loading of Tenant-supplied equipm

ent & m

aterialsX

Only item

s GC

is installing.

1.9W

eather ProtectionX

Site Utilities2.1

Dom

estic Water Tap, & Line to Building

XX

2.1.1 W

ater Tap FeeX

Water Tap Fees are w

aived by the City for this project.

2.1.2 W

ater Meter & M

eter PitX

X2.2

Fire Sprinkler Water Line from

Tap to BuildingX

X2.3

Natural G

as Tap & Line to BuildingX

XG

C to coordinate and schedule.

2.4Sew

er Tap & Line to BuildingX

X2.4.1

Sewer Tap Fee

XSew

er Tap Fees are waived by the C

ity for this project.2.5

Grease Filtered Sew

er Tap&Line to IntercepterX

X

#Item

ProvisionInstallation

Rem

arks

The Table called “Matrix of R

esponsibility” is a separate document and a part of the overall C

ontract Docum

ents to clarify and distinguish the Scopes of Work to be perform

ed by General C

ontractor (G

C), Landlord (L), Tenant (T), or O

thers (O). 1)W

ork to be performed by the G

eneral Contractor and/or its subcontractors and suppliers to be included in the Base Bid to the O

wner for the primary

construction of this Building and Site. 2)Work to be perform

ed partly or in its entirety by the Landlord, Tenant or by Others is N

ot In Contract (N

.I.C.). H

owever, a certain degree of coordination, or at least awareness is required on behalf of the G

eneral Contractor. The M

atrix of Responsibility supersedes all N

otes on Drawings and elsewhere in this Specifications for W

ork “NIC

” (Not Included in

Contract) or called for “By O

wner”, “By Others”, etc. Please notify Architect of any such conflicts if encountered. Item

s listed in this Table as “By Landlord”, “By Tenant”, or “By Others” m

ay be performed

by Suppliers, Vendors, and Specialty Contractors working directly for the Landlord and Tenant, but in any case are not to be included in the Scope of W

ork for the General C

ontract. Items m

arked in the Table as “G

C” or as “C

ontractor” may be perform

ed by Subcontractors. It is the General C

ontractor’s responsibility to divide the Work am

ong various trades. Work by C

ontractor (“GC

”) is included in the M

atrix of Responsibility for clarification purposes. All other work shown on the D

rawings and/or described in the Specifications shall be assumed to be the sole responsibility of the C

ontractor.

METR

OPO

LITAN FO

UN

DR

Y THEATR

E - MATR

IX OF R

ESPON


GC

Land lord

TenantO

thersG

CLand lord

TenantO

thers#

ItemProvision

InstallationR

emarks

2.5.1 G

rease Intercepter & Line to BuildingX

X2.6

Extension of (2) Roof D

rains from Building to

Lincoln AveX

XFrom

Building Face: GC

to install drains from roof to Landlord-

provided sidewalk chase.

2.7Electrical

2.7.1 C

ity Power D

esign Deposit

XX

2.7.2 Feeders

XX

2.7.3

Meter

C

ityX

2.7.4 Transform

erC

ityC

ity

2.7.6 C

T Cabinet

XX

2.8

Lighting Poles Proximate to Building

XX

These lights are not powered from

the Theatre Building.2.9

Festoon Lighting Attached to BuildingX

XThese lights are not pow

ered from the Theatre Building.

Other Site W

ork3.1

Over Excavation, Fill and Pad Preparation

XX

3.1.1 D

emolition of existing transform

er enclosure & footing

XX

3.2N

orthwest U

tilities Enclosure Walls & G

ateX

X3.3

Concrete Slab w

ithin Utilities Enclosure

XX

3.4Trash C

ompactor

XX

3.4.1 Electrical C

onnection to BuildingX

X3.5

Brick Wing W

all at Southwest C

orner of BuildingX

X

3.6Sm

all Patio & Railing South of D

ining Room

XX

3.7Sidew

alks & Paving Around BuildingX

X3.7.1

Extension of Sidewalks into Exit D

oor Coves

X

X

General Interior Finishes

4.1Auditorium

s4.1.1

Carpet and Pad at Auditorium

Aisles & within

rows

XX

GC

to provide smooth, level and clean, carpet-ready surfaces.

4.1.2 Vinyl Floor at Auditorium

Accessible Wheel

Chair Locations

XX

4.1.2.1 Transition Strips around Vinyl Flooring

XX

4.1.3 Sound Panels

XX

4.1.4 D

raperyX

X4.1.4.1

Duct Liner Insulation behind D

raperyX

X4.1.4.2

Duct Liner Insulation behind Screens

XX

4.1.5 W

all Carpet

XX

4.1.6 R

esilient Base at Auditoriums

XX

4.2R

esilient Flooring,Base & Transitions Elsewhere

XX

4.3Floor and C

eiling Tile at Restroom

s & Serving Station

XX

4.4C

arpet and Pad at Lobby & Corridor

XX

GC

to provide smooth, level and clean, carpet-ready surfaces.

4.5All Painting of W

alls, Soffits & Ceilings

XX

Tenant & Architect to approve samples and verify locations on Site.

METR

OPO

LITAN FO

UN

DR

Y THEATR

E - MATR

IX OF R

ESPON


GC

Land lord

TenantO

thersG

CLand lord

TenantO

thers#

ItemProvision

InstallationR

emarks

Auditorium Projection and Sound Equipm

ent5.1

Projection Equipment

XX

5.1.1 H

eat Exhaust Ducts, Fans & R

oof Penetrations

XX

5.1.2 M

akeup Air Unit, D

uctsX

X5.1.3

Projector Pedestals (equipment)

XX

5.1.4 Projector Platform

s (construction to 8” or 16” aff)

XX

5.2Projection W

indows

XX

GC

coordinate and verify rough opening size.5.3

Projection ScreensX

X5.3.1

Support StructuresX

X5.3.2

Duct Liner W

all Finish behind ScreenX

X5.3.3

Conduits and W

iring to Behind Screen Speaker X

XAssum

e (four) channels per Auditorium. 10 gauged stranded w

ire.

5.4Auditorium

Wall & C

eiling SpeakersX

X5.4.1

Blocking in walls for speakers

XX

5.4.2 C

onduitsX

X5.4.3

Wiring

XX

(Two) pairs of N

umber 12 to each location.

5.4.4 Associated Sound Equipm

entX

X5.5

Lobby and Corridor Sound System

sX

X5.5.1

Conduits

XX

5.5.2 W

iringX

X(Tw

o)5.5.3

Associated Sound Equipment

XX

Satellite and Digital Storage Systems

6.1Satellite D

ishes on roofX

X6.1.1

PadsX

X6.1.2

Routing of pow

er & signalX

X6.1.3

Roof penetrations

XX

6.1.4 R

oof structure reinforcement

XX

6.2Servers

XX

6.2.1 R

acksX

X6.2.2

Power - locking outlets

XX

6.2.3 C

ablingX

X6.3

Projection Room

Cabling D

ucts/Wire M

anagemt

XX

Information Technology

7.1Telephone System

s - VoIP X

X7.1.1

Conduits & Boxes

XX

7.1.2 W

iringX

X7.2

Wired N

etwork

XX

7.2.1 C

onduits & BoxesX

X7.2.2

Wiring

XX

7.2.3 Term

inations & Cover Plates

XX

METR

OPO

LITAN FO

UN

DR

Y THEATR

E - MATR

IX OF R

ESPON


GC

Land lord

TenantO

thersG

CLand lord

TenantO

thers#

ItemProvision

InstallationR

emarks

7.2.4 H

ubs, Switches, R

outers & Racks

XX

7.3W

ireless Netw

orks for StaffX

X7.4

Wireless N

etworks for Patrons

XX

7.4.1 Auditorium

Loyalty BeaconsX

X7.5

Ticket Kiosks in LobbyX

X7.5.1

Connection to N

etwork

XX

7.6Em

ergency Responder R

adio Signal Am

plificationX

XN

ot part of base project. Need w

ill be determined post occupancy.

Secondary Audio/Visual8.1

Televisions at the Bar & Dining

XX

8.1.1 M

ounting Hardw

areX

X8.1.2

Source Video Equipment

XX

8.1.2.1 C

able or Satellite Receivers & C

onnectionX

X8.1.3

Conduits & Boxes

XX

8.1.4 W

iringX

X8.2

Menu Boards, Show

Time Boards

XX

8.2.1 C

onduit & BoxesX

X

Fire Alarm and Security

9.1Fire D

etection & AlarmX

X9.2

Security Systems

XX

9.2.1 C

onduit & BoxesX

X9.2.2

Security Cam

ersX

X

Specialty Lighting10.1

ExteriorX

X10.2

LobbyX

X

10.3R

estrooms

XX

10.4C

orridorX

X10.5

Auditoriums

XX

10.5.1Linear W

all & Ceiling Lighting

XX

10.5.2 Step & Aisle Lighting

X

X

10.5.2.1 C

onduits, Boxes, & Wiring for Lighting

XX

10.6Projection R

oom10.6.1

Track/spot Lighting at ProjectorsX

X

Exterior Signs and Displays

11.1Address N

umerals on south elevation (non-

illuminated)

XX

11.2M

arquee on east wall & around SE corner

XX

11.2.1 Pow

er & Data R

unsX

X11.2.2

Programm

ing Terminal via PC

s at Office &

Host

XX

11.3“Theatre” blade sign on East W

allX

X

METR

OPO

LITAN FO

UN

DR

Y THEATR

E - MATR

IX OF R

ESPON


GC

Land lord

TenantO

thersG

CLand lord

TenantO

thers#

ItemProvision

InstallationR

emarks

11.3.1 Pow

er & Final Electrical Connections

XX

11.3.3 Associates Steel, W

indow Fram

es, Glazing,

Back LightingX

X

11.4“R

estaurant” sign on east wall (non-illum

inated)X

X

11.5“Theatre” sign on south w

allX

X11.5.1

Power and Final Electrical C

onnectionsX

X11.6

“Restaurant” sign on south w

all (non-illuminated)

XX

11.7“U

se Other D

oor” sign at Door 122.1

XX

11.8Poster C

asesX

X11.8.1

Weather-tight recess into exterior w

allsX

X11.8.2

Power and Final Electrical C

onnectionsX

X

Interior Signs and Displays12.1

Restroom

Signs - Code C

ompliant

XX

Need to be approved by Architect.

12.2Auditorium

Identification/numerals

XX

12.2.1 Pow

er & Final Electrical Connections

XX

12.3“Em

ergency Only” signs at (6) Auditorium

exitsX

X

12.4Poster C

asesX

X12.4.1

Power & Final Electrical C

onnectionsX

X12.4.2

Rem

ote Players & HD

MI C

ablingX

X12.4.3

Data C

onduits and BoxesX

X

12.5R

eader BoardsX

X12.6

Hanging Show

Times Boards in the Lobby

XX

12.7Sprinkler R

iser Room

IdentificationX

XN

eed to be approved by Architect.12.8

Other general room

identification signsX

XN

eed to be approved by Architect.

Kitchen Equipm

ent and Specialties13.1

Walk-In C

oolersX

XEquipm

ent provider Kamran.

13.1.1 R

emote condensers

XX

Equipment provider Kam

ran.13.1.2

Hose sets

XX


ran.13.1.3

Interior lightingX

XEquipm


13.1.4 Below

Slab Sweeps to Bar & Serving Station

XX

13.2Type-I Exhaust & M

akeup Air at Cook Line

XX


ran.13.2.1

Hoods

XX


ran.13.2.1.1

ANSU

L fire suppression systemX

XEquipm


13.2.2 Stainless steel w

all finishesX

XEquipm


13.2.3 Exhaust D

uctX

X

13.2.4

Exhaust Shafts & Access Panels-1-hr ratedX

X13.2.5

Exhaust FanX

X

13.2.5.1

Roof C

urbX

X13.2.6

Makeup Air D

uctsX

X

METR

OPO

LITAN FO

UN

DR

Y THEATR

E - MATR

IX OF R

ESPON


GC

Land lord

TenantO

thersG

CLand lord

TenantO

thers#

ItemProvision

InstallationR

emarks

13.2.7 M

akeup Air Shafts - non-ratedX

X13.2.8

Makeup Air U

nitsX

X

13.2.8.1

Roof C

urbsX

X13.3

Type-II Exhaust at Dishw

asherX

X13.3.1

Hood

N

/A - Direct C

onnection to Dishw

asher13.3.2

Duct (stainless steel)

XX

13.3.3 Shaft - non-rated

XX

13.3.4 Exhaust Fan

XX

13.3.4.1 C

urbX

X13.4

SinksX

X13.4.1

Dish & Prep Sinks

XX

Sinks procured by Kitchen Equipment Provider, stubbed out by

Plumber, ready for connection, from

GC

.13.4.1.1

FaucetsX

X13.4.1.2

Water Piping

XX

13.4.2 D

isposerX

XEquipm


13.4.2.1 Pow

er & Disconnect

XX

13.4.2.2 Sw

itch & Controls

XX


ran.13.4.3

Hand Sinks, Faucets and Piping

XX

13.4.4 Floor Sinks & C

oversX

X13.5

Cook Line Equipm

entX

XEquipm


13.6M

isc Equipment

XX


ran.13.7

TablesX

XEquipm


13.8Shelving

XX


ran.13.9

FRP W

all FinishesX

X13.1

Water Filtration System

XX


ran.13.11

Floor Mats

XX


ran.

Bar Equipm

ent and Specialties14.1

Bar Counter & C

abinetryX

X14.1.1

Bar Countertop Lights

XX

14.1.2

Bar Die Finishes

XX

GC

coordinate products with Trapp Associates.

14.1.3 Bar D

ie Lighting X

XG

C coordinate products w

ith Trapp Associates.14.1.3.1

ElectricalX

X14.2

Bar StoolsX

XTrapp w

ill spec and assist in procurement.

14.3Bar Equipm

entX

X14.4

Plumbing Fixtures

XX

Assuming raw

finishes, that would be G

C/plum

ber. For equipment

connections, that will be equipm

ent provider.14.5

Drink D

ispensing Systems

XX

Soda machines w

ill be Pepsi. Draft beer system

will be equipm

ent provider.

14.6C

O2 and N

itrogen Gas System

sX

XG

C coordinate w

ith Green C

O2.

14.6.1 C

hases & Conduits

XX

14.6.2 Exterior Fill Station

XX

CG

coordinate with G

reen CO

2.

METR

OPO

LITAN FO

UN

DR

Y THEATR

E - MATR

IX OF R

ESPON


GC

Land lord

TenantO

thersG

CLand lord

TenantO

thers#

ItemProvision

InstallationR

emarks

Host Station, O

ffices and Staff Areas15.1

Box Office Equipm

ent, Com

puters, Ticket Printers

XX

GC

to verify power requirem

ent and data locations.

15.2Lockers

XX

Refer to Specification Section 10 51 13.

15.3C

asework & C

ountertopsX

X15.4

Overhead rolling countertop door - insulated, non-

ratedX

X

15.5C

locksX

X15.6

Energy Managem

ent SystemX

XC

ontrolled by Tenant's Com

puters not stand along device.15.7

Loose Furniture, Desks, C

hairs, Cabinets

XX

15.8Safes, Lock Boxes, etc.

XX

Coordinate w

ith GC

regarding any in-slab or other permanent

mounting.

15.9Shelving N

ot Otherw

ise SpecifiedX

X15.10

Receiving R

oom Shelving

XX

15.11C

hainlink FencingX

X15.12

Countertops at O

ffice 116, Safe 117, & Custom

er Service 118

XX

Restroom

s and Janitorial16.1

Plumbing Fixtures

XX

16.2Shelving

XX

16.3M

op Hooks

XX

16.4Electric H

and Dryers

XX

16.5All Toilet R

oom Accessories

XX

Refer to Toilet Accessories Key on D

rawings.

16.6Partitions

XX

16.7Exhaust Fans, D

uct, Grilles

XX

Dining R

oom Furnishings and Accessories

17.1W

ait StationX

XKam

ran is designing.17.1.1

Lighting, Cabinetry, D

ata, Conduits,

Countertops, Flooring, Shelving

XX

17.2Tables & C

hairsX

XTrapp w

ill spec and assist Tenant in procurement.

17.3R

amp Perim

eter Wall

XX

17.4Booth Seating

XX

Trapp will spec and assist Tenant in procurem

ent.17.5

Point of Sale, Food Carts

XX

Auditorium Furnishings and Accessories

18.1R

ecliner SeatingX

X18.1.1

Electrical Service & Connections

XX

18.3Service R

equest SystemX

X18.3.1

Per Row

Connection to N

etwork

XX

ADMINISTRATIVE PROVISIONS 01 10 00 - 1

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 01 10 00 ADMINISTRATIVE PROVISIONS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Work Under This Contract includes all materials, equipment and labor necessary to complete the Work indicated, specified or reasonably inferred therefrom, including the complete construction of a 28,789 Square Foot Seven (7) Screen Theatre with Restaurant Lobby as indicated on the Drawings. The Work will be accomplished under a single contract with the General Contractor. General Contractor (GC) is responsible to coordinate general construction work and Schedule. Additional Work, including providing new library shelving units and furniture, shall be accomplished by others, and shall be coordinated by the G.C. Any conflicts between Drawings and Specifications, the more stringent shall govern.

1.02. MATRIX OF RESPONSIBILITY

A. The Table called “Matrix of Responsibility” is a separate document and a part of the overall Contract Documents to clarify and distinguish the Scopes of Work to be performed by General Contractor (GC), Landlord (L), Tenant (T), or Others (O). 1. Work to be performed by the General Contractor and/or its subcontractors and suppliers to be

included in the Base Bid to the Owner for the primary construction of this Building and Site. 2. Work to be performed partly or in its entirety by the Landlord, Tenant or by Others is Not In

Contract (N.I.C.). However, a certain degree of coordination, or at least awareness is required on behalf of the General Contractor.

B. The Matrix of Responsibility supersedes all Notes on Drawings and elsewhere in this Specifications for Work “NIC” (Not Included in Contract) or called for “By Owner”, “By Others”, etc. Please notify Architect of any such conflicts if encountered. Items listed in Matrix of Responsibility Table as “By Landlord”, “By Tenant”, or “By Others” may be performed by Suppliers, Vendors, and Specialty Contractors working directly for the Landlord and Tenant, but in any case are not to be included in the Scope of Work for the General Contract. Items marked in the Table as “GC” or as “Contractor” may be performed by Subcontractors. It is the General Contractor’s responsibility to divide the Work among various trades. Work by Contractor (“GC”) is included in the Matrix of Responsibility for clarification purposes. All other work shown on the Drawings and/or described in the Specifications shall be assumed to be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

1.03 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS

A. Specifications are of abbreviated, simplified or streamlined type and include incomplete sentences. Omissions of words or phrases such as “the Contractor shall”, “in conformity therewith”, “shall be”, “as noted on the Drawings”, “a”, “the”, are intentional. Supply omitted words or phrases by inference in same manner as they are when “NOTE” occurs on Drawings. Supply words “shall be” or “shall” by inference when colon is used within sentences or phrases. Supply words “on the Drawings” by inference when “as indicated” is used with sentences or phrases. “Provide” shall mean furnish and install unless specifically noted otherwise.

1.04 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES

A. Limit operations under this Contract to the area as shown on the Architectural Site Plan. The Site Staging Area shall be approved by Landlord. Disruption of business activities around construction site will not be tolerated. Coordinate continual access during construction. GC to provide security fencing, barricades, etc., as required, to restrict public access to construction and staging areas.

1.05 EXAMINATION OF SITE

A. Existing subsurface conditions including, but not limited to, soil boring data and any underground utilities shown on the plans and/or referred to in the Specifications are indicative and are for informational purposes only. It shall be the Contractor’s obligation to verify and augment such information and data to fully satisfy himself as to the conditions under which the Work will be done. The Contractor shall maintain in operating condition all active utilities encountered in this construction. He shall contact all public utilities and all pertinent contractors involved and have their representative locate their pipes, conduits, cables, or other facilities before construction is started. The Owner and Owner’s representative do not assume responsibility for location or disturbance of utilities or other existing subsurface features or conditions encountered on this Project. Where test boring logs indicating underground conditions or surveys of underground utilities are shown on the plans, such logs and surveys shall be considered only as indicative of conditions and the Owner

ADMINISTRATIVE PROVISIONS 01 10 00 - 2

and/or Architect shall not be held responsible for any variance in actual conditions encountered at the time of construction.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate work of the various sections of Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed or provided by Owner.

B. Verify characteristics of elements of interrelated operating equipment are compatible; coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connection to, and placing in service, such equipment.

C. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically. Follow routing indicated for pipes, ducts, and conduits as closely as practicable; make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. Minimize penetrations of Building’s fire-resistant rated, sound controlling and/or thermal/moisture controlling assembles, firestop, fire block and/or damper, and such penetrations as necessary to maintain assembly rating or properties.

D. In finished areas conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in the construction unless indicated otherwise. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

1.07 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Provide field engineering services; establish grades, lines and levels by use of recognized engineering survey practices. Locate and protect control and reference points.

1.08 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. For products specified by association or trade standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

B. The date of the standard is that in effect as of the Date of Signing of the Contract Documents except when a specific date is specified.

1.09 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Openings in construction which are required by other Contractors shall be left by crafts involved. It is the responsibility of various Contractors to supply in advance, proper and sufficiently detailed information. In event of failure to supply this advance information, cutting as may be required shall be done only after concurrence of Architect and at the expense of the negligent party.

B. Wherever any pipe, conduit, duct, steel member, bracket, equipment, or other material penetrates or passes through fire resistant wall, ceiling or floor, completely seal voids in construction with fire resistant material, embedding sealing material full thickness of wall, ceiling or floor.

C. Where surfaces are exposed, finish with same materials specified in finish schedule or material that is on constructed surfaces. Work shall be done by appropriate trade at expense of negligent party.

END OF SECTION 01 10 00 – ADMINISTRATIVE PROVISIONS

SUBMITTALS 01 33 00 - 1

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P# 1709 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTALS 1.01 PROCEDURE

A. Submittal: The General Contractor shall make submittals to the Architect. Submittals made directly by Subcontractors or Suppliers will not be accepted. Submittals made by facsimiles will not be accepted. Submittals made by electronic mail will only be accepted if submitted and arranged for in advance in universal file formats such as Adobe Acrobat (.pdf) or Rich Text (.rtf). Proprietary formats such as .dwg, .doc and .xls will not be accepted.

B. Review: Architect and Design Team Engineers will review submittals for conformity with design only. Quantities and dimensions are the responsibility of the Contractor. Proper fitting, construction of work, furnishing of materials and work required by the Contract Documents but not indicated in submittals remain the responsibility of the Contractor. Review of submittals shall not be construed as approval from requirements of Contract Documents unless deviations from Contract Documents have been specifically noted on submittals.

C. Resubmittal: The General Contractor shall make resubmittals of rejected submittals until the concurrence of the Architect and/or Design Team Engineers is obtained.

1.02 PROGRESS SCHEDULE

A. Schedule: Form of a chart and indicate the start and completion of each of the elements on the Schedule of Values. The schedule shall indicate the major dependencies among elements on the schedule. The completion time shall be as specified in the Agreement. The Schedule shall be revised when the completion time is revised by Change Order.

B. Prepare and submit an estimate of partial payments as reflected by estimated Work progress with submittal of Construction Schedule.

C. Nothing in these requirements shall be deemed to be a usurpation of the Contractor’s authority and responsibility to plan and schedule the Work as he sees fit, subject to all other requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA

A. Shop Drawings: Submit four (4) plain paper copies or one (1) reproducible copy of all drawings or submit electronic files per Item 1.01, A. above.

B. Product Data: Submit four (4) copies or submit electronic files per Item 1.01, A. above. C. Job Site Documents: Only accepted Shop Drawings or Product Data shall be kept at the job site. The

General Contractor shall keep a complete set of such documents on file at the job site. D. Field Measurements: Required field measurements are the responsibility of the Contractor and will be

made before Shop Drawings have been checked by the Architect, unless otherwise noted. 1.04 SAMPLES

A. The General Contractor shall assemble and deliver to the Architect a complete collection of required Samples, as indicated in the Construction Documents.

B. Upon receipt of a complete collection of Samples the Architect will, with reasonable promptness, make the selections and prepare and deliver to the General Contractor a schedule addressing items subject to selection.

C. The Architect reserves the right not to make individual determination or selections until all Samples are furnished.

END OF SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTALS

QUALITY CONTROL 01 40 00 - 1

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P# 1709 SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY CONTROL 1.01 GENERAL

A. Maintain quality control over Suppliers, Manufacturers, Products, Services, Site Conditions, and Workmanship to produce Work of specified quality.

1.02 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES

A. The Owner will pay for testing laboratory inspections and tests. Coordinate with Owner. B. Cooperate with testing laboratory to furnish access, samples and temporary facilities as required.

Provide testing laboratory sufficient prior notice for services. 1.03 MOCK-UPS

A. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchoring devices, flashings, seals, and finishes.

B. Required Mock-ups: 4 ft. wide x 6 ft. high exterior wall system to include thin brick veneer with stucco with intersecting reveals, parapet/cornice cap flashing w/membrane roofing integration, and partial intermediate roof eave “eyebrow” with all finish surfaces and exposed corner.

C. Accepted mock-ups are representative of quality required for the Work, including material color, finish, installation, flashing and detailing.

D. Remove mock-up at Project completion, or as directed by Architect.

END OF SECTION 01 40 00 – QUALITY CONTROL

CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 1

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P# 1709 SECTION 01 50 00 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.01 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING

A. Service: The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide temporary electrical service to site for construction purposes.

1.02 TEMPORARY HEAT AND ENCLOSURES

A. The Contractor shall pay for temporary heat and enclosures necessary for the execution of Work. 1.03 TEMPORARY WATER

A. The Owner shall pay to extend any required temporary water service for construction purposes from existing water service.

1.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES

A. The General Contractor shall provide and maintain, adequate chemical toilet facilities. 1.05 TEMPORARY PROTECTIVE FACILITIES

A. The General Contractor shall provide and maintain protective devices and facilities for the protection of the public and the general protection of all workers on the Project.

1.06 FIELD OFFICE AND TELEPHONE

A. The General Contractor shall provide and maintain field office with telephone and internet service. 1.07 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Each Contractor shall keep the building and site free of waste materials and rubbish. END OF SECTION 01 50 00 – CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS

MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01 66 00 - 1

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 01 66 00 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 1.01 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in undamaged condition in Manufacturer’s unopened containers or packaging, dry. 1.02 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Store products in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions. 1.03 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Use Substitution Request Form in Division 1 – General Requirements, Section 00 43 25.

END OF SECTION 01 66 00 – MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01 70 00 - 1

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 01 70 00 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 1.01 FINAL CLEANING

A. Contractor shall perform final cleaning of entire building interior and areas of exterior addition and site improvement.

1.02 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. At Contract Closeout, submit three (3) copies of As-Built Drawings and Specification documents to Architect.

1.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit three (3) copies of operation and maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. 1.04 SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATION

A. Prior to final inspection, demonstrate operation of each system to Architect and Tenant. Instruct in operation, and maintenance of equipment and systems.

1.05 WARRANTIES AND LIEN WAVERS

A. Provide three (3) notarized copies executed by Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Manufacturers. 1.06 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Provide products, spare parts, and maintenance materials in quantities specified in each Section. 1.07 FEES AND PERMITS

A. The Contractor shall procure and pay for any City Fees and Permits related to the Project. B. The General Contractor and all Subcontractors shall pay for all licenses as required to perform their

Work. C. The Owner agrees to procure and maintain Builders Risk Insurance on the Project at all times.

1.08 CERTIFICATES

A. General Contractor shall provide Certificate of Substantial Completion, signed by appropriate parties. B. General Contractor shall provide Certificate of Occupancy and written approval from all required

approval agencies.

END OF SECTION 01 70 00 – CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

END OF DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION 02 32 00

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709

SECTION 02 32 00 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION Geotechnical Subsurface Exploration Report Earth Engineering Consultants, LLC, 4396 Greenfield Drive, Windsor, Colorado 80550; Project No. 1162092, dated November 1, 2016.

GEOTECHNICAL SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION REPORT THE FOUNDRY

LOVELAND, COLORADO EEC PROJECT NO. 1162092

Prepared for:

Brinkman Partners 3528 Precision Drive, Suite 100

Fort Collins, Colorado 80528

Attn: Mr. Scott Ranweiller ([email protected])

Prepared by:

Earth Engineering Consultants, LLC 4396 Greenfield Drive

Windsor, Colorado 80550

4396 G R E E N F I E L D DR I V E WI N D S O R, C O L O R A D O 8 0 5 5 0

( 9 7 0 ) 5 4 5 - 3 9 0 8 F A X ( 9 7 0 ) 6 6 3 - 0 2 8 2

November 1, 2016 Brinkman Partners 3528 Precision Drive, Suite 100 Fort Collins, Colorado 80528 Attn: Mr. Scott Ranweiller ([email protected]) Development Manager Re: Geotechnical Subsurface Exploration Report The Foundry

Loveland, Colorado EEC Project No. 1162092 Mr. Ranweiller: Enclosed, herewith, are the results of the geotechnical subsurface exploration completed by Earth Engineering Consultants, LLC (EEC) for the referenced project. For this exploration, fourteen (14) soil borings were drilled at preselect locations within the proposed on-site development areas. The general site borings were extended to approximate depths of 35 to 50 feet below present site grades. Four (4) borings were completed in city streets right-of-ways to depths of approximately 10 feet. This exploration was completed in general accordance with our proposal dated September 19, 2016. In summary, the subsurface soils encountered beneath the surficial landscape/pavements generally consisted of cohesive sandy lean clay and lean clay with sand layers and soft to very soft zones which extended to the fine to coarse granular strata below. Sand with gravel, varying fines and intermittent cobbles was encountered beneath the upper cohesive soils at depths of approximately 12 to 19 feet below existing site grades and extended to the bedrock below. Claystone/sandstone/siltstone bedrock with intermittent sandstone lenses was encountered at depths of approximately 19 to 26 feet below existing site grades and extended to the depths explored, approximately 50 feet. Groundwater was encountered across the site during the field exploration at approximate depths of 9 to 16 feet below existing site grades.

GEOTECHNICAL SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION REPORT THE FOUNDRY

LOVELAND, COLORADO EEC PROJECT NO. 1162092

November 1, 2016 INTRODUCTION The geotechnical subsurface exploration for the proposed “The Foundry” development in Loveland, Colorado, has been completed. For this exploration, fourteen (14) soil borings extending to depths of approximately 35 to 50 feet below present site grades were drilled at pre-selected locations within the proposed development areas. This exploration was completed in general accordance with our proposal dated September 19, 2016. We understand this project involves the development of properties bounded by North Cleveland Avenue on the west, North Lincoln Avenue on the east, East 1st Street on the south end, East 3rd Street on the north as well as the northeast corner of North Lincoln Avenue and East 3rd Street in downtown Loveland. The properties are identified as Block 1, Block 2 and Block 3 as outlined on the attached overall development diagram. At this time, Block 1 is expected to be developed with a four-story, slab-on-grade hotel. Block 2 will include two (2) five-story, slab-on-grade mixed use retail/apartment buildings and a parking garage with four levels above grade and one subterranean level. Block 3 is expected to be developed with a 25,000 square-foot movie theatre. Foundation loads for the proposed structures are expected to be moderate to heavy; floor loads are expected to be light. Former structures have been recently removed from the south half of Block 2 and from Block 1 along with the removal of pavements, sidewalks, etc. associated with East 2nd Street between those blocks. A structure was previously removed from the southeast corner of Cleveland and 3rd Street and the remaining building/improvements in the development area will be removed as the development progresses. East 2nd and East 3rd Streets will be reconstructed as a part of the overall development; geotechnical/pavement design recommendations for the city street redevelopment are provided in a separate report. The purpose of this report is to describe the subsurface conditions encountered in the test borings, analyze and evaluate the test data and provide geotechnical recommendations concerning design and construction of foundations and support of floor slabs for the new buildings and development of site flatwork and pavements.

Earth Engineering Consultants, LLC EEC Project No. 1162092 November 1, 2016 Page 2 EXPLORATION AND TESTING PROCEDURES The boring locations were established in the field by representatives from Earth Engineering Consultants, LLC (EEC) by pacing and estimating angles from identifiable site features. Those approximate boring locations are indicated on the attached boring location diagram. The locations of the borings should be considered accurate only to the degree implied by the methods used to make the field measurements. Photographs of the site taken at the time of drilling are included with this report. The test borings were completed using a truck mounted, CME-75 drill rig equipped with a hydraulic head employed in drilling and sampling operations. The boreholes were advanced using 4¼-inch nominal inside diameter hollow stem augers. The hollow stem augers were required to maintain open boreholes in granular subgrade soils below the water table to allow for sampling of the subgrade materials. Samples of the subsurface materials encountered were obtained using split barrel and California barrel sampling procedures in general accordance with ASTM Specifications D1586 and D3550, respectively. In the split barrel and California barrel sampling procedures, standard sampling spoons are advanced into the ground with a 140-pound hammer falling a distance of 30 inches. The number of blows required to advance the split barrel and California barrel samplers is recorded and is used to estimate the in-situ relative density of cohesionless soils and, to a lesser degree of accuracy, the consistency of cohesive soils and hardness of weathered bedrock. In the California barrel sampling procedure, relatively intact samples are obtained in removable brass liners. All samples obtained in the field were sealed and returned to our laboratory for further examination, classification, and testing. Laboratory moisture content tests were completed on each of the recovered samples. Atterberg limits and washed sieve analysis tests were completed on selected samples to evaluate the quantity and plasticity of fines in the subgrade samples. Swell/consolidation tests were completed on selected samples to evaluate the potential for the subgrade materials to change volume with variation in moisture and load. Water soluble sulfate tests were completed on selected samples to evaluate potential for sulfate attack on site concrete. Results of the outlined tests are indicated on the attached boring logs and summary sheets. As part of the testing program, all samples were examined in the laboratory and classified in general accordance with the attached General Notes and the Unified Soil Classification System, based on the

Earth Engineering Consultants, LLC EEC Project No. 1162092 November 1, 2016 Page 3 soil’s texture and plasticity. The estimated group symbol for the Unified Soil Classification System is indicated on the boring logs and a brief description of that classification system is included with this report. Classification of the bedrock was based on visual and tactual observation of disturbed samples and auger cuttings. Coring and/or petrographic analysis may reveal other rock types. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS Based on results of the field borings and laboratory testing, subsurface conditions can be generalized as follows. The subsurface soils encountered beneath surficial landscaping, pavements or other improvements, generally consisted of cohesive sandy lean clay and lean clay with sand layers which extended to a fine to coarse granular strata below. The essentially cohesive soils were generally soft to stiff with zones of very soft soils. The site sandy clay/clayey sand soils exhibited low expansion potential with compressible/consolidation characteristics in the softer materials. Intermittent sand and gravel lenses were encountered at increased depths within the cohesive zone. Poorly-graded sand with gravel and varying fines and intermittent cobbles was encountered beneath the upper cohesive soils at depths of approximately 12 to 19 feet below existing site grades and extended to the bedrock below. The granular materials were dense to very dense. Siltstone/sandstone/claystone bedrock with intermittent cemented sandstone lenses was encountered in each of the borings beneath the overburden soils at depths of approximately 19 to 28 feet below existing site grades and extended to the depths explored, approximately 35 to 50 feet. The bedrock formation was weathered nearer surface; however, became less weathered and more competent with depth. The bedrock generally exhibited moderate swell potential with occasional zones of high swell. The stratification boundaries indicated on the boring logs represent the approximate locations of changes in soil and rock types. In-situ, the transition of materials may be gradual and indistinct. GROUNDWATER WATER CONDITIONS Observations were made while drilling and after completion of the borings to detect the presence and depth to hydrostatic groundwater. At the time of drilling, free water was observed across the site at approximate depths of 9 to 16 feet below existing site grades. The borings were backfilled upon completion of the water level measurements; subsequent groundwater measurements were not obtained.

Earth Engineering Consultants, LLC EEC Project No. 1162092 November 1, 2016 Page 4 Fluctuations in groundwater levels can occur over time depending on variations in hydrologic conditions, irrigation demands on and/or adjacent to the site and other conditions not apparent at the time of this report. Longer term monitoring of water levels in cased wells, which are sealed from the influence of surface water would be required to more accurately evaluate fluctuations in groundwater levels at the site. We have typically noted deepest groundwater levels in late winter and shallowest groundwater levels in mid to late summer. Zones of perched and/or trapped water can be encountered at times throughout the year in more permeable zones in the subgrade soils and perched water is commonly observed in subgrade soils immediately above lower permeability bedrock. ANALYSIS AND RECOMMENDATIONS: General Considerations and Discussion of Native Overburden Soils The subject site is generally overlain by approximately 12 to 19 feet of cohesive clay soils which extend to a fine to coarse granular soils below. The cohesive soils are commonly soft to very soft and have a tendency to consolidate when inundated with water and subjected to increased loads. These soils would also show instability and strength loss when wetted and/or subjected to construction traffic loads. Final grading plans were not provided prior to the preparation of this subsurface exploration report. Based on information provided, we estimate small cuts and fills may be necessary within these areas to achieve final surface grades. Portions of the site buildings are expected to extend to varying depths below final site grades. The recommendations contained in this report assume that small amounts of fill will be required, and will be placed according to the recommendations provided herein. If there are any significant deviations from the assumptions concerning fill depth and/or placement when the final site plan is developed, the conclusions and recommendations of this report should be reviewed and confirmed/modified as necessary to reflect the final planned site configuration.

Site Preparation We understand the remaining existing structures on the site along with any associated site improvements will be demolished/removed from the site prior to new building construction. In addition, all existing vegetation, tree root growth from the existing deciduous trees within the site improvement areas, topsoil, and any uncontrolled fill material should be removed from improvement

Earth Engineering Consultants, LLC EEC Project No. 1162092 November 1, 2016 Page 5 and/or fill areas on the site. Demolition of the existing structures, concrete sidewalks, pavement and other miscellaneous features should include complete removal of all concrete or debris within the proposed construction area. Site preparation should include removal of any loose backfill found adjacent to the existing site structures/improvements. All materials derived from the demolition of the existing building, pavements, sidewalks or other site improvements should be removed from the site and not be allowed for use in any on-site fills. Care should also be taken to see that all components of prior site structures including any associated backfill materials have been removed and any fill placed in those areas has been placed and compacted to support overlying improvements. After stripping, completing all cuts, and removing all unacceptable materials/soils, and prior to placement of any fill or site improvements, we recommend the exposed soils be scarified to a minimum depth of 9 inches, adjusted in moisture content to within ±2% of standard Proctor optimum moisture content and compacted to at least 95% of the material's standard Proctor maximum dry density as determined in accordance with ASTM Specification D698. Fill soils required for developing the building and site subgrades should consist of approved, low volume change materials which are free from organic matter and debris. It is our opinion the on-site cohesive sandy clay soils could be used as general site fill, provided adequate moisture treatment and compaction procedures are followed. We recommend all fill materials and foundation wall backfill materials, be placed in loose lifts not to exceed 9 inches thick and adjusted in moisture content, ±2% for cohesive soils and ±3% for cohesionless soils, of optimum moisture content and compacted to at least 95% of the material’s maximum dry density as determined in accordance with ASTM Specification D698, the standard Proctor procedure. If the site’s sandy cohesive soils are used as fill material, care will be needed to maintain the recommended moisture content prior to and during construction of overlying improvements. Settlement of the backfill soils should be anticipated with total load settlement estimated on the order of 1% of the backfill height. Care should be exercised after preparation of the subgrades to avoid disturbing the subgrade materials. Positive drainage should be developed away from the structures to avoid wetting of subgrade materials. Subgrade materials becoming wet subsequent to construction of the site structures can result in unacceptable performance.

Earth Engineering Consultants, LLC EEC Project No. 1162092 November 1, 2016 Page 6

Foundation Systems – General Considerations

The upper 12 to 19 feet of in-situ soils on this site consist of cohesive sandy lean clay with soft to very soft zones. Over excavation and backfill techniques could potentially be used to develop support for lightly loaded structures on the site; however, the in-situ soils would generally be unsuitable for support of expected moderate to heavy foundation loads. “Deep” foundations extend to/into the underlying sands and gravels or bedrock materials would be needed to support the proposed structures. Specific recommendations for straight shaft drilled piers bearing into the underlying bedrock formation are provided with this report. Alternative foundation systems could be considered and we would be pleased to discuss other alternatives upon request.

Drilled Piers/Caissons Foundations

Based on the subgrade conditions observed in the test borings and on the anticipated foundation loads, we recommend supporting the proposed buildings on grade beam and straight shaft drilled pier/caisson foundation system extending into the underlying bedrock formation. Particular attention will be required in the construction of drilled piers due to the depth of bedrock; presence of cobbles in the granular soils and presence of groundwater.

For axial compression loads, the drilled piers could be designed using a maximum end bearing pressure of 40,000 pounds per square foot (psf), along with a skin-friction of 4,000 psf for the portion of the pier extended into the underlying firm and/or harder bedrock formation. Straight shaft piers should be drilled a minimum of 15 feet into competent or harder bedrock. Drilled piers should be at least 25 feet in length. Lower values may be appropriate for pier “groupings” depending on the pier diameters and spacing. Pile groups should be evaluated individually.

When the lateral capacity of drilled piers is evaluated by the L-Pile program, we recommend that internally generated load-deformation (P-Y) curves be used. The following parameters may be used for the design of laterally loaded piers using the L-Pile program.

Table 1 – Parameters for design of laterally loaded piers.

Parameters Native Granular Soils

On-Site Overburden Cohesive Soils Bedrock

Unit Weight of Soil (pcf) 130(1) 115(1) 125(1)

Cohesion (psf) 0 100 5000

Angle of Internal Friction (I) (degrees) 30 20 20

Strain Corresponding to ½ Max. Principal Stress Difference H50 --- 0.02 0.015

1) Reduce by 62.4 pcf below the water table

Earth Engineering Consultants, LLC EEC Project No. 1162092 November 1, 2016 Page 7 Drilling caissons to design depth should be possible with conventional heavy-duty single flight power augers equipped with rock teeth on the majority of the site. However, areas of well-cemented sandstone bedrock lenses may be encountered within the bedrock at various depths where specialized drilling equipment and/or rock excavating equipment may be required. Varying zones of cobbles may also be encountered in the granular soils above the bedrock. Excavation penetrating the well-cemented sandstone bedrock may require the use of specialized heavy-duty equipment, together with rock augers and/or core barrels. Consideration should be given to obtaining a unit price for difficult caisson excavation in the contract documents for the project. Due to the presence of granular soils and groundwater at approximate depths of 9 to 16 feet below site grades, maintaining open shafts may be difficult without stabilizing measures. We expect temporary casing will be required to adequately/properly drill and clean piers prior to concrete placement. Groundwater should be removed from each pier hole prior to concrete placement. Pier concrete should be placed immediately after completion of drilling and cleaning. A maximum 3-inch depth of groundwater is acceptable in each pier prior to concrete placement. If pier concrete cannot be placed in dry conditions, a tremie should be used for concrete placement. Due to potential sloughing and raveling, foundation concrete quantities may exceed calculated geometric volumes. Pier concrete with slump in the range of 6 to 8 inches is recommended. Casing used for pier construction should be withdrawn in a slow continuous manner maintaining a sufficient head of concrete to prevent infiltration of water or the creation of voids in pier concrete. Foundation excavations should be observed by the geotechnical engineer. A representative of the geotechnical engineer should inspect the bearing surface and pier configuration. If the subsurface conditions encountered differ from those presented in this report, supplemental recommendations may be required.

We estimate the long-term settlement of drilled pier foundations designed and constructed as outlined above would be less than 1 inch.

Seismic Site Classification The site soil conditions consist of approximately 20 to 30 feet of overburden soils overlying moderately hard to hard bedrock. The below grade parking will extend to near medium dense to

Earth Engineering Consultants, LLC EEC Project No. 1162092 November 1, 2016 Page 8 dense granular soils underlain by the bedrock. For those site conditions, the International Building Code indicates a Seismic Site Classification of D.

Lateral Earth Pressures

The new parking garage building will be constructed over one level of subterranean parking. Lesser extent/areas of below grade construction would be expected for the other site buildings. The below grade walls will be subjected to unbalanced lateral earth pressures. Any site retaining walls or similar structures would also be subject to lateral soil forces. Passive lateral earth pressures may help resist the driving forces for retaining wall or other similar site structures.

Active lateral earth pressures could be used for design of structures where some movement of the structure is anticipated, such as retaining walls. The total deflection of structures for design with active earth pressure is estimated to be on the order of one half of one percent of the height of the down slope side of the structure. We recommend at-rest pressures be used for design of structures where rotation of the walls is restrained, including the below grade parking structure walls. Passive pressures and friction between the footing and bearing soils could be used for design of resistance to movement of retaining walls.

Coefficient values for backfill with anticipated types of soils for calculation of active, at-rest and passive earth pressures are provided in Table 2. Equivalent fluid pressure is equal to the coefficient times the appropriate soil unit weight. Those coefficient values are based on horizontal backfill with backfill soils consisting of essentially granular materials with a friction angle of a 30 degrees or low volume change cohesive soils with a friction angle of 20 degrees. For the at-rest and active earth pressures, slopes down and away from the structure would result in reduced driving forces with slopes up and away from the structures resulting in greater forces on the walls. The passive resistance would be reduced with slopes away from the wall. The top 30 inches of soil on the passive resistance side of walls could be used as a surcharge load; however, it should not be used as a part of the passive resistance value. Frictional resistance is equal to the tangent of the friction angle times the normal force. Surcharge loads or point loads placed in the backfill can also create additional loads on below grade walls. Those situations should be designed on an individual basis. The outlined values do not include factors of safety nor allowances for hydrostatic loads and are based on assumed friction angles, which should be verified after potential material sources have been identified.


Table 2 - Coefficients for lateral earth pressures

Soil Type Low Plasticity Cohesive Medium Dense Granular

Wet Unit Weight 115 135

Saturated Unit Weight 135 145

Friction Angle (I) – (assumed) 20° 30°

Active Pressure Coefficient 0.49 0.33

At-rest Pressure Coefficient 0.66 0.50

Passive Pressure Coefficient 2.04 3.00

Care should be taken to develop appropriate drainage systems behind below grade walls to eliminate potential for hydrostatic loads developing on the walls. Those systems would likely include perimeter drain systems extending to sump areas or free outfall where reverse flow cannot occur into the system. Where necessary, appropriate hydrostatic load values should be used for design.

Parking Garage Below Grade Design/Construction Based on the materials observed in the soil borings, it is our opinion the parking garage basement slab/pavement could be supported directly by the in-place stiff cohesive soils or underlying in-situ granular materials. A granular leveling course could be used, if needed. Under slab vapor barrier should be used at the architect’s discretion. The in-situ soils at basement level would likely show instability under construction traffic. Rutting, potentially significant rutting, may occur under heavier loads associated with drilling equipment for the caisson drilling or heavy vehicle traffic. Construction of a stabilized mat may be needed to accommodate the construction traffic. A crushed granular material may be considered for the stabilized mat zone. After completion of the caissons, a finer granular zone could be placed over the stabilized material to support the floor slab/pavements.

Underslab Drainage Systems We expect the below grade parking will extend to a depth of approximately 10 feet below present surface grades. The subsurface soils encountered in the test borings completed for this project included approximately 12 to 19 feet of sandy lean clay overlying sands and gravels which were underlain by weathered bedrock. The test borings encountered groundwater at depths on the order of 10 to 11 feet below present site grades in the area of the parking garage. However, some fluctuation can occur in groundwater depths depending on variations in hydrologic conditions and other conditions not apparent at the time of this report.

Earth Engineering Consultants, LLC EEC Project No. 1162092 November 1, 2016 Page 10 At a depth of approximately 10 feet below existing ground surface, the bottom of the basement walls for the structure are expected to terminate in sandy lean clay subgrade soils. We expect the structure will be supported on drilled pier foundations extending to the underlying bedrock. With potential infiltration of surface water adjacent to the building, we anticipate water could accumulate next to the below grade walls and result in hydrostatic loading on those walls and, potentially, infiltration of the surface water into the below grade areas. We suggest a perimeter drain system be installed to remove surface infiltration water from the area adjacent to the below grade walls and reduce the likelihood of development of hydrostatic loads on the walls and/or water infiltration into the below grade area. In general, a perimeter drain system would consist of perforated metal or plastic pipe placed at the approximate bottom of basement wall elevation and sloped to drain to a sump area where accumulated water can be removed without reverse flow into the system. The drain line should be surrounded by at least 6 inches of free draining granular fill with either the drain line or granular fill wrapped in an appropriate filter fabric to prevent the intrusions of fines in the system. Backfill above the drain line should consist of approved, low volume change material. The basement floor will be near the groundwater measurements recorded at the time of our exploration. Some fluctuations in groundwater levels can occur over time depending on variations in hydrologic conditions and other conditions not apparent at the time of this report. Consideration should be given to installation of an underslab drain system to reduce the potential for groundwater level rises to exert uplift pressures on the floor slabs and/or infiltrate into below grade areas. An underslab drain system would consist of an approximate 6-inch thick blanket of free draining granular fill immediately beneath the basement floor slab with perforated drain line installed in minimum 6-inch deep trenches at approximately 10-foot intervals across the width of the building. An interior perimeter drain should be installed extending around the interior perimeter of the building grade beam. Drain lines should allow for flow of water to a sump area without reverse of flow into the system. The subgrade between the drain lines should be sloped to drain towards each of the drain lines. The sandy lean clay subgrades should be separated from the overlying free draining granular fill with a filter fabric to prevent infiltration of fines into the system. Installation of the drain systems will reduce, not eliminate, the potential for infiltration of surface and/or groundwater into the below grade areas and development of hydrostatic loads on structure components. Pumps and other components require periodic inspections and maintenance to maintain the system in functioning condition.


Floor Slabs and Pavement Subgrade Floor slabs and pavement subgrades should be prepared as recommended in the section “Site Preparation.” In addition, proofrolling the subgrades is recommended immediately prior to placement of the floor slabs, pavements or flatwork. Soft or weak areas delineated by the proofrolling operations should be undercut or stabilized in-place to achieve the appropriate subgrade support. Pumping conditions could develop within soft or loose zones in the near surface cohesive soils. Subgrade stabilization may be needed to develop a stable subgrade for paving. If needed, stabilization could include incorporating at least 13% (by dry weight) Class C fly ash into the upper 12 inches of subgrade. Based on the subsurface conditions encountered at the site and the results of the laboratory testing, the on-site private drives and parking areas were designed using an R-value of 10. Eliminating the risk of movement within the proposed pavement section may not be feasible due to the characteristics of the subsurface materials; but it may be possible to further reduce the risk of movement if more extensive subgrade stabilization measures are used during construction. We would be pleased to discuss other construction alternatives with you upon request. Pavement design methods are intended to provide structural sections with adequate thickness over a particular subgrade such that wheel loads are reduced to a level the subgrade can support. The support characteristics of the subgrade for pavement design do not account for shrink/swell movements of an expansive clay subgrade or consolidation of a wetted subgrade. Thus, the pavement may be adequate from a structural standpoint, yet still experience cracking and deformation due to shrink/swell related movement of the subgrade. Therefore, it’s important to minimize moisture changes in the subgrade to reduce shrink/swell movements. Pavements We expect the site pavements will include areas designated for low volume automobile traffic/parking and areas of heavier/higher volume traffic. For heavier traffic areas, an assumed equivalent daily load axle (EDLA) of 15 was used and in automobile/parking areas an EDLA of 5 was used. Recommended pavement sections are provided below in Table 3. In areas subject to heavier truck loads or truck turning movements (including trash truck routes and load/unload areas) consideration should be given to use of Portland cement concrete for the pavements. The recommended pavement sections are minimums and periodic maintenance should be expected.


Table 3 - Recommended Minimum Pavement Sections

Automobile Parking Heavy Duty Areas 18-kip EDLA 18-kip ESAL’s Reliability Resilient Modulus PSI Loss

5 36,500 75%

3562 psi 2.5

15 109,500

85% 3562 psi

2.0 Design Structure Number 2.34 3.00 (A) Composite Hot Bituminous Pavement Aggregate Base (Design Structural Number)

4" 6"

(2.42)

5" 8"

(3.08) (B) Composite with Fly Ash Treated Subgrade Hot Bituminous Pavement Aggregate Base Fly Ash Treated Subgrade (Design Structure Number)

3" 6" 12"

(2.48)

4" 6" 12"

(2.92) (C) PCC (Non-reinforced) 5" 6"

If selected, Portland cement concrete should be an exterior pavement mix with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 4,500 psi and should be air entrained. Hot bituminous pavement should consist of S-75 or SX-75 with performance graded PG 58-28 binder, compacted to be within the range of 92 to 96% of maximum theoretical specific gravity (Rice). Longitudinal and transverse joints should be provided as needed in concrete pavements for expansion/contraction and isolation. The location and extent of joints should be based upon the final pavement geometry. Sawed joints should be cut in accordance with ACI recommendations. All joints should be sealed to prevent entry of foreign material and dowelled or tied where necessary and appropriate for load transfer. Since the cohesive soils on the site have some shrink/swell potential, pavements could crack in the future primarily because of the volume change of the soils when subjected to an increase in moisture content to the subgrade. The cracking, while not desirable, does not necessarily constitute structural failure of the pavement. The collection and diversion of surface drainage away from paved areas is critical to the satisfactory performance of the pavement. Drainage design should provide for the removal of water from paved areas in order to reduce the potential for wetting of the subgrade soils.

Earth Engineering Consultants, LLC EEC Project No. 1162092 November 1, 2016 Page 13 Water Soluble Sulfates (SO4) The results of water soluble sulfate (SO4) testing of the on-site overburden and bedrock materials taken during our subsurface exploration are provided in Table 4.

TABLE 4 - Water Soluble Sulfate Test Results

Sample Location Description Soluble Sulfate Content

(mg/kg) Soluble Sulfate Content

(%) B-1 @ 4ʹ Brown Silty Clayey Sand 180 0.02

B-3 @ 4ʹ Brown Sandy Lean Clay/Silty Clayey Sand 490 0.05

B-8 @ 34ʹ Siltstone/Sandstone/Claystone 10,080 1.01

B-13 @ 20ʹ Claystone/Siltstone/Sandstone 320 0.03

Based on the results as presented in the table above, ACI 318, Section 4.2 indicates the site overburden soils generally have a low risk of sulfate attack on Portland cement concrete with high risk in the site bedrock. Foundation concrete should be designed in accordance with the provisions of the ACI Design Manual, Section 318, Chapter 4 comparing those results to the following Table 5.

Table 5 - Requirements to Protect Against Damage to Concrete by Sulfate Attack from External Sources of Sulfate

Severity of Sulfate exposure

Water-soluble sulfate (SO4) in dry soil, percent

Water-cement ratio, maximum

Cementitious material Requirements

Class 0 0.00 to 0.10% 0.45 Class 0

Class 1 0.11 to 0.20% 0.45 Class 1

Class 2 0.21 to 2.00% 0.45 Class 2

Class 3 2.01 of greater 0.45 Class 3

Other Considerations

Positive drainage should be developed away from the structures and/or pavements with a minimum slope of 1 inch per foot for the first 10 feet away from the improvements in landscape areas. Flatter slopes could be used in hardscapes areas although positive drainage should be maintained. Care should be taken in planning of landscaping adjacent to the building and parking and drive areas to avoid features which would pond water adjacent to the pavement, foundations or stemwalls. Placement of plants which require irrigation systems or could result in fluctuations of the moisture content of the subgrade material should be avoided adjacent to site improvements.

Earth Engineering Consultants, LLC EEC Project No. 1162092 November 1, 2016 Page 14 Excavations into the on-site soils may encounter a variety of conditions. Excavations into the on-site soft to very soft clays can be expected to be unstable in the excavations. If excavations extend into the underlying granular strata, caving soils may be encountered. The individual contractor(s) should be made responsible for designing and constructing stable, temporary excavations as required to maintain stability of both the excavation sides and bottom. All excavations should be sloped or shored in the interest of safety following local and federal regulations, including current OSHA excavation and trench safety standards. Depending upon the depth of any lower level construction, a shoring plan will be necessary to protect the adjacent sidewall slopes. GENERAL COMMENTS The analysis and recommendations presented in this report are based upon the data obtained from the soil borings performed at the indicated locations and from any other information discussed in this report. This report does not reflect any variations, which may occur between borings or across the site. The nature and extent of such variations may not become evident until construction. If variations appear evident, it will be necessary to re-evaluate the recommendations of this report. It is recommended that the geotechnical engineer be retained to review the plans and specifications so comments can be made regarding the interpretation and implementation of our geotechnical recommendations in the design and specifications. It is further recommended that the geotechnical engineer be retained for testing and observations during earthwork phases to help determine that the design requirements are fulfilled. This report has been prepared for the exclusive use for Brinkman Partners for specific application to the project discussed and has been prepared in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering practices. No warranty, express or implied, is made. In the event that any changes in the nature, design, or location of the project as outlined in this report are planned, the conclusions and recommendations contained in this report shall not be considered valid unless the changes are reviewed and the conclusions of this report are modified or verified in writing by the geotechnical engineer.

Earth Engineering Consultants, LLC

DRILLING AND EXPLORATION DRILLING & SAMPLING SYMBOLS: SS: Split Spoon ‐ 13/8" I.D., 2" O.D., unless otherwise noted PS: Piston Sample ST: Thin‐Walled Tube ‐ 2" O.D., unless otherwise noted WS: Wash Sample R: Ring Barrel Sampler ‐ 2.42" I.D., 3" O.D. unless otherwise noted PA: Power Auger FT: Fish Tail Bit HA: Hand Auger RB: Rock Bit DB: Diamond Bit = 4", N, B BS: Bulk Sample AS: Auger Sample PM: Pressure Meter HS: Hollow Stem Auger WB: Wash Bore

Standard "N" Penetration: Blows per foot of a 140 pound hammer falling 30 inches on a 2‐inch O.D. split spoon, except where noted.

WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENT SYMBOLS: WL : Water Level WS : While Sampling WCI: Wet Cave in WD : While Drilling DCI: Dry Cave in BCR: Before Casing Removal AB : After Boring ACR: After Casting Removal Water levels indicated on the boring logs are the levels measured in the borings at the time indicated. In pervious soils, the indicated levels may reflect the location of ground water. In low permeability soils, the accurate determination of ground water levels is not possible with only short term observations.

DESCRIPTIVE SOIL CLASSIFICATION Soil Classification is based on the Unified Soil Classification system and the ASTM Designations D‐2488. Coarse Grained Soils have move than 50% of their dry weight retained on a #200 sieve; they are described as: boulders, cobbles, gravel or sand. Fine Grained Soils have less than 50% of their dry weight retained on a #200 sieve; they are described as : clays, if they are plastic, and silts if they are slightly plastic or non‐plastic. Major constituents may be added as modifiers and minor constituents may be added according to the relative proportions based on grain size. In addition to gradation, coarse grained soils are defined on the basis of their relative in‐place density and fine grained soils on the basis of their consistency. Example: Lean clay with sand, trace gravel, stiff (CL); silty sand, trace gravel, medium dense (SM).

CONSISTENCY OF FINE‐GRAINED SOILS Unconfined Compressive Strength, Qu, psf Consistency < 500 Very Soft 500 ‐ 1,000 Soft 1,001 ‐ 2,000 Medium 2,001 ‐ 4,000 Stiff 4,001 ‐ 8,000 Very Stiff 8,001 ‐ 16,000 Very Hard

RELATIVE DENSITY OF COARSE‐GRAINED SOILS: N‐Blows/ft Relative Density 0‐3 Very Loose 4‐9 Loose 10‐29 Medium Dense 30‐49 Dense 50‐80 Very Dense 80 + Extremely Dense

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF BEDROCK

DEGREE OF WEATHERING: Slight Slight decomposition of parent material on

joints. May be color change.

Moderate Some decomposition and color change throughout.

High Rock highly decomposed, may be extremely broken.

HARDNESS AND DEGREE OF CEMENTATION: Limestone and Dolomite: Hard Difficult to scratch with knife.

Moderately Can be scratched easily with knife.

Hard Cannot be scratched with fingernail.

Soft Can be scratched with fingernail.

Shale, Siltstone and Claystone: Hard Can be scratched easily with knife, cannot be

scratched with fingernail.

Moderately Can be scratched with fingernail. Hard

Soft Can be easily dented but not molded with fingers.

Sandstone and Conglomerate: Well Capable of scratching a knife blade. Cemented

Cemented Can be scratched with knife.

Poorly Can be broken apart easily with fingers. Cemented

Group Symbol

Group Name

Cu≥4 and 1<Cc≤3E GW Well-graded gravel F

Cu<4 and/or 1>Cc>3E GP Poorly-graded gravel F

Fines classify as ML or MH GM Silty gravel G,H

Fines Classify as CL or CH GC Clayey Gravel F,G,H

Cu≥6 and 1<Cc≤3E SW Well-graded sand I

Cu<6 and/or 1>Cc>3E SP Poorly-graded sand I

Fines classify as ML or MH SM Silty sand G,H,I

Fines classify as CL or CH SC Clayey sand G,H,I

inorganic PI>7 and plots on or above "A" Line CL Lean clay K,L,M

PI<4 or plots below "A" Line ML Silt K,L,M

organic Liquid Limit - oven dried Organic clay K,L,M,N

Liquid Limit - not dried Organic silt K,L,M,O

inorganic PI plots on or above "A" Line CH Fat clay K,L,M

PI plots below "A" Line MH Elastic Silt K,L,M

organic Liquid Limit - oven dried Organic clay K,L,M,P

Liquid Limit - not dried Organic silt K,L,M,O

Highly organic soils PT Peat

(D30)2

D10 x D60

GW-GM well graded gravel with silt NPI≥4 and plots on or above "A" line.

GW-GC well-graded gravel with clay OPI≤4 or plots below "A" line.

GP-GM poorly-graded gravel with silt PPI plots on or above "A" line.

GP-GC poorly-graded gravel with clay QPI plots below "A" line.

SW-SM well-graded sand with silt

SW-SC well-graded sand with clay

SP-SM poorly graded sand with silt

SP-SC poorly graded sand with clay


IIf soil contains >15% gravel, add "with gravel" to group nameJIf Atterberg limits plots shaded area, soil is a CL-ML, Silty clay

unified soil classification systemSoil Classification

Criteria for Assigning Group Symbols and Group Names Using Laboratory Tests

Sands 50% or more coarse fraction passes No. 4 sieve

Fine-Grained Soils 50% or more passes the No. 200 sieve

<0.75 OL

Gravels with Fines more than 12% finesClean Sands Less than 5% fines

Sands with Fines more than 12% fines

Clean Gravels Less than 5% fines

Gravels more than 50% of coarse fraction retained on No. 4 sieve

Coarse - Grained Soils more than 50% retained on No. 200 sieve

CGravels with 5 to 12% fines required dual symbols:

Kif soil contains 15 to 29% plus No. 200, add "with sand" or "with gravel", whichever is predominant.

<0.75 OH

Primarily organic matter, dark in color, and organic odorABased on the material passing the 3-in. (75-mm) sieve

ECu=D60/D10 Cc=

HIf fines are organic, add "with organic fines" to group name

LIf soil contains ≥ 30% plus No. 200 predominantly sand, add "sandy" to group name.MIf soil contains ≥30% plus No. 200 predominantly gravel, add "gravelly" to group name.

DSands with 5 to 12% fines require dual symbols:

BIf field sample contained cobbles or boulders, or both, add "with cobbles or boulders, or both" to group name. FIf soil contains ≥15% sand, add "with sand" to

GIf fines classify as CL-ML, use dual symbol GC-CM, or SC-SM.

Silts and Clays Liquid Limit less than 50

Silts and Clays Liquid Limit 50 or more

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110

PLAS

TICI

TY IN

DEX

(PI)

LIQUID LIMIT (LL)

ML OR OL

MH OR OH

For Classification of fine-grained soils and fine-grained fraction of coarse-grained soils. Equation of "A"-line Horizontal at PI=4 to LL=25.5 then PI-0.73 (LL-20) Equation of "U"-line Vertical at LL=16 to PI-7, then PI=0.9 (LL-8)

CL-ML

Figure 1: Overall Development DiagramThe Foundry - Loveland, Colorado

EEC Project Number 1162092October 2016

EARTH ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, LLC

12

B-1

B-8

B-6 B-7

B-9

B-2 B-10

B-11

B-5

B-12

B-13

B-14

B-4

B-3

43

Fig

ure

2: B

ori

ng

Lo

catio

n D

iag

ram

The

Fou

nd

ry -

Love

lan

d, C

olo

rad

oEE

C P

roje

ct N

um

ber

: 11

62

09

2O

cto

ber

20

16

EART

H E

NG

INEE

RIN

G C

ON

SULT

AN

TS, L

LC

Ap

pro

xim

ate

Bo

rin

gLo

catio

ns

1

Leg

end

Site

Ph

oto

s(P

ho

tos

take

n in

ap

pro

xim

ate

loca

tion

, in

dir

ectio

n o

f arr

ow

)

THE FOUNDRY LOVELAND, COLORADO

EEC PROJECT NO. 1162092 OCTOBER 2016

DATE:

RIG TYPE: CME55

FOREMAN: DG

AUGER TYPE: 4" CFA

SPT HAMMER: AUTOMATIC SOIL DESCRIPTION D N QU MC DD -200

TYPE (FEET) (BLOWS/FT) (PSF) (%) (PCF) LL PI (%) PRESSURE % @ 500 PSF

_ _

SILTY CLAYEY SAND (SM/SC) 1

brown _ _

loose 2

_ _

3

_ _

4

_ _

CS 5 4 3500 10.8 101.6

_ _

6

_ _

7

_ _

8

_ _

9

_ _

SILTY SANDY LEAN CLAY (CL) SS 10 4 3000 9.7

brown _ _

stiff 11

_ _

12

_ _

13

_ _

14

_ _

SILTY CLAYEY SAND (SM/SC) CS 15 3 -- 15.6 116.6

brown _ _

loose to very loose 16

_ _

17

_ _

18

_ _

19

_ _

SAND & GRAVEL (SP/GP) SS 20 16 -- 11.8

medium dense to very dense _ _

21

_ _

22

_ _

23

_ _

24

_ _

SS 25 50/11" -- 10.1

Continued on Sheet 2 of 2 _ _


A-LIMITS SWELL

SURFACE ELEV N/A 24 HOUR N/A

FINISH DATE 9/30/2016 AFTER DRILLING N/A

SHEET 1 OF 2 WATER DEPTH

START DATE 9/30/2016 WHILE DRILLING 14.5'

THE FOUNDRY

LOVELAND, COLORADO

LOG OF BORING B-1PROJECT NO: 1162092 OCTOBER 2016

DATE:

RIG TYPE: CME55

FOREMAN: DG

AUGER TYPE: 4" CFA



Continued from Sheet 1 of 2 26

SAND & GRAVEL (SP/GP) _ _

medium dense to very dense 27

apparent cobbles above bedrock _ _

28

_ _

CLAYSTONE / SILTSTONE 29

grey / rust _ _

moderately hard CS 30 50/6" 9000+ 15.1 114.6 ≈4,400 psf 2.7%

_ _

31

_ _

32

_ _

33

_ _

34

_ _

SS 35 50 9000+ 21.2

_ _

36

_ _

37

_ _

38

_ _

39

_ _

CS 40 50/6" 9000+ 17.8 118.0 4500 psf 4.5%

_ _

41

_ _

42

_ _

43

_ _

44

_ _

CLAYSTONE / SILTSTONE / SANDSTONE SS 45 50/9.5" 9000+ 13.2

grey / rust _ _

moderately hard to hard 46

_ _

47

_ _

48

_ _

49

_ _

BOTTOM OF BORING DEPTH 49.2' CS 50 50/3" 9000+ 11.7 89.8

_ _


A-LIMITS SWELL

N/A

9/30/2016 AFTER DRILLING N/A

SURFACE ELEV 24 HOUR N/A

FINISH DATE



THE FOUNDRY

LOVELAND, COLORADO

LOG OF BORING B-1 OCTOBER 2016PROJECT NO: 1162092

DATE:

RIG TYPE: CME55

FOREMAN: DG

AUGER TYPE: 4" CFA



_ _

SILTY SANDY LEAN CLAY (CL) 1

brown _ _

stiff 2

mottled _ _

3

_ _

4

_ _

CS 5 4 4000 13.9 113.1

_ _

6

_ _

7

_ _

8

_ _

9

_ _

red / brown / tan SS 10 2 1000 32.4

_ _

11

_ _

12

_ _

SAND & GRAVEL (SP/GP) 13

medium dense _ _

14

_ _

CS 15 19 -- 12.8 118.2

_ _

16

_ _

17

_ _

18

_ _

19

_ _

SS 20 27 1000 16.0

_ _

21

_ _

22

_ _

23

_ _

CLAYSTONE / SILTSTONE / SANDSTONE 24

grey / rust _ _

moderately hard CS 25 50/7" 9000+ 15.9 118.9



A-LIMITS SWELL




START DATE 9/30/2016 WHILE DRILLING 14'

THE FOUNDRY

LOVELAND, COLORADO

PROJECT NO: 1162092 LOG OF BORING B-2 OCTOBER 2016

DATE:

RIG TYPE: CME55

FOREMAN: DG

AUGER TYPE: 4" CFA




_ _


grey / rust _ _

moderately hard 28

_ _

29

_ _

SS 30 50/10" 7500 18.5

_ _

31

_ _

hard with depth 32

_ _

33

_ _

34

_ _

CS 35 50/6" 9000+ 15.6 118.5 4.0%

_ _

36

_ _

37

_ _

38

_ _

39

_ _

SS 40 50/7" 9000+ 17.1

_ _

41

_ _

42

_ _

43

_ _

44

_ _

CS 45 50/4" 9000+ 12.3 120.7

_ _

46

_ _

47

_ _

48

_ _

49

_ _

BOTTOM OF BORING DEPTH 49.3' SS 50 50/4" 9000+ 16.0

_ _


A-LIMITS SWELL

N/A



FINISH DATE



THE FOUNDRY

LOVELAND, COLORADO


DATE:

RIG TYPE: CME55

FOREMAN: DG

AUGER TYPE: 4" CFA



_ _

SILTY SANDY LEAN CLAY / CLAYEY SAND (CL/SC) 1

brown _ _

soft / very loose 2

_ _

3

_ _

4

_ _

SS 5 4 1000 9.9

_ _

6

_ _

7

_ _

8

_ _

9

_ _

CS 10 2 -- 14.1 107.4

_ _

11

_ _

12

_ _

13

_ _

14

_ _

SS 15 0 -- 29.3

_ _

16

_ _

17

_ _

18

_ _


dense to very dense _ _

with apparent cobbles SS 20 50 -- 11.9

_ _

21

_ _

22

_ _


grey / rust _ _

moderately hard 24

_ _

SS 25 50/11" 9000+ 17.5



A-LIMITS SWELL





THE FOUNDRY

LOVELAND, COLORADO


DATE:

RIG TYPE: CME55

FOREMAN: DG

AUGER TYPE: 4" CFA




_ _


grey / rust _ _

28

_ _

29

moderately hard to hard with depth _ _

CS 30 50/8" 9000+ 15.6 118.7 3000 psf 2.7%

_ _

31

_ _

32

_ _

33

_ _

34

_ _

SS 35 50/10" 9000+ 20.6

_ _

36

_ _

37

_ _

38

_ _

39

_ _

CS 40 50/6" 9000+ 21.8 106.5 5.9%

_ _

41

_ _

42

_ _

43

_ _

44

_ _

SS 45 50/9" 5500 21.7

_ _

46

_ _

47

_ _

48

_ _

49

_ _

BOTTOM OF BORING DEPTH 49.3' CS 50 50/4" 9000+ 14.4 113.1

_ _


A-LIMITS SWELL

N/A



FINISH DATE



THE FOUNDRY

LOVELAND, COLORADO


DATE:

RIG TYPE: CME55

FOREMAN: DG

AUGER TYPE: 4" CFA



_ _

GRAVELLY CLAYEY SAND (SC) - FILL 1

brown _ _

2

_ _

3

_ _

CLAYEY SAND / SANDY LEAN CLAY (SC/CL) 4

brown _ _

loose / stiff CS 5 4 5000 12.7 111.2

_ _

6

_ _

7

_ _

8

_ _

9

_ _

SILTY SANDY LEAN CLAY (CL) SS 10 2 -- 29.3

light brown _ _

soft / very loose 11

_ _

12

_ _

13

_ _

14

_ _

CS 15 4 -- 20.9 102.6

_ _


dense _ _

with apparent cobbles 17

_ _

18

_ _

19

_ _

SS 20 50/6"

_ _

21

_ _


rust / grey _ _

moderately hard 23

_ _

24

_ _

CS 25 50/6" 9000+ 14.9 116.6



A-LIMITS SWELL





THE FOUNDRY

LOVELAND, COLORADO


DATE:

RIG TYPE: CME55

FOREMAN: DG

AUGER TYPE: 4" CFA




_ _


rust / grey _ _

moderately hard to hard with depth 28

_ _

29

_ _

SS 30 50/10" 9000+ 18.1

_ _

31

_ _

32

_ _

33

_ _

34

_ _

CS 35 50/8" 9000+ 19.1 111.4 5800 psf 3.7%

_ _

36

_ _

37

_ _

38

_ _

39

_ _

SS 40 50/4" 6000 18.7

_ _

41

_ _

42

_ _

43

_ _

44

_ _

CS 45 50/4" 9000+ 14.1 116.1

_ _

46

_ _

47

_ _

48

_ _

49

_ _

BOTTOM OF BORING DEPTH 49.2' SS 50 50/3" 8500 18.5

_ _


A-LIMITS SWELL

N/A



FINISH DATE



THE FOUNDRY

LOVELAND, COLORADO


DATE:

RIG TYPE: CME55

FOREMAN: DG

AUGER TYPE: 4" CFA



ASPHALT - 4" _ _

ABC - 6" 1

_ _


brown _ _

loose 3

_ _

4

_ _

CS 5 5 3500 9.8 105.6

_ _

6

_ _

7

_ _

8

_ _

9

_ _

SANDY LEAN CLAY / CLAYEY SAND (CL/SC) SS 10 4 2000 21.7

brown _ _

medium stiff / loose 11

_ _

12

_ _

13

_ _

14

_ _

CS 15 20 -- 12.6 111.3


brown 16

medium dense to dense _ _

17

_ _

18

_ _

19

_ _

SS 20 50/10" -- 9.6

_ _

21

apparent cobbles _ _

22

_ _

23

_ _

24

_ _

CS 25 50/10" -- 8.3 131.8



A-LIMITS SWELL





THE FOUNDRY

LOVELAND, COLORADO


DATE:

RIG TYPE: CME55

FOREMAN: DG

AUGER TYPE: 4" CFA





medium dense to dense 27


28

_ _


grey / rust _ _

moderately hard to hard with depth SS 30 50/11" 9000+ 18.7

_ _

31

_ _

32

_ _

33

_ _

34

_ _

CS 35 50/5" 9000+ 13.1 119.8 5.6%

_ _

36

_ _

37

_ _

38

_ _

39

_ _

SS 40 50/4" 9000+ 15.4

_ _

41

_ _

42

_ _

43

_ _

44

_ _

CS 45 50/3" 9000+ 12.0 123.4

_ _

46

_ _

47

_ _

48

_ _

49

_ _


_ _


A-LIMITS SWELL

N/A



FINISH DATE



THE FOUNDRY

LOVELAND, COLORADO


DATE:

RIG TYPE: CME55

FOREMAN: DG

AUGER TYPE: 4" CFA



ASPHALT - 4" _ _

ABC - 9.5" 1

_ _


brown _ _

loose 3

_ _

4

_ _

CS 5 4 3000 15.8 108.1

_ _

6

_ _

7

_ _

8

_ _

9

_ _

CLAYEY SAND/SANDY LEAN CLAY (SC/CL) SS 10 2 -- 20.0

brown to tan _ _

soft / very loose 11

_ _

12

_ _

13

_ _


brown _ _

medium dense to dense CS 15 9 -- 5.0 103.8

_ _

16

_ _

17

_ _

18

_ _

19

_ _

SS 20 23 -- 9.8

_ _

21

_ _

22

_ _

23

_ _

24

apparent cobbles with depth _ _

SS 25 50/3" -- 6.7



A-LIMITS SWELL





THE FOUNDRY

LOVELAND, COLORADO


DATE:

RIG TYPE: CME55

FOREMAN: DG

AUGER TYPE: 4" CFA




_ _


grey / rust _ _

moderately hard 28

_ _

29

_ _

CS 30 50/9" 9000+ 21.3 110.4 50 27 69.5 3600 psf 3.3%

intermittent cemented sandstone zones _ _

31

_ _

32

_ _

33

_ _

34

_ _


_ _

36

_ _

37

_ _

38

_ _

39

_ _

40

_ _

41

_ _

42

_ _

43

_ _

44

_ _

45

_ _

46

_ _

47

_ _

48

_ _

49

_ _

50

_ _


A-LIMITS SWELL

N/A



FINISH DATE



THE FOUNDRY

LOVELAND, COLORADO


DATE:

RIG TYPE: CME55

FOREMAN: DG

AUGER TYPE: 4" CFA



ASPHALT - 4" _ _

1

SANDY LEAN CLAY (CL) _ _

brown 2

very stiff to stiff _ _ % @ 150 psf

CS 3 9 7000 18.4 107.7 31 16 70.9 360 psf 0.4%

_ _

4

_ _

SANDY LEAN CLAY/CLAYEY SAND (CL/SC) SS 5 2 3000 13.4

brown _ _

soft / very loose 6

_ _

7

_ _

8

_ _

9

_ _

CS 10 6 4000 19.1 100.7

_ _

11

_ _

12

_ _

13

_ _


brown _ _

medium dense to dense SS 15 37/8" -- 3.7

_ _

16

_ _

17

_ _

18

_ _

19

_ _

CS 20 8 -- 17.6 111.8

_ _

21

_ _

22


23

_ _

24

_ _

SS 25 50 -- 15.0



A-LIMITS SWELL





THE FOUNDRY

LOVELAND, COLORADO


DATE:

RIG TYPE: CME55

FOREMAN: DG

AUGER TYPE: 4" CFA




_ _


grey / rust _ _


_ _

29

_ _

CS 30 50/7" 9000+ 14.2 121.7

_ _

31

_ _

32

_ _

33

_ _

with intermittent sandstone lenses 34

_ _

BOTTOM OF BORING DEPTH 34.5' SS 35 50/6.5" 9000+ 18.3

_ _

36

_ _

37

_ _

38

_ _

39

_ _

40

_ _

41

_ _

42

_ _

43

_ _

44

_ _

45

_ _

46

_ _

47

_ _

48

_ _

49

_ _

50

_ _


A-LIMITS SWELL

N/A



FINISH DATE



THE FOUNDRY

LOVELAND, COLORADO


DATE:

RIG TYPE: CME55

FOREMAN: DG

AUGER TYPE: 4" CFA



DECORATIVE GRAVEL LANDSCAPING _ _

1

SILTY CLAYEY SAND (SM/SC) _ _

brown 2

loose _ _

3

_ _

4

_ _

CS 5 7 3000 13.2 102.5

_ _

6

_ _

7

_ _

8

_ _

9

_ _

SANDY LEAN CLAY (CL) SS 10 5 2000 19.9

brown _ _

medium stiff 11

_ _

12

_ _

13

_ _


brown _ _

medium dense to dense CS 15 42 -- 2.7 128.9

_ _

16

_ _

17

_ _

18

_ _

19

_ _

SS 20 19 -- 10.0

_ _

21

_ _

22

_ _

23

_ _

24


CS 25 50/6" -- 12.8 122.0



A-LIMITS SWELL





THE FOUNDRY

LOVELAND, COLORADO


DATE:

RIG TYPE: CME55

FOREMAN: DG

AUGER TYPE: 4" CFA




_ _


grey / rust _ _

moderately hard 28

with calcareous deposits _ _

29

_ _

SS 30 50/11" 9000+ 18.0

_ _

31

_ _

32

_ _

33

_ _

34

_ _

CS 35 50/10" 9000+ 16.9 115.4

BOTTOM OF BORING DEPTH 34.8' _ _

36

_ _

37

_ _

38

_ _

39

_ _

40

_ _

41

_ _

42

_ _

43

_ _

44

_ _

45

_ _

46

_ _

47

_ _

48

_ _

49

_ _

50

_ _


A-LIMITS SWELL

N/A



FINISH DATE



THE FOUNDRY

LOVELAND, COLORADO


DATE:

RIG TYPE: CME55

FOREMAN: DG

AUGER TYPE: 4" CFA



ASPHALT - 4.5" _ _

ABC - 6" 1

_ _

SILTY SANDY LEAN CLAY (CL) 2

brown _ _ % @ 150 psf

stiff CS 3 7 7500 17.7 109.2 32 11 70.6 350 psf 0.7%

_ _

4

_ _

SILTY CLAYEY SAND (SM/SC) SS 5 5 4500 13.8

brown _ _

loose 6

_ _

7

_ _

8

_ _

9

_ _

SANDY LEAN CLAY (CL) CS 10 4 4500 13.5 102.4

brown / tan _ _

soft 11

_ _

12

_ _

13

_ _

14

_ _

SS 15 32/8" -- 3.3


brown 16

medium dense to dense _ _

17

_ _

18

_ _

19

_ _

CS 20 50 -- 8.7 132.0


21

_ _

22

_ _

23

_ _

24

with red clay seams _ _

SS 25 50/9" -- 14.1



A-LIMITS SWELL





THE FOUNDRY

LOVELAND, COLORADO


DATE:

RIG TYPE: CME55

FOREMAN: DG

AUGER TYPE: 4" CFA




_ _


grey / rust _ _

28

_ _

29

moderately hard to hard _ _

CS 30 50/4.5" 9000+ 14.3 115.1

_ _

31

_ _

32

_ _

33

_ _

34

_ _


_ _

36

_ _

37

_ _

38

_ _

39

_ _

40

_ _

41

_ _

42

_ _

43

_ _

44

_ _

45

_ _

46

_ _

47

_ _

48

_ _

49

_ _

50

_ _


A-LIMITS SWELL

N/A



FINISH DATE



THE FOUNDRY

LOVELAND, COLORADO


DATE:

RIG TYPE: CME55

FOREMAN: DG

AUGER TYPE: 4" CFA



_ _

SILTY CLAYEY SAND / SANDY LEAN CLAY (SM/SC/CL) 1

brown _ _

medium dense / stiff 2

_ _

3

_ _

4

_ _

CS 5 7 4000 10.4 108.5

_ _

6

_ _

7

_ _

8

_ _

9

_ _

SILTY CLAYEY SAND (SM/SC) SS 10 2.5 -- 24.1

brown / rust _ _

loose to very loose 11

_ _

12

_ _

13

_ _


brown _ _

dense CS 15 50/10" -- 7.8 116.2

_ _

16

_ _

17

_ _

18

_ _

19

_ _

SS 20 50/6" -- 9.8

_ _


grey / rust _ _

with calcareous deposits 22

moderately hard _ _

23

_ _

24

_ _

CS 25 50/7" 9000+ 17.7 112.3 ≈4,400 psf 3.3%



A-LIMITS SWELL





THE FOUNDRY

LOVELAND, COLORADO


DATE:

RIG TYPE: CME55

FOREMAN: DG

AUGER TYPE: 4" CFA




_ _


grey / rust _ _

moderately hard 28


29

_ _

SS 30 50/7" 2500 23.2

_ _

31

_ _

32

_ _

33

_ _

34

_ _

CS 35 50/8" 9000+ 21.6 107.3


36

_ _

37

_ _

38

_ _

39

_ _

40

_ _

41

_ _

42

_ _

43

_ _

44

_ _

45

_ _

46

_ _

47

_ _

48

_ _

49

_ _

50

_ _


A-LIMITS SWELL

N/A



FINISH DATE



THE FOUNDRY

LOVELAND, COLORADO


DATE:

RIG TYPE: CME55

FOREMAN: DG

AUGER TYPE: 4" CFA



_ _

SANDY LEAN CLAY / CLAYEY SAND (CL/SC) 1

brown _ _

loose / soft 2

_ _

3

_ _

4

_ _

SS 5 4 2500 9.3

_ _

6

_ _

7

_ _

8

_ _

9

_ _

CS 10 6 1000 16.3 111.7

_ _

11

_ _

12

_ _

13

_ _


brown _ _

dense SS 15 50 -- 11.2

_ _

16

_ _

17

_ _

18

_ _

19

_ _

CS 20 50/8" 5000 7.6 132.7

_ _

21

_ _

22

CLAYSTONE / SILTSTONE / SANDSTONE _ _

grey / rust 23

moderately hard _ _

with calcareous deposits 24

_ _

SS 25 50/10" 7500 27.4



A-LIMITS SWELL





THE FOUNDRY

LOVELAND, COLORADO


DATE:

RIG TYPE: CME55

FOREMAN: DG

AUGER TYPE: 4" CFA




_ _


grey / rust _ _


with intermittent cemented lenses _ _

29

_ _

CS 30 50/6.5" 9000+ 22.8 108.5

_ _

31

_ _

32

_ _

33

_ _

34

_ _


_ _

36

_ _

37

_ _

38

_ _

39

_ _

40

_ _

41

_ _

42

_ _

43

_ _

44

_ _

45

_ _

46

_ _

47

_ _

48

_ _

49

_ _

50

_ _


A-LIMITS SWELL

N/A



FINISH DATE



THE FOUNDRY

LOVELAND, COLORADO


DATE:

RIG TYPE: CME55

FOREMAN: DG

AUGER TYPE: 4" CFA



_ _

SANDY CLAY / GRAVEL FILL 1

brown _ _

2

_ _


brown _ _

loose to medium dense 4

_ _ % @ 150 psf

CS 5 7 3000 8.5 95.9 21 NP 34.2 2800 psf 0.3%

_ _

6

_ _

7

_ _

8

_ _

9

_ _

SS 10 5 1000 20.0

_ _

11

_ _

12

_ _


brown _ _


_ _

CS 15 44 -- 6.3 142.8

_ _

16

_ _

17

_ _

18

_ _

19


SS 20 50/9" -- 9.7

_ _

21

_ _

22

_ _

23

_ _


grey / rust _ _

moderately hard, with calcareous deposits CS 25 50/8" 9000+ 16.1 117.4



A-LIMITS SWELL





THE FOUNDRY

LOVELAND, COLORADO


DATE:

RIG TYPE: CME55

FOREMAN: DG

AUGER TYPE: 4" CFA




_ _


grey / rust _ _



29

_ _

SS 30 50/6" 9000+ 16.1

_ _

31

_ _

32

_ _

33

_ _

34

_ _

BOTTOM OF BORING DEPTH 34.4' CS 35 50/5" 9000+ 20.6

_ _

36

_ _

37

_ _

38

_ _

39

_ _

40

_ _

41

_ _

42

_ _

43

_ _

44

_ _

45

_ _

46

_ _

47

_ _

48

_ _

49

_ _

50

_ _


A-LIMITS SWELL

N/A



FINISH DATE



THE FOUNDRY

LOVELAND, COLORADO


DATE:

RIG TYPE: CME55

FOREMAN: DG

AUGER TYPE: 4" CFA



_ _

CLAYEY SAND with GRAVEL FILL 1

brown _ _

2

_ _


brown _ _

loose to medium dense 4

_ _

CS 5 5 1000 15.2 96.9

_ _

6

_ _

7

_ _

8

_ _

9

_ _

SANDY LEAN CLAY (CL) SS 10 1 -- 26.6

tan _ _

soft to very soft 11

_ _

12

_ _


brown _ _


_ _

CS 15 39/9" -- 11.1

with apparent cobbles _ _

16

_ _

17

_ _

18

_ _

19

_ _

CLAYSTONE / SILTSTONE / SANDSTONE SS 20 38/8" 9000+ 21.5

brown / grey / rust _ _

moderately hard 21

_ _

22

_ _

23

_ _

24

_ _

CS 25 50/9" 9000+ 16.8 116.6



A-LIMITS SWELL





THE FOUNDRY

LOVELAND, COLORADO


DATE:

RIG TYPE: CME55

FOREMAN: DG

AUGER TYPE: 4" CFA




_ _


brown / grey / rust _ _

moderately hard to hard with depth 28

_ _

29

_ _

SS 30 50/9" 9000+ 21.6

_ _

31

_ _

32

_ _

33

_ _

34


CS 35 50/3" 9000+ 10.9 126.6

_ _

36

_ _

37

_ _

38

_ _

39

_ _

40

_ _

41

_ _

42

_ _

43

_ _

44

_ _

45

_ _

46

_ _

47

_ _

48

_ _

49

_ _

50

_ _


A-LIMITS SWELL

N/A



FINISH DATE



THE FOUNDRY

LOVELAND, COLORADO


DATE:

RIG TYPE: CME55

FOREMAN: DG

AUGER TYPE: 4" CFA



_ _

SANDY LEAN CLAY / CLAYEY SAND (CL/SC) 1

brown _ _

soft / loose 2

_ _

3

_ _

4

_ _

CS 5 6 5000 15.5 111.3

_ _

6

_ _

7

_ _

8

_ _

9

_ _

SS 10 5 -- 23.4

_ _

11

_ _

12

_ _

13

_ _


brown _ _

loose to medium dense CS 15 6

_ _

16

_ _

17

_ _

18

_ _

19

_ _

SS 20 50 4000 22.3

CLAYSTONE / SILTSTONE / SANDSTONE _ _

grey / rust 21

moderately hard _ _

22

_ _

23

_ _

24

_ _

CS 25 50/8" 9000+ 15.4 120.5 47 27 58.8 5000 psf 3.1%



A-LIMITS SWELL





THE FOUNDRY

LOVELAND, COLORADO


DATE:

RIG TYPE: CME55

FOREMAN: DG

AUGER TYPE: 4" CFA




_ _


grey / rust _ _

moderately hard 28

_ _

29

_ _

SS 30 50/9" 9000+ 18.9

_ _

31

_ _

32

_ _

33

_ _

34

_ _

CS 35 50/8.5" 9000+ 18.7 113.4


36

_ _

37

_ _

38

_ _

39

_ _

40

_ _

41

_ _

42

_ _

43

_ _

44

_ _

45

_ _

46

_ _

47

_ _

48

_ _

49

_ _

50

_ _


A-LIMITS SWELL

N/A



FINISH DATE



THE FOUNDRY

LOVELAND, COLORADO


Project:Location:Project #:Date:

The FoundryLoveland, Colorado1162092October 2016

Beginning Moisture: 15.1% Dry Density: 122.7 pcf Ending Moisture: 17.1%Swell Pressure: ≈4,400 psf % Swell @ 500: 2.7%

Sample Location: Boring 1, Sample 6, Depth 29'Liquid Limit: Plasticity Index: % Passing #200:

SWELL / CONSOLIDATION TEST RESULTS

Material Description: Grey / Rust Claystone / Siltstone

-10.0

-8.0

-6.0

-4.0

-2.0

0.0

2.0

4.0

6.0

8.0

10.0

0.01 0.1 1 10

Per

cent

Mov

emen

t

Load (TSF)

Sw

ell

Con

solid

atio

Water Added



Beginning Moisture: 17.8% Dry Density: 112.5 pcf Ending Moisture: 19.0%Swell Pressure: 4500 psf % Swell @ 500: 4.5%



Material Description: Grey / Rust Claystone / Siltstone

-10.0

-8.0

-6.0

-4.0

-2.0

0.0

2.0

4.0

6.0

8.0

10.0

0.01 0.1 1 10

Per

cent

Mov

emen

t

Load (TSF)

Sw

ell

Con

solid

atio

Water Added



Beginning Moisture: 15.6% Dry Density: 113.1 pcf Ending Moisture: 19.1%Swell Pressure: % Swell @ 500: 4.0%



Material Description: Grey / Rust Claystone / Siltstone / Sandstone

-10.0

-8.0

-6.0

-4.0

-2.0

0.0

2.0

4.0

6.0

8.0

10.0

0.01 0.1 1 10

Per

cent

Mov

emen

t

Load (TSF)

Sw

ell

Con

solid

atio

Water Added







-10.0

-8.0

-6.0

-4.0

-2.0

0.0

2.0

4.0

6.0

8.0

10.0

0.01 0.1 1 10

Per

cent

Mov

emen

t

Load (TSF)

Sw

ell

Con

solid

atio

Water Added






Material Description: Rust / Grey Claystone / Siltstone / Sandstone

-10.0

-8.0

-6.0

-4.0

-2.0

0.0

2.0

4.0

6.0

8.0

10.0

0.01 0.1 1 10

Per

cent

Mov

emen

t

Load (TSF)

Sw

ell

Con

solid

atio

Water Added




Sample Location: Boring 6, Sample 6, Depth 29'Liquid Limit: 50 Plasticity Index: 27 % Passing #200: 69.5%



-10.0

-8.0

-6.0

-4.0

-2.0

0.0

2.0

4.0

6.0

8.0

10.0

0.01 0.1 1 10

Per

cent

Mov

emen

t

Load (TSF)

Sw

ell

Con

solid

atio

Water Added






Material Description: Brown Sandy Lean Clay (CL)

-10.0

-8.0

-6.0

-4.0

-2.0

0.0

2.0

4.0

6.0

8.0

10.0

0.01 0.1 1 10

Per

cent

Mov

emen

t

Load (TSF)

Sw

ell

Con

solid

atio

Water Added






Material Description: Brown Silty Sandy Lean Clay (CL)

-10.0

-8.0

-6.0

-4.0

-2.0

0.0

2.0

4.0

6.0

8.0

10.0

0.01 0.1 1 10

Per

cent

Mov

emen

t

Load (TSF)

Sw

ell

Con

solid

atio

Water Added



Beginning Moisture: 17.7% Dry Density: 113.9 pcf Ending Moisture: 19.9%Swell Pressure: ≈4,400 psf % Swell @ 500: 3.3%




-10.0

-8.0

-6.0

-4.0

-2.0

0.0

2.0

4.0

6.0

8.0

10.0

0.01 0.1 1 10

Per

cent

Mov

emen

t

Load (TSF)

Sw

ell

Con

solid

atio

Water Added




Sample Location: Boring 12, Sample 1, Depth 4'Liquid Limit: 21 Plasticity Index: NP % Passing #200: 34.2%


Material Description: Brown Silty Clayey Sand (SM/SC)

-10.0

-8.0

-6.0

-4.0

-2.0

0.0

2.0

4.0

6.0

8.0

10.0

0.01 0.1 1 10

Per

cent

Mov

emen

t

Load (TSF)

Sw

ell

Con

solid

atio

Water Added



Beginning Moisture: 15.4% Dry Density: 113 pcf Ending Moisture: 16.4%Swell Pressure: 5000 psf % Swell @ 500: 3.1%




-10.0

-8.0

-6.0

-4.0

-2.0

0.0

2.0

4.0

6.0

8.0

10.0

0.01 0.1 1 10

Per

cent

Mov

emen

t

Load (TSF)

Sw

ell

Con

solid

atio

Water Added

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE Metropolitan Foundry Theater P# 1709 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 1

SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01

specification Sections apply to the work of this Section.

1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete forming and accessories.

1. Design engineering for formwork system. B. Concrete for composite floor construction. C. Floors and slabs on grade. D. Concrete reinforcing. E. Joint devices associated with concrete work. F. Miscellaneous concrete elements, including equipment pads, light pole bases, and similar items. G. Post-installed anchoring. H. Concrete curing.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010. B. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; 1991

(Reapproved 2009). C. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2010 (Errata 2012). D. ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; 2004 (Errata 2007). E. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; 2000. F. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; 2010. G. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; 2010. H. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; 2001 (Reapproved 2008). I. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2011. J. ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; 2014. K. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. L. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile

Strength; 2012. M. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement; 2015. N. ASTM A706/A706M - Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement; 2013. O. ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain

and Deformed, for Concrete; 2015. P. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2013. Q. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 2015a. R. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2015. S. ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2012. T. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2015. U. ASTM C157/C157M - Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic-Cement Mortar and

Concrete; 2008. V. ASTM C173/C173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric

Method; 2014. W. ASTM C231/C231M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method;

2010. X. ASTM C260/C260M - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a. Y. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2013.



Z. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete; 2015.

AA. ASTM C642 - Standard Test Method for Density, Absorption, and Voids in Hardened Concrete; 2013. AB. ASTM C672/C672M - Standard Test Method for Scaling Resistance of Concrete Surfaces Exposed to Deicing

Chemicals; 2012. AC. ASTM C979/C979M - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete; 2010. AD. ASTM C1064/C1064M - Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic Cement Concrete;

2012. AE. ASTM C1240 - Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures; 2014. AF. ASTM C1602/C1602M - Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of Hydraulic Cement

Concrete; 2012. AG. ASTM E1155 - Standard Test Method for Determining F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness Numbers;

1996 (Reapproved 2008). AH. ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders

Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 2011. AI. ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular

Fill under Concrete Slabs; 2011.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate the installation of foundations with size, location and installation of underground service utilities. 2. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form

accessories. 3. Coordinate with work of other Sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, sleeves,

bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work. 4. Coordinate the use and application of specified curing methods for slabs and floor surfaces with accepted

flooring system manufacturers. B. Contractor's Option - Slab Moisture Control: The following requirements for controlling moisture in concrete

slabs are Contractor's option. Requirements are listed in the order of Architect/Engineer's preference from first preference to last preference. Submit Contractor's elected option prior to making specified submittals which include information on associated products. 1. Option 1: Moisture vapor reducing admixture (MVRA). 2. Option 2: Moisture emission reducing curing and sealing compound. 3. Option 3: Moisture curing as specified; no curing compounds permitted on slabs to receive adhesively

applied flooring. C. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting prior to the start of the work of this Section.

1. Attendance: Contractor's quality control supervisor or superintendent, Architect, structural engineer, Owner's independent testing agency, all affected trades including reinforcing subcontractor and concrete supplier, and mechanical, electrical, and similar subcontractors when embedded items of these trades are required.

2. Discuss construction document requirements, required clarifications to construction documents, construction schedule, and coordination of affected trades.

3. Moisture Vapor Reducing Admixture (MVRA): Include admixture manufacturer or authorized representative, concrete supplier, and concrete finisher to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer’s installation instructions, and manufacturer’s warranty requirements. Concrete suppliers and finishers must be certified.

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on all specified manufactured products showing compliance with

specified requirements and installation instructions. 1. Curing Compounds: Provide data on method of removal in the event of incompatibility with floor covering

adhesives. B. Mix Design: Submit proposed mix design for each class of concrete specified. Include mix identification number

(unique for each submitted mix), intended use of mix, air content, proportions of ingredients, aggregate analysis, cement brand and type, slump, water/cement ratio, and strength test reports for 7 and 28 day strengths. 1. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 301, Section 4 - Concrete Mixtures.



2. Include mix design for drilled concrete piers and shafts as specified in Section 31 6329. 3. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 318, Chapter 5 - Concrete Quality, Mixing

and Placing. 4. Moisture Vapor Reducing Admixture (MVRA): Include specific information showing quantities of MVRA

included in applicable mix designs. a. Register project with MVRA manufacturer according to MVRA manufacturer's requirements and

submit product batch numbers to MVRA manufacturer prior to initiation of the use or incorporation of any MVRA materials.

b. Submit applicable mix design directly to admixture manufacturer and provide evidence of submission and MVRA manufacturer's approval to Architect/Engineer.

5. Provide specific aggregate analysis for recycled aggregates proposed for use in concrete mixes. 6. For mixes specifying a maximum allowed drying shrinkage, submit data according to ASTM C157/C157M

substantiating conformance with specified requirements. 7. Fly-Ash Content Submittal: If any fly ash or ground granulated blast furnace slag is used in mix designs to

replace Portland cement, submit the total volume of concrete cast in place, mix design(s) used showing the quantity of Portland cement replaced, reports showing successful cylinder testing, and temperature on day of pour if cold weather mix is used.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Reinforcing: Comply with requirements of ACI SP-66. Include bar schedules, shapes of bent bars, spacing

of bars, and location of splices. a. Provide 1/4 inch scale elevations of all walls and grade beams with reinforcing shown. b. Show splice locations, if any.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: For concrete accessories, curing compounds, and admixtures, indicate installation procedures and interface required with adjacent construction.

E. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this Section in accordance with ACI 117, ACI 301, and ACI 318, unless amended by

requirements specified in this Section. B. Formwork Designer Qualifications: Design formwork under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer

experienced in design of concrete formwork and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. C. Follow recommendations of ACI 301 when concreting during hot or cold weather.

1.07 WARRANTY A. Slabs with Moisture Vapor Reducing Admixture (MVRA): Provide warranty to cover the cost of flooring failures

due to moisture migration from slabs for ten years. 1. Include cost of repair or removal of failed flooring, placement of topical moisture remediation system, and

replacement of flooring with comparable flooring system. 2. Provide warranty by manufacturer of MVRA matching terms of flooring adhesive or primer manufacturer's

material defect warranty.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FORMING A. Formwork Design and Construction: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 347, except as modified by requirements

specified in this Section, to provide formwork that will produce concrete complying with tolerances of ACI 117. 1. Design and construct to provide resultant concrete that conforms to design with respect to shape, lines, and

dimensions. B. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated as abrupt or gradual according to ACI 347, as follows:

1. Class A: 1/8 inch for "smooth formed" finish surfaces specifically noted on Drawings. 2. Class B: 1/4 inch for permanently exposed formed finished surfaces, unless otherwise specified. 3. Class C: 1/2 inch for indicated formed finished surfaces. 4. Class D: 1 inch for permanently concealed formed finished surfaces.



5. Permissible irregularity is a cumulative value due to all sources including layout, plumbness, member size, formwork offsets, joints, and member levelness. Permissible irregularity also applies between adjacent concrete surfaces on opposite sides of construction joints, expansion joints, or shrinkage pour strip if present.

C. Chamfer outside corners of exposed beams, joists, columns, and walls unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. D. Steel Flange Forms: Provide factory fabricated flange form units of required sizes and shapes. Fabricate of

minimum 16 gauge steel, free of dents, irregularities, sag and rust. 1. Provide flange forms complete with covers, end closures and tapered shapes required to form true, clean,

smooth concrete surfaces as shown. E. Earth cuts may not be used as forms.

2.02 REINFORCING A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (60,000 psi).

1. Type: Deformed billet-steel bars. 2. Finish: Unfinished, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Reinforcing Steel for Welded Connections and Splices: ASTM A706/A706M, deformed low-alloy steel bars. 1. Unfinished, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR): Galvanized, plain type, ASTM A1064/A1064M. 1. Form: Flat sheets. 2. Mesh Size and Wire Gage: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage, 0.0508 inch. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during

concrete placement. 3. Provide stainless steel, galvanized, plastic, or plastic coated steel components for placement within 2 inches

of weathering surfaces and surfaces exposed to view. 4. Provide plastic, or plastic coated steel components within 2 inches from point of contact with epoxy coated

reinforcement.

2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150, Cement type as indicated on drawings. Portland type. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33. C. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F. D. Calcined Pozzolan: ASTM C618, Class N. E. Silica Fume: ASTM C1240, proportioned in accordance with ACI 211.1. F. Color Additive: Pure, concentrated mineral pigments specifically intended for mixing into concrete and

complying with ASTM C979. 1. Concentration: Base dosage rates on weight of Portland cement, fly ash, silica fume, and other cementitious

materials but not aggregate or sand. 2. Color(s): As selected by Architect/Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

G. Water: ASTM C1602/C1602M; clean and not detrimental to concrete.

2.04 ADMIXTURES A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.06 percent by weight of cement.

1. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M. 2. High Range Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type G. 3. High Range Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type F. 4. Water Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type E. 5. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type D. 6. Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type C. 7. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type B. 8. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type A. 9. Moisture Vapor Reduction Admixture (MVRA): ASTM C494, Type S; liquid, inorganic admixture free of

volatile organic compounds (VOCs) and formulated to close capillary systems formed during curing to reduce moisture vapor emission and transmission, with no adverse effect on concrete properties. a. Option 1: Provide admixture in all slabs to receive adhesively applied flooring.



b. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Barrier One, Inc.; Barrier One High Performance Admixture: www.barrierone.com. 2) Hycrete, Inc.; V1000: www.hycrete.com. 3) Specialty Products Group; Vapor Lock VL 20/20: www.spggogreen.com. 4) U.S. Concrete, Inc.; Aridus Rapid Drying Concrete: www.us-concrete.com/aridus. 5) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Underslab Vapor Retarder: Multi-layer, fabric-, cord-, grid-, or aluminum-reinforced polyethylene or equivalent,

complying with ASTM E1745, Class A; maximum permeance of 0.01 as measured according to ASTM E96/E96M; stated by manufacturer as suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. The use of single ply polyethylene is prohibited. 1. Installation: Comply with ASTM E1643. 2. Accessory Products: Vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive, mastic, prefabricated

boots, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations. 3. Acceptable Products:

a. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Moistop Ultra 15: www.fortifiber.com/#sle. b. Insulation Solutions, Inc.; Viper VaporCheck II 15-mil (Class A): www.insulationsolutions.com. c. Stego Industries, LLC; ____: www.stegoindustries.com/#sle. d. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; PERMINATOR Class A - 15 mils: www.wrmeadows.com.

B. Non-Shrink Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, Grade B; pre-mixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, and manufacturer's specified water reducing and plasticizing agents; non-staining, non-gas-forming, containing no chlorides; plastic consistency as measured according to ASTM C230; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi in 24 hours and 7,000 psi in 28 days.

C. Post-Installed Expansion Bolts in Concrete: 1. ICC Approval: Only concrete anchors approved by the International Code Council (ICC) with a published

evaluation report by ICC Evaluation Service (ICC-ES) indicating code compliance are acceptable. 2. Type: Only wedge type expansion bolts.

a. Interior Use: For all expansion bolts, nuts, and washers for use in interior conditioned environments free of potential moisture, provide bolt assemblies manufactured from carbon steel zinc plated in accordance with Federal Specification QQ-Z-325.

b. Exterior or Exposed Use: For all expansion bolts, nuts, and washers for use in exposed or potentially wet environments, or for attachment of exterior cladding materials, provide bolt assemblies in galvanized or stainless steel. Provide stainless steel bolts manufactured from 300 series stainless steel, and nuts and washers from 300 series or Type 18-8 stainless steel.

c. Nuts and Washers: Furnished by manufacturer and used with specified bolts. 3. Acceptable Products and Manufacturers:

a. Products approved by ICC with an ICC-ES evaluation report. b. Submit ICC-ES report for review.

D. Post-Installed Adhesive Bolts in Concrete: 1. Type: Threaded steel rod meeting minimum requirements of ASTM A307 and a sealed glass, tube, or

sausage type capsule containing polyester resin, quartz sand aggregate, and hardener. a. Interior Use: For use in environments free of potential moisture, provide bolt assemblies manufactured

from carbon steel zinc plated in accordance with Federal Specification QQ-Z-325. b. Exterior or Exposed Use: Adhesive bolts used in exterior, exposed, or potentially wet environments,

and for attachment of exterior cladding materials, provide bolt assemblies with threaded rods manufactured from ASTM A153/A153M galvanized steel or 300 series stainless steel. Provide nuts and washers in galvanized or stainless steel.

2. Nuts and Washers: Furnished by manufacturer and used with specified bolts. 3. Acceptable Products:

a. Products approved by ICC with an ICC-ES evaluation report. b. Submit ICC-ES report for review.



2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS A. Slab-On-Grade Isolation Joint Filler: 1/4 inch thick, height equal to slab thickness, with removable top section

that will form 1/2 inch deep sealant pocket after removal. 1. Provide non-compressible isolation joint filler for use where slab-on-grade provides restraint at bottom of

foundation walls and bottom of columns, at locations indicated on Drawings.

2.07 CURING MATERIALS A. Curing Compounds: Conform to ACI 301 conforming to ASTM C309 or ASTM C1315. B. Where slabs are to receive moisture sensitive flooring or adhesively applied flooring or roofing, provide curing

materials and methods that will not inhibit adhesion of floor and roof coverings and will prevent failures resulting from moisture and/or alkalinity from emanating from the concrete. 1. Use of curing and sealing compounds shall be provided with a warranty by manufacturer for a period of not

less than 10 years to cover the cost of floor and roof repairs resulting from damage due to inhibition of the floor or roof adhesion, and damage resulting from moisture and/or alkalinity emanating from the concrete.

C. Evaporation Reducer: Liquid thin-film-forming compound that reduces rapid moisture loss caused by high temperature, low humidity, and high winds; intended for application immediately after concrete placement.

D. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete.

2.08 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN - GENERAL A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 211.1 recommendations. B. Mix Design Durability: Conform to ACI 301 durability exposure categories as follows, unless otherwise indicated

on Drawings: 1. Freezing and Thawing:

a. F1: Slabs in garages and all exterior unprotected elements. b. F0: All others.

2. Sulfate Resistance: a. S3: Foundation and other elements in contact with water-soluble sulfates exceeding 0.1 percent by

mass as determined in accordance with ASTM C1580, or dissolved sulfate in water exceeding 150 ppm as determined in accordance with ASTM D516 or ASTM D4130.

b. S0: All others. 3. Permeability:

a. P1: Elements containing water such as detention tanks and water vaults. b. P2: All others.

4. Corrosion Protection of Reinforcement: a. C2: Slabs in garages and unprotected exterior slabs. b. C1: All other unprotected elements. c. C0: All others.

C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended or required by manufacturer. 1. Moisture Vapor Reduction Admixture (MVRA): Strictly comply with admixture manufacturer's

requirements in all respects to achieve specified warranty.

2.09 CONCRETE MIXES A. See Drawings for specified concrete strengths. B. Include Moisture Vapor Reducing Admixture (MVRA) in floor slabs to receive adhesively applied flooring, if

Option 1 is selected according to "Contractor's Option - Slab Moisture Control under ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS in this Section.

C. Notes to Schedule of Concrete Mixes: 1. Nomenclature: NW = Normal weight, AEA = Air entraining agent, MR-WR = Medium range water

reducing admixture, MVRA = Moisture Vapor Reducing Admixture. 2. W/C is the ratio of weight of water to weight of cementitious materials. The weight of water includes all free

water in aggregate at the time of batching. D. Normal Weight Structural Concrete:

1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M at 28 days: As indicated on Drawings.



2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 25 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 3. Calcined Pozzolan Content: Maximum 10 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 4. Silica Fume Content: Maximum 5 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 5. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight for all unprotected exterior slabs, unless noted

otherwise. 6. Total Air Content: In conformance with ACI 301 for F1 exposure class for all garage slabs and unprotected

exterior slabs, unless noted otherwise; determined in accordance with ASTM C173/C173M. 7. Maximum Aggregate Size: In accordance with ACI 301.

2.10 MIXING A. General: Comply with ACI 301. B. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M.

1. Deliver concrete and discharge entire load within 1-1/2 hours, or before drum has turned 300 revolutions, whichever occurs first, after introduction of mixing water.

2. Maintain slump, air content and temperature according to ACI 301. C. Add water in accordance with ACI 304R, add at one time only, not more than 2 gal/cu yd of concrete, and

provided the increase in slump does not exceed one inch.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION A. Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms, reshores, and backshores to

support all applied loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete. B. Formwork Tolerances:

1. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 117, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Conform to specified class of surface finish for offset between adjacent formwork facing panels. Maintain

concrete cover and cross sections within specified tolerances regardless of class of surface finish. 3. Construct and align formwork for elevator hoistway in accordance with ASME A17.1. 4. Camber slabs and beams in accordance with ACI 301.

C. Remove all fins, projections, and other detrimental irregularities on surfaces to receive waterproofing systems; comply with waterproofing system manufacturer's requirements for surface preparation.

3.02 INSTALLATION - VAPOR RETARDER A. Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade according to manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM E1643.

Lap joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight by taping edges and ends. 1. Fine grade under slab soils to smooth and level surface prior to installation of slab on grade edge and

construction joint forms. 2. Tamp and level subbase soil materials to within plus zero (0) inches to minus 3/4 inches from required

subgrade elevation. 3. Lap vapor retarder up and over foundation elements and seal to foundation walls. 4. Seal all penetrations, including pipes, with specified pipe boots; no penetrations of vapor retarder membrane

are permitted except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities. 5. Do not disturb or damage vapor retarder while placing concrete. Repair damaged vapor retarder by cutting

patches of vapor retarder, overlapping damaged area 6 inches minimum and taping all four sides with seal tape.

3.03 INSTALLATION - REINFORCEMENT AND OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and accurately position,

support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverage required for protection.

3.04 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301. B. Notify Architect/Engineer not less than one week prior to commencement of placement operations.



3.05 SLAB JOINTING A. Slab-On-Grade Isolation Joints: Use preformed joint filler with removable top section for joint sealant, total

height equal to thickness of slab, set flush with top of slab. 1. Install wherever necessary to separate slab from other building members, including columns, walls,

equipment foundations, footings, stairs, manholes, sumps, and drains. 2. Separate piping, conduit, and similar penetrations through slabs on grade to allow free vertical movement of

slab or penetrating element. B. Slab-On-Grade Control Joints: Saw cut joints before concrete begins to cool, with 3/16 inch thick blade and cut at

least 1 inch deep. C. Contraction Joint Devices: Use preformed joint device, with top set flush with top of slab.

3.06 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCES A. An independent testing agency will inspect finished slabs for conformance to specified tolerances. B. Correct the slab surface if tolerances are less than specified. C. Comply with the following minimum F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness values:

1. Exposed to View and Foot Traffic: F(F) of 20; F(L) of 15, on-grade only. 2. Under Thick-Bed Tile: F(F) of 20; F(L) of 15, on-grade only. 3. Under Carpeting: F(F) of 25; F(L) of 20, on-grade only. 4. Under Thin Resilient Flooring and Thinset Tile: F(F) of 35; F(L) of 25, on-grade only.

D. Measure F(F) and F(L) in accordance with ASTM E1155 and ACI 117, within 72 hours after slab installation and before forms and shores are removed, and before post-tensioning stressing; report both composite overall values and local values for each measured section. 1. F(L) values do not apply to unshored steel framing and sloped slabs.

E. Corrective Measures: 1. Correct the slab surface if tolerances are less than specified. 2. Correct the slab surface if composite overall value is less than specified and if local value is less than two-

thirds of specified value or less than F(F) 13 / F(L) 10. 3. Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas requiring corrective

work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process.

3.07 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Repair surface defects immediately after removing formwork. B. Finishing Formed Surfaces: Unless otherwise specified, comply with ACI 301 Section 5 for "As-cast finish"

complying with SF-1.0 on concrete surfaces not exposed to view, and SF-2.0 on concrete surfaces exposed to view.

C. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 301. Unless otherwise specified, use following finishes and corresponding tolerances: 1. Scratched Finish: For surfaces scheduled to receive bonded cementitious mixtures. 2. Float Finish: For surfaces scheduled to receive waterproofing, roofing, insulation, or sand-bed terrazzo. 3. Trowel Finish: For floors scheduled to be exposed or to receive floor coverings. 4. Broom or Belt Finish: For sidewalks, ramps, and garage floor surfaces. 5. Non-Slip: For exterior platforms, steps, and landings, and for exterior and interior pedestrian ramps. 6. Surfaces to Receive Thick Floor Coverings: "Wood float" as described in ACI 302.1R; thick floor coverings

include quarry tile, ceramic tile, and Portland cement terrazzo with full bed setting system. 7. Surfaces to Receive Adhesive-Applied Floor Coverings: "Steel trowel," non-burnished and free of ridges, as

described in ACI 301.1R; adhesive-applied floor coverings include carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, thin set ceramic tile, and other specified flooring systems.

3.08 INSTALLATION - POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS A. General: Comply with all manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Where manufacturer recommends use of special tools for installation of anchors, use such tools. B. Drill holes with rotary impact hammer drills using carbide-tipped bits or core drills using diamond core bits. Use

drill bits of diameters as specified by anchor manufacturer. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, drill holes perpendicular to concrete surface. Where anchors are to be installed in cored holes, use core bits with matched tolerances as specified by manufacturer. Cored holes may only be used if acceptable to the manufacturer.



C. Clear holes of debris after holes are drilled according to manufacturer’s instructions. For adhesive installations, at a minimum, blow out holes with oil-free compressed air and brush with wire or nylon brush. Blow out holes one additional time with oil-free compressed air. Additional hole cleaning requirements may be required by manufacturer.

D. During adhesive curing time period, keep temperature of substrate above minimum substrate temperature required by manufacturer. Determine appropriate means and methods to ensure that temperature is kept above required minimum temperature required before adhesive installation is begun.

3.09 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with requirements of ACI 301 for curing and protection of concrete.

1. Curing and Sealing Compound - Moisture Vapor Reducing: Strictly comply with curing compound manufacturer's requirements in all respects to achieve specified warranty.

B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. 1. Normal Concrete: Not less than 7 days.

C. Where slabs are to receive moisture sensitive flooring or adhesively applied flooring or roofing, provide curing methods that will not inhibit adhesion of floor and roof coverings and will prevent failures resulting from moisture and/or alkalinity from emanating from the concrete. Application of curing and sealing compounds shall be in accordance with the manufactures requirements in all aspects to achieve manufactures warranty.

D. Apply sealers according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests. B. Tests and Inspections: Conform to ACI 301. C. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. D. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to

commencement of concrete operations. E. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance with specified

requirements. F. Formwork: Inspected by the testing agency for size, shape, profile, condition of interior surfaces and joints, and

attachment of accessories and embedded items prior to each placement of concrete. G. Concrete: Tested and inspected by the testing agency.

1. Verification of mix design. 2. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M and ACI 301. For each test, mold and cure concrete test

cylinders for reporting 7, 28, and 56 day compressive strength in addition to field cured cylinders (minimum quantity of cylinders for 28 day tests per ACI 301). Field cure cylinders as required to determine compressive strength prior to stressing post-tensioning, form stripping and other as indicated in ACI 301. Use of 56 day test will be at the discretion and approval of Engineer. Obtain test samples for every 100 cu yd or less of each class of concrete placed.

3. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents.

4. Other Required Tests: a. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTM

C143/C143M. b. Slab Testing: Cooperate with manufacturer of specified moisture vapor reduction admixture (MVRA)

to allow access for sampling and testing concrete for compliance with warranty requirements. c. Sample concrete used for each set of test cylinders for air content, temperature, and unit weight

following procedures of ASTM C173/C173M or ASTM C231/C231M (do not use ASTM C231/C231M method for lightweight aggregate concrete) for air content and ASTM C1064/C1064M for temperature.

d. Take samples at the point of discharge from the truck chute, except take samples of pumped concrete at the point of deposit (placement) in the field.

H. Reinforcing: Inspected by testing agency prior to closing formwork or placing concrete. I. Post-Installed Anchoring: Special inspection is required according to applicable building code requirements.



3.11 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect/Engineer and Contractor within

24 hours of test. B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified

requirements. C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect/Engineer. The cost of additional

testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified. D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of

Architect/Engineer for each individual area. E. Repair cracks, holes, and voids exceeding 1/16 inch wide by grinding crack to 1/8 inch wide and fill with epoxy

bonding system. Grind smooth and flush with adjacent surface. 1. Holes and Voids: Epoxy resin. 2. Cracks: Epoxy filler.

3.12 PROTECTION A. Protect concrete in accordance with ACI 301. Do not permit traffic over unprotected concrete floor surface until

fully cured. END OF SECTION 03 30 00

SURFACE-BONDED BRICK MASONRY 04 21 13 - 1

DIVISION 04 – MASONRY Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 04 21 13 SURFACE-BONDED BRICK MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Thin Brick masonry units. 1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A 525 – Steel Sheet Zinc-Coated – hot dip galvanized. 2. C 33 - Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 3. C 67 - Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile. 4. C79 – Gypsum Sheathing Board. 5. C 270 - Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 6. C 578 – Preformed Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. 7. C 482-02 Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Ceramic Tile to Portland Cement. 8. C 270 - Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 9. C 1019 - Method of Sampling and Testing Grout. 10. C1088-05a Standard Specification for Thin Veneer Brick Units Made from Clay or Shale.

B. ANSI 1. A108.11 Installation of cementitious backer units. 2. A108.13 Installation of waterproof membranes for thin-set brick. 3. A118.1 Dry-set Portland cement mortar. 4. A118.4 latex Portland cement mortar. 5. A118.9 Cementitious backer units. 6. A118.10 Waterproof membranes for thin-set brick. 7. A136.1 Organic Adhesives, Type I and Type II.

C. International Building Code (ICC) adopted edition. (2012) D. Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures (TMS 402,602/ACI

530,530.1/ASCE 5,6) adopted edition Code Requirements for Masonry Structures (ACI 530, 530.1) adopted editions.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Division 1 – General Requirements. B. Product Data, and Evaluation Reports as required for installation submitted in accordance with

Division 1 – General Requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Division 1 – General Requirements and include

elevations of each wall indicating type and layout of units. D. Samples: Include samples of stretcher units in sufficient quantity to illustrate color range and texture. E. Test Reports from an independent testing laboratory showing compliance with applicable

specifications. F. Provide Manufacturer's specification, data, and installation for review prior to fabrication of work. G. Submit installer's coordination drawings indicating the work of this section with that of related work

of other sections for proper interface of the completed work. Installer shall coordinate and obtain approvals from the work of other related sections prior to submitting to the Architect.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Review Drawings and Specifications and meet with the Contractor to discuss requirements before work commences.

B. Mock-up: 1. Prior to starting construction of masonry, construct minimum 4 foot square mock-up. 2. Use accepted materials, containing each different kind and color of brick masonry units to

illustrate wall design. 3. Show color range, texture range, bond, mortar color, joint tooling, critical design details and

quality of workmanship. 4. Masonry construction may not proceed until the Architect/Engineer approves mock-up. 5. When not accepted, construct another mock-up. 6. When accepted, mock-up will be standard of comparison for remainder of masonry work.

C. Certification: Furnish Manufacturer’s certification that clay brick units provided meet or exceed the requirements of this specification.


1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units above ground to prevent contamination by mud, dust or other materials likely to

cause staining or other defects. B. Cover and protect masonry units from inclement weather to maintain quality control and physical

requirements. C. Remove chipped, cracked, and otherwise defective units from jobsite upon discovery.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Cold Weather Requirements: 1. In accordance 2012 IBC Section 2104.3. 2. Provide adequate equipment for heating masonry materials when air temperature is below

40 degrees Fahrenheit. B. Hot Weather Requirements:

1. In accordance with 2012 IBC Section 2104.4. 2. When ambient air temperature exceeds 100 degrees F, or when ambient air temperature exceeds

90 degrees F and wind velocity is greater than 8 miles per hour, implement hot weather protection procedures.

3. Wet mortar board before loading and cover mortar to retard drying when not being used. 4. Place masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 THIN BRICK MASONRY UNITS

A. Manufacturers and Colors: 1. Interstate Brick Co. Obsidian L-3. No Substitutes. 2. Summit Brick Medium Red Grain. No Substitutes.

B. Type: ASTM C 1088, Grade Exterior, Type TBS thin veneer brick. C. Size: 3/4 in. thick x 2 ¼ in. high x 7 9/16 in. long, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

2.02 SUBSTRATE

A. Cementitious Backer Units that conform to the requirements of ANSI A118.9 where indicated on the drawings, and elsewhere as required for interior and exterior walls, wet and dry areas as recommended substrate for thin brick, fire rated wall installations. Installation shall comply with ASNI A108.11 and Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

B. Weather Resistant Barrier: a weather resistant barrier is required on all exterior and interior wall applications except when thin brick are applied over stucco, masonry, or concrete substrates. 1. Kraft Building Paper: UBC Standard 14-1 2. 15# Felt: ASTM D226, Type 1. 3. Tyvek® Commercial Wrap® or equivalent: IBC 2000 weather resistant sheathing paper

C. Metal Lath options: 1. Code mandated mesh. 2. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar Minimum 2.5 lb. galvanized expanded metal lath (diamond

mesh) for exterior applications. Black metal lath may be used for interior applications 3. 18 Gauge galvanized woven wire mesh 4. Over open studs – use 3.4 lb. 3/8” rib expanded galvanized metal lath.

D. Grouts 1. Polymer Modified Tile Grouts for tile or brick should comply to the requirements of ANSI

118.07 a. “Laticrete “Tri-Poly Fortified Sanded Grout (1500 Series), gauged with laticrete

“1776 Admix Plus Microban” meeting the following minimum requirements: i) Compressive Strength (ANSI 118.7)………………...….3000 psi min. ii) Tensile Strength (ANSI 118.7) …………………..…..…. 500 psi min. iii) Water Absorption (ANSI 118.7)…………………..……..…. 5% max.

E. Organic Adhesive 1. Should comply to the requirement s of ANSI 131.06

a. LATICRETE 15 Premium Multi-Mastic Adhesive: i) Shear Strength (ANSI 136.1)………………………….……..…….50 psi min.

3.01 EXECUTION

A. THIN SET APPLICATION 1. For interior applications not susceptible to moisture the following guidelines shall be used to

install thin brick using Portland cement mortar, organic adhesives or epoxy adhesives. 2. Thin brick can be installed over gypsum board and gypsum plaster in dry areas only and over

cementitious backer units, CMU, cement mortar, and concrete where areas susceptible to


moisture. The back up shall be dry and clean concrete or masonry surface where susceptible to moisture. Remove dirt, foam, oil, and other materials that are detrimental to bonding of brick to the backing.

3. Use Type S mortar (mortar mix complying with ASTM C270 or by proportion of 1 part Portland cement (ASTM C150) to ½ parts hydrated lime (ASTM C207) to 4 ½ part sand (ASTM C144)) or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar conforming to ANSI 118.04 or organic or water cleanable tile setting epoxy adhesive conforming to ANSI 118.03 or Modified Epoxy emulsion mortar/grout conforming to ANSI 118.08 to install the thin brick. Apply mortar/adhesive using a flat trowel onto the entire surface of the back up material. Use a notched trowel to comb through the adhesive to create an even setting bed. The minimum thickness of the setting bed after the installation of the brick shall be 1/32 in. Refer to the adhesive manufactures procedures for details.

4. Press the brick onto the adhesive bed in the required bonding pattern with a minimum of 2/3 of the joint depth open for mortar. Tap the bricks in place to obtain a minimum of 80% of average contact area between brick and the back up.

5. Grout the joints using Type N mortar mix using 1 part Portland cement (ASTM C150): 1 part hydrated lime (ASTM C207): 6 parts sand (ASTM C144) or Modified Epoxy emulsion mortar/grout conforming to ANSI 118.07. Tool the joints when the grout is thumb print hard.

3.02 MORTAR JOINTS

A. Make joints straight, clean, smooth, and uniform in thickness. B. Pointing: Tool exposed joints, slightly concave. Strike concealed joints flush. C. Joint Thickness: Make vertical and horizontal joints as required to achieve nominal dimensions on

drawings and within tolerances listed in ACI530.1 Section 3.3 G. D. Where fresh masonry joins totally or partially set masonry, clean and roughen set masonry before

laying new units. 3.03 BOND PATTERN

A. Lay brick masonry units in running bond pattern, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 3.04 WATER REPELLENT

A. Apply water repellent as specified in 07 19 00, Liquid Water Repellant.

3.05 CLEANING A. Exercise extreme care to prevent mortar splotches. B. Do not attach construction supports to masonry walls. C. Wash off brick scum and grout spills before scum and grout set. D. Remove grout stains from walls. E. Clean exposed masonry. Remove scaffolding and equipment. Dispose of debris, refuse, and surplus

material offsite legally. F. Correct efflorescence on exposed surfaces with commercially prepared cleaning solution acceptable

to masonry unit Manufacturer. G. Apply cleaning solution in accordance with cleaning solution Manufacturer's printed instructions. H. Do not use muriatic acid as cleaning solution. J. Do not use sandblast cleaning equipment.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Provide temporary protection for exposed masonry corners subject to damage. B. Bracing:

1. Adequately brace masonry walls over 8 feet in height to prevent overturning and to prevent collapse unless wall is adequately supported by permanent supporting elements so wall will not overturn or collapse.

2. Keep bracing in place until permanent supporting elements of structure are in place. C. Limited Access Zone:

1. Establish limited access zone prior to start of masonry wall construction. 2. Zone shall be immediately adjacent to wall and equal to height of wall to be constructed plus

4 feet by entire length of wall on unscaffolded side of wall. 3. Limit access to zone to workers actively engaged in constructing wall. Do not permit other

persons to enter zone. 4. Keep zone in place until wall is adequately supported or braced by permanent supporting

elements to prevent overturning and collapse.

END OF SECTION 04 21 13 – SURFACE-BONDED BRICK MASONRY

CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 22 00 - 1

DIVISION 04 – MASONRY Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 04 22 00 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES

A. Concrete masonry construction shall conform to all requirements of “Specification for Concrete Masonry Construction, ACI 531.1-79,” published by the American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Mich., except as modified by the supplemental requirements below, and with the recommendations of the National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA).

B. Structural Masonry shall also conform to IBC, Chapter 21. C. Comply with recommendations of National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA).

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Shop Drawings for fabrication, bending and placement of reinforcing complying with ACI 315, and accordance with Division 01- General Requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C90, Grade N1, Light weight 1900 psi units in modular size 8”x8”x16”, with accessory units as required.

B. Specified compressive strength (f`m) of structural units shall be substantiated according to International Building Code (IBC) Section 2105.2.1.

C. Mortar: 1. Mortar Materials and Mixes: Provide mortar complying with ASTM C 270 Proportion

Specification for material and mortar types of composition indicated: Type S as shown on the Drawings. Minimum cube strength of 1800 PSI.

D. Joint Reinforcement, Ties and Anchoring Devices: 1. Joint Reinforcement: Hot-Dip Galvanized Wire ASTM A 82 for uncoated wire. 2. Miscellaneous Masonry Anchors: Fabricated form 16-gauge steel sheet or 3/8” steel rod, 1.5

oz. hot-dip zinc coating after fabrication. E. Reinforcement: ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed bars and as noted. F. Grout: ASTM C476, minimum compressive strength 2000 psi. Grout shall be supplied by Transit

Track.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Follow ACI 305R-77 (Rev. 1982) for “hot” weather procedures and ACI 306R-78 for “cold” weather procedures.

3.02 GROUTING

A. Low lift grouting shall be allowed used according to 2012 IBC and the recommendations of NCMA. B. High lift grouting will not be allowed unless first reviewed and approved by Structural Engineer.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Remove all dirt, ice, loose rust and scale from walls and reinforcing prior to installation.

3.04 INSTALLATION A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, lay CMU in running bond.

1. Lay all masonry plumb and true to lines. Provide full mortar joints. Mortar beds shall be spread smooth or only slightly furrowed.

2. Where cutting of units is necessary, make cuts with a motor-driven masonry saw. Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units by proper layout.

3. Joints shall be plumb or level. Tool exposed joints. 4. Adjust masonry dimensions and install starter units as required to eliminate small cuts and to

maintain bond. B. Cutting and Patching: Cut and patch masonry wherever necessary for other trades. Use experienced

mechanics with workmanlike manner. Do not injure the strength or appearance of finished work.

CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 22 00 - 2

3.06 ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Anchors: Bond ends of walls to structure with masonry units or provide anchors spaced 2’0”, except

as otherwise shown. B. Movement Joints: Provide control and expansion joints at locations shown, and keep clean of mortar

droppings. C. Flashing: Provide concealed flashing in exterior masonry work, with weepholes in head joints in first

course immediately above all flashing, maximum 2’0” O.C. D. Build other work into the masonry work as shown, fitting masonry units around other work, and

grouting for secure anchorage. E. Reinforcing: Install in grout filled cells as indicated, secure against displacement, splice by lapping.

3.07. PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT

A. Replace any masonry work showing damage or disfiguration during the progress of work in its entirety. Patching or hiding of defects not permitted.

3.08 POINTING AND CLEANING

A. Provide flush mortar joints and tool slightly concave. B. Cut out defective joints and holes in exposed masonry and repoint with mortar. Dry brush masonry

surface after mortar has set at end of each day’s work and after final pointing. Clean exposed masonry to comply with masonry manufacturer’s directions and applicable NCMA “Tek” bulletins. Test cleaning methods on sample panels before proceeding with cleaning of entire masonry wall.

C. Upon completion of pointing and cleaning, leave the work area and surrounding surfaces clean and free of mortar spots, droppings, and broken masonry, ready for sealer by others.

D. Cleaning process should be accomplished with Fabrikleen masonry cleaner, or Approved Substitute. Do not use muriatic acid.

END OF SECTION 04 22 00 – CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

END OF DIVISION 4 - MASONRY

DIVISION 05 - METALS Metropolitan Foundry Theater P# 1709 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00 - 1

SECTION 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1- GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural steel framing members, support members. B. Base plates, shear stud connectors. C. Grouting under base plates and other bearing members. D. Design engineering of standard for performance design systems.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 21 00 - Steel Joist Framing. B. Section 05 31 00 - Steel Decking. C. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications. D. Division 9 - Painting and Coating E. Section 051250 - Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel. F. Section 07 81 00 - Applied Fireproofing: Fireproof protection to framing and metal deck systems.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Reference Standards.

1. AISC 360 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. 2. AISC 303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; American Institute of Steel

Construction, Inc. 3. AISC 348 - Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts; Research Council on Structural

Connections. 4. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society. 5. AISC 341 - Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. 6. AWS D1.8 - Structural Welding Code - Seismic Supplement; American Welding Society.

B. AISC 303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; 2016. C. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014. D. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold Finished; 2013. E. ASTM A242/A242M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel; 2004 (Reapproved

2009). F. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile

Strength; 2014. G. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural

Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013. H. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts; 2007a (Reapproved 2014). I. ASTM A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes; 2011 (Reapproved 2015). J. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength

Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2015.

K. ASTM E165/E165M - Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination for General Industry; 2012. L. ASTM F3125/F3125M - Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat

Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength, Inch and Metric Dimensions; 2015a.

M. ASTM F436/F436M - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers Inch and Metric Dimensions; 2016. N. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); 2002 (Ed. 2004). O. SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning; 2015. P. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; 1982 (Ed. 2004). Q. SSPC-SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning; 1982 (Ed. 2004). R. SSPC-SP 7 - Brush-Off Blast Cleaning; 2007. S. SSPC-SP 11 - Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal; 2012 (Ed. 2013). T. SSPC-SP 13 - Surface Preparation of Concrete; (Reaffirmed 2015); 2003.



U. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition.

1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit for the following products:

1. Non-shrink grout. 2. Expansion anchors and adhesive anchors as indicated on drawings.

B. Drawings: 1. Shop Drawings: Include details of each shipping piece; showing cuts, connections, holes, camber, welds,

shop installed bolts, and other pertinent data. 2. Shop Drawings: Indicate location of Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel (AESS) 3. Erection Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and sections as need to locate each shipping piece. Including

details and schedules as required erection. Indicate required field welds and joints requiring special bolting procedures.

4. Placement drawings: For items furnished but not installed under this section, provide placement drawings indicating correct location and method of placement.

5. Indicate location of Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel on all drawings. C. Design Calculations:

1. Alternate Connections: Submit request for substitution and design calculations prior to submitting final shop drawings.

2. Alternate Fabricator Preferred Standard Connections: Submit request for substitution and design calculations prior to submitting final shop drawings.

D. Verification Survey: Submit verification survey as indicated in section 3.1. Indicate deviations from specified tolerances when there are deviations from specified field measured plan dimensions and beam cambers.

1.05 QUALITY CONTROL A. Quality Control is defined in this specification section by AISC. This definition is different than the rest of the

specification sections for the project. B. The Contractor is responsible for quality control, including workmanship and materials furnished by his

subcontractors and suppliers. Quality assurance for structural steel shall meet the requirements of AISC 360 Chapter N.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: Experienced in fabrication of structural steel for projects of similar size and difficulty. D. Erector Qualifications: Experienced in the erection of structural steel of a similar nature to this project. E. Welder Qualifications: Qualified by AWS for the type of welding being performed at the time of welding. F. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC specifications. G. Structural steel members designated as architecturally-exposed structural steel (AESS) to also comply with Section

05 12 13. H. Maintain one copy of each document on site. I. Design connections not detailed on the drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer

experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site at such intervals to insure uninterrupted progress of the work. B. Storage of Structural Steel: Structural steel members which are stored at the project site shall be supported above

ground on platforms, skids, or other supports and stored upright to prevent twisting. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Protect steel from excessive corrosion. Store packaged materials in their original, unbroken package or container. 1. Do not store materials on the structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to the members of

the supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. C. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.

1. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 2. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F1852 fasteners

and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.



1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall coordinate the fabrication and erection of all structural steel work with the work of other

trades. B. Protection: Protect any adjacent materials or areas below from damage due to weld splatter or sparks during field

welding.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS A. Refer to contract documents for required material designations. B. Anchor Rods:

1. All anchor rods shall be made from threaded round stock conforming to ASTM Specifications. Hooked-type anchor rods not allowed. Refer to contract documents for required material grade.

C. Fasteners: 1. Refer to contract documents for required material grade.

D. Non-Shrink Grout: 1. Contractor shall provide premixed, nonshrink, noncorrosive, nonmetallic, nonstaining, flowable product.

The product shall require only the addition of water and shall comply with the performance requirements of ASTM C1107 and show positive expansion when tested in accordance with ASTM C827. a. Minimum compressive strength, when tested according to ASTM C109 with manufacturer's maximum

allowable water content: 3000 psi after one day; 7000 psi after 28 days. b. Grout shall be free of gas-producing or air-releasing agents and oxidizing agents. c. Grout shall contain no corrosive iron, aluminum, or gypsum. d. Grout shall be placed at a fluid consistency.

E. Steel Angles and Plates: ASTM A36/A36M. F. Steel W Shapes and Tees: ASTM A992/A992M. G. Rolled Steel Structural Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M. H. Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A242/A242M high-strength, corrosion-resistant structural steel. I. Cold-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B. J. Shear Stud Connectors: Made from ASTM A108 Grade 1015 bars. K. Structural Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, ASTM A307, Grade A . L. High-Strength Structural Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 or ASTM A325M, Type 1, medium carbon,

plain, with matching compatible ASTM A563 or ASTM A563M nuts and ASTM F436 washers. M. Tension Control Bolts: Twist-off type; ASTM F3125/F3125M. N. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, 55, supplement 1, plain, with matching ASTM A563 or ASTM A563M

nuts and ASTM F436/F436M Type 1 washers. O. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having

jurisdiction.

2.02 FABRICATION A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly:

1. Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in the shop to the greatest extent possible. 2. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on the final

approved Shop Drawings. 3. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 4. Take field measurements on site as required for correct fabrication and installation as it relates to existing

conditions. 5. Fabricator shall be responsible for errors in fabrication and for correct fit of structural steel. 6. Fitted stiffeners shall be fabricated neatly between flanges, and the ends of stiffeners shall be prepared as

required to secure an even bearing against abutting surfaces. 7. Splices in Structural Steel: Splicing of members in the shop or the field to obtain the required lengths is not

permitted without prior approval of the Architect/Engineer unless shown on the Drawings. 8. Holes for Other Work: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing, and for

passage of other work through steel framing members as shown on the structural contract documents, and/or



the final Shop Drawings. Openings shown on other consultant contract documents shall be approved by Structural Engineer prior to fabrication.

9. Provide camber in beams and girders where indicated on the Drawings. a. Camber shall be applied separately for cantilever members required to be cambered, both at the

cantilever and the back span. b. Cambers indicated on the drawings are intended to be final cambers at time of erection.

10. Where shop painting is required, complete the assembly, including welding of units, before start of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in the final structure free of markings, burrs, and other defects.

11. Finished Work: All work shall be finished in accordance with the approved Shop Drawings and shall be true and free from twists, kinks, buckles, open joints, and other defects.

B. Welding: 1. Comply with AISC 360 and the AWS D1.1.

C. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible. D. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors. E. Develop required camber for members.

2.03 CONNECTIONS A. General:

1. Provide connections as shown or noted on the Drawings. Where connections are presented in schedules or tables on the drawings, observe the notes on the drawings and the provisions of these specifications in the selection of connections from the schedules or tables.

2. Bearing-type bolts in slotted holes shall not be used to transmit any component of stress in the direction of the slot.

3. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated on the Drawings. Provide Group A high-strength threaded fasteners for all bolted connections unless noted otherwise.

4. High-Strength Bolted Construction: Install high-strength threaded fasteners in accordance with AISC348. a. Minimum bolt diameter shall be 3/4 inch except as shown otherwise. b. Allowable values for "X" type bearing connections shall not be used in connection design unless noted

otherwise on the drawings. c. Slip Critical Joints: Bolts shall be installed to the slip critical (SC) condition with faying surfaces

prepared to meet class A requirements unless noted otherwise, as defined by AISC 348, in the followings joint types: 1) Moment connections when bolts are loaded in shear. 2) Connections of built up members. 3) Column splices utilizing fillers greater than ¼” thick. 4) Joints with slotted holes parallel to the line of force. 5) Joints using oversized holes (other than base plate connections).

d. Fully Tensioned Joints: Bolts shall be installed to the pre-tensioned (PT) condition, as defined by AISC 348, in the following joint types: 1) Group B fasteners loaded in tension. 2) Fasteners subject to vibration or cyclic loading, including but not limited to the following:

(a) Column splices and all beam and girder to column connections in multi-story structures over 125 feet in height.

(b) All connections of crane rails, runway beams, support brackets, braces, roof trusses and columns supporting cranes of greater than 5 ton capacity.

(c) Support frames that support vibratory machinery. e. Snug tight bolts. All other connections need only be tightened to the snug tight condition. Snug tight

condition is defined as the tightness that exists when all plies in a joint are in firm contact. This may be attained by a few impacts of an impact wrench or the full effort of a man using an ordinary spud wrench.

5. Minimum reaction capacity shall be 6kip ASD or 10kip LRFD and each connection shall contain not less than two 3/4" diameter A325N bolts except for lacing, sag bars and girts.

B. Simple Beam Connections: 1. Simple Beam Connections: Select connections with capacities equal to or greater than the beam reactions

indicated on the construction drawings. Contractor shall request beam reactions that are inadvertently



missing from the drawings. Comply with the following additional requirements for one-sided and two-sided shear connections: a. One-sided shear connections: Single angle, single bent plate, and shear plate type connections shall be

detailed to use the maximum number of rows of bolts (spaced at 3” on center or greater spacing if required to satisfy minimum bolt spacing requirements) which can be accommodated within the depth of the supported beam web.

b. Two-sided shear connections: Double angle and double bent plate connections shall be detailed such that the length of the angles or bent plates is at least 60% of the "T" dimension of the web of the supported beam.

C. Columns: 1. Lifting, Erection, and Safety Devices: The fabricator shall be responsible for designing, detailing and

furnishing all lifting devices and erection aids required for erection. Such devices shall be removed after erection if they interfere with architectural finish requirements.

2.04 SHOP CLEANING AND COATING SYSTEMS A. Reference Division 09 requirements for required cleaning and coating of structural steel. At a minimum all steel

shall be cleaned of oil and grease using solvent cleaners and cleaned of dirt and other foreign material by sweeping with a fiber brush or other suitable means.

B. Uncoated Steel 1. The following items of structural steel shall not be shop coated:

a. Steel that is to receive sprayed fireproofing. b. Faying surfaces of Slip-critical connections, unless prepared and coated in conformance with the

requirements for Slip-critical joints as set forth by the AISC 348. c. Those portions of steel members which are embedded in concrete or mortar. d. Milled contact surfaces, unless the characteristics of the coating are such that the performance of the

milled surface is not affected. e. Surfaces within 2 inches of a field weld, including beam top flanges which are to receive shear

connectors welded through metal decking. 1) Exception: Shop coatings that do not adversely affect weld quality or create objectionable fumes

are permitted on welded surfaces. f. Steel which is not specifically identified elsewhere in the drawings or specifications as requiring a shop

coating. C. Shop Primer Painted Steel

1. Steel identified elsewhere in the drawings or specifications as being required to be shop primer painted, but for which no particular primer is specified, shall receive one coat of Fabricator’s standard rust-inhibitive primer paint applied to a minimum dry-film thickness of 1 mil. a. Cleaning and surface preparation for shop primer painted steel shall conform to the recommendations of

the paint manufacturer and shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of SSPC-SP2. b. Primer shall be withheld from surfaces required to be “uncoated” in paragraph A, above. c. Where shop primer painted surfaces are to receive a finish coating in the field, the shop primer shall be

compatible with the finish coating. D. Steel Requiring a Specified Coating

1. Steel identified elsewhere in the drawings or specifications as being required to receive a specified shop applied coating shall receive the specified coating at the fabrication shop or coating applicator’s facilities prior to shipment to the project site. a. The term “coating” as used herein applies to primers, single coat systems, multi-coat systems and

powder coating. b. Cleaning, surface preparation and application of the coating shall conform to the recommendations of

the coating manufacturer and, if applicable, the coating applicator. c. Coatings shall be withheld from surfaces required to be “uncoated” in paragraph A, above.

2.05 SOURCE QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Shop Inspection and Testing requirements are identical to Field Inspection and Testing requirements but shall be

performed in the fabricator’s shop. See Part 3, Field Quality Assurance, for required inspections and testing.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 VERIFICATION SURVEYS A. The Contractor shall verify the elevation of all bearing surfaces and the correct positioning of anchor rods and

embedded items to which structural steel is attached before erection is commenced. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer and Structural Steel Erection Contractor of any deviations from the Contract Documents or conditions requiring field modification.

B. The Contractor shall survey the work to determine that the location of the steel framing is within specified tolerances. Where floor beams are required to be cambered, Contractor's survey shall include a survey of the elevation of each end and at the mid-span of each beam required to be cambered. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of any deviations from the Contract Documents.

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing any temporary shoring, additional concrete or other work or material which may be required to compensate for in-place camber dimensions not conforming to those indicated on the drawings within specified tolerances.

D. Survey reports shall be provided to the Architect/Engineer and Owner for information within 24 hours after recording the data. Such reports shall, in addition, identify all deviations of member location and/or elevation in excess of allowable tolerances specified.

3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that the work may properly proceed.

3.03 ERECTION A. The work in this section shall be subject to all applicable provisions of the state and local building and safety

codes including OSHA - 29 CFR Part 1926 "Safety Standards for Steel Erection; Final Rule", and all other codes referenced therein.

B. Erect structural steel in accordance with the AISC 303 as modified herein. C. Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads.

Consider all structural steel as non-self-supporting steel frames. Remove temporary members, bracing, and connections when permanent members (including metal deck diaphragms) are in place, final connections are made, and concrete for floor slab has attained 75% of its design strength. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of the structures as erection proceeds. 1. Column base plates have been designed for conditions that exist upon completion of the structure.

Contractor shall verify conformance with OSHA - 29 CFR Part 1926 or assume columns are unstable and require temporary support.

D. Furnish 1/8" minimum steel templates and other devices as necessary for pre-setting bolts and other anchors to accurate locations.

E. Prior to setting base plates and bearing plates, clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean the bottom surface of base and bearing plates. 1. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members and leveling plates level (+

1/32") and at correct elevation (+ 1/16") on steel shims or wedges or other adjustable devices. a. Tighten the anchor bolts after the supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not

remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout.

F. Set structural frames accurately to the lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust the various members forming a part of a complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb the structure within specified AISC 303 tolerances. 2. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on a mean operating temperature of the structure of

70 degrees F. Compensate for the difference in temperature at time of erection. 3. In place tolerance for beam camber shall be as follows:

a. For beams that are 50 ft or less in length; minus 1/4”, plus 1/2". b. For beams greater than 50 ft. in length: minus 1/4”, plus the sum of 1/2" plus 1/8" for each 10 ft of

length or fraction thereof in excess of 50 ft.



G. No cutting or drilling through steel members will be permitted on the jobsite without the written approval of the Architect/Engineer.

H. Do not enlarge improperly located holes in members by burning unless approved by Architect/ Engineer. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts with a drill.

I. Field Connections: Make field connections with bolts, high-strength bolts, or field welding unless otherwise indicated. Clean existing surfaces before welding to existing steel. Make minor corrections by reaming or grinding. Serious defects shall be called to the attention of the Architect/Engineer for a decision as to the method and/or procedure for repair. 1. Compression Splices: Fasten splices in compression after bearing surfaces have been brought into contact.

Clean bearing surfaces before assembling. All gaps 1/16" wide or greater shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer for review.

2. On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes and plug welds, and grind smooth at exposed surfaces.

J. Grouting of column base plates and structural steel bearing members: Install non-shrink grout at fluid consistency per manufacturer's instructions utilizing temporary forms. After initial set, remove forms and trim grout to 45 degrees with bearing surface allows. Finish vertical when edge of bearing surface aligns with edge of steel base plate or bearing member.

K. Install Expansion Anchors and Adhesive Anchors according to manufacturer's recommendations.

3.04 SUPPORT OF OTHER WORK A. No permanent loading shall be imposed on concrete slabs supported by steel composite beams and girders until the

concrete in such slabs has achieved 75 percent of its design strength, without prior approval by the Architect/Engineer.

B. Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to effectively complete the Work. Construction loads shall not exceed the permanent live loads indicated in the load keys

C. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC 303. D. Allow for erection loads, and provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure in safe condition, plumb,

and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. E. Field weld components and shear studs indicated on shop drawings. F. Use carbon steel bolts only for temporary bracing during construction, unless otherwise specifically permitted on

drawings. Install high-strength bolts in accordance with RCSC (HSBOLT) "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts".

G. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect/Engineer. H. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with

concrete. I. Grout solidly between column plates and bearing surfaces, complying with manufacturer's instructions for

nonshrink grout. Trowel grouted surfaces smooth, splaying neatly to 45 degrees.

3.05 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.

3.06 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inspection requirements: The following inspections shall apply to both work performed in the shop or in the field,

unless otherwise noted. 1. General Inspections:

a. Material Conformance: Prior to fabrication or erection, verify plates, rolled shapes, and other materials conform to proper ASTM specification. Review Manufacture’s certified mill test reports or certificates of compliance.

b. Framing: At completion of framing or an area of framing, verify compliance with construction documents, including proper placement of members, braces, stiffeners and proper application of joint details.

2. High-Strength Bolt Inspections: Inspect high strength bolted connections in accordance with AISC 360 N5-6 and AISC 348 Chapter 9 and the following. All bolted connections shall be inspected.



a. For joints requiring SC bolts, inspector shall periodically verify that faying surfaces are properly prepared and clean.

b. For joints requiring SC or PT bolts, when the installer is using the calibrated wrench method or turn of nut method without matchmaking, inspector shall continuously monitor bolt installation procedures and inspect completed assemblies for conformance with AISC 348 specification.

c. For joints requiring SC or PT bolts, when the install is using other approved installation techniques, inspector shall inspect completed assemblies for conformance with AISC 348 specification.

d. For joints with snug-tightened bolts, the inspector shall inspect completed assemblies for conformance with AISC 348 specification

3. Welding Inspections: Inspect welded connections in accordance with AISC 360 N5-4 with procedures, requirements and acceptance criteria in accordance with AWS D1.1 clause 6 and as follows. Except as listed below or noted otherwise on the drawings, acceptance criteria shall be for statically loaded connections. All welds shall be visually inspected. a. Welded connections subject to vibration or cyclic loading, including but not limited to the following,

shall be subject to acceptance criteria for cyclically loaded connections: 1) Column splices and all beam and girder to column connections in multi-story structures over 125

feet in height. B. Testing requirements: The following tests shall apply to both work performed in the shop or in the field, unless

otherwise noted. 1. Material testing:

a. Weld access holes in heavy members: For hot rolled sections with a flange thickness exceeding 2” or built up cross sections consisting of plates exceeding 2” in thickness shall have the surface of the weld access holes prepared to bright metal and tested by dye penetrant or magnetic particle methods. Any crack shall be unacceptable, regardless of location.

2. High-Strength Bolt Testing: a. For joints requiring SC or PT bolts, pre-installation verification testing shall be performed in

accordance with AISC 348 Section 7 for each fastener assembly lot. When the calibrated wrench pretensioning method is utilized, this testing shall be performed daily for each installation wrench.

3. Weld Testing: a. All CJP groove welds shall be tested via UT methods of AWS D1.1. Unless noted otherwise, all CJP

groove welds shall be assumed to be “tension welds” when determining acceptance criteria. See paragraph B.3, preceding, to determination of statically loaded or cyclically loaded welds.

b. All studs (headed, threaded, or otherwise) welded by automatic stud welding shall be tested per AWS D1.1 clause 7, sections 7.7 and 7.8.

END OF SECTION 05 12 00

DIVISION 05 - METALS Metropolitan Foundry Theater P# 1709 SECTION 05 21 00 STEEL JOIST FRAMING

STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05 21 00 - 1

SECTION 05 21 00 - STEEL JOIST FRAMING

PART 1 GENERAL



1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Open web steel joists and shear stud connectors, with bridging, attached seats and anchors. B. Loose bearing members, such as plates or angles, and anchor bolts for site placement. C. Supplementary framing for roof openings greater than 12 inches. D. Design engineering for steel joists.

1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING: Superstructure framing. B. Section 05 31 00 - Steel Decking: Bearing plates and angles. C. Section 05 31 00 - Steel Decking: Support framing for openings less than 12 inches in decking. D. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Non-framing steel fabrications attached to joists. E. Section 07 81 00 - Applied Fireproofing: Fireproof protection of joist framing and metal deck systems.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. SJI-K Standard Specification for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series; Steel Joist Institute. B. SJI-LD/DLH- Standard Specification for Longspan Steel Joists, LH-Series and Deep Longspan Steel Joists, DLH-

Series; Steel Joist Institute. C. SJI-JG- Standard Specification for Joist Girders; Steel Joist Institute. D. ASTM A6/A6M - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates,

Shapes, and Sheet Piling; 2011. E. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014. F. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold Finished; 2013. G. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts; 2007a (Reapproved 2014). H. ASTM F3125/F3125M - Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat

Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength, Inch and Metric Dimensions; 2015a.

I. AWS B2.1/B2.1M - Specification for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification; 2014. J. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015. K. IAS AC172 - Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel; International

Accreditation Service, Inc; 2011. L. SJI 100 - Catalog of Standard Specifications Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders;

2011. M. SJI Technical Digest No. 9 - Handling and Erection of Steel Joists and Joist Girders; 2008. N. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition.

1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate standard designations, joist coding, configurations, sizes, spacings, cambers, locations of

joists, bridging, connections, and attachments as applicable.

1.06 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS A. Welders' Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certificates, certifying welders employed on the Work, verifying

AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of joist and accessory.

Include manufacturer's certification that joists comply with SJI Specifications. Submit manufacturer's data for primer paint indicating compliance with specified formulation and performance.



1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design joists, and connections not detailed on the Drawings, under direct supervision of a Professional Structural

Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. B. Perform Work in accordance with SJI Specifications. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum five

years documented experience. D. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by the International Accreditation Service

(IAS) Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel in accordance with IAS AC172. E. Erector Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum five years

documented experience.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products to SJI requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Canam Group Inc: www.canam-steeljoists.ws. 2. Nucor-Vulcraft Group: www.vulcraft.com.

2.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design Floor Loads: Specified on Drawings. B. Design Roof Loads: Specified on Drawings.

2.03 MATERIALS A. Open Web Joists: Types as indicated on Drawings:

1. Provide top chord extensions as indicated. 2. Minimum End Bearing on Steel Supports: Comply with referenced SJI standard. 3. Minimum End Bearing on Concrete or Masonry Supports: Comply with referenced SJI standard. 4. Finish: Shop primed.

B. High-Strength Structural Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 or ASTM A325M, Type 1, medium carbon, plain, with matching compatible ASTM A563 or ASTM A563M nuts and ASTM F436 washers.

C. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded. D. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: Manufacturer's recommended primer, complying with VOC limitations specified in

Section 01 61 16.

2.04 FABRICATION A. Frame special sized openings in joist web framing as detailed. B. Provide joist chord extensions indicated. Design for minimum load carrying capacity of joists, or as indicated on

Drawings. C. Provide header units to support tail joists at openings in floor or roof system not framed with structural steel

shapes.

2.05 FINISH A. Clean, prepare surfaces, and paint in accordance with SSPC-15 or equivalent with manufactures standard primer.

All joists to be primed unless noted otherwise. Do not prime surfaces that will be fire-proofed or field welded B. Shop prime joists as specified.

1. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field welded, or in contact with concrete. C. Clean and prepare surfaces before priming in accordance with SSPC SP-2, except use SP-6 for members exposed

to view. D. Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer paint at a rate to provide uniform dry film thickness of 1.0

mils. Provide full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.



2.06 SOURCE QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inspect plant operations in accordance with SJI specifications. B. High-Strength Bolts: Provide testing and verification of shop-bolted connections in accordance with RCSC

"Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts", testing at least ?? 20 percent of bolts at each connection.

C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect all shop-welded connections and test at least ?? 20 percent of welds using one of the following: 1. Radiographic testing performed in accordance with ASTM E94. 2. Ultrasonic testing performed in accordance with ASTM E164. 3. Liquid penetrant inspection performed in accordance with ASTM E165/E165M. 4. Magnetic particle inspection performed in accordance with ASTM E709.

D. Shop Inspection: For all joists, examination for straightness and alignment, conformance to length tolerances, fissures, mill scale, and other defects and deformities as described in ASTM A 6/A 6M, and examination of fabricated pieces for conformity with approved shop drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 ERECTION A. Erect joists with correct bearing on supports. B. Allow for erection loads. Provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain framing safe, plumb, and in true

alignment. C. Position and field weld joist chord extensions and wall attachments as detailed. D. Install supplementary framing for roof openings greater than 12 inches. E. Do not permit erection of decking until joists are braced, bridged, and secured or until completion of erection and

installation of permanent bridging and bracing. F. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of joist manufacturer. G. After erection, prime welds, damaged shop primer, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces specified not to

be primed.

3.02 TOLERANCES A. Per AISC 303 and SJI specifications. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch. C. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 40 00 - Quality

Requirements. B. High-Strength Bolts: Provide testing and verification of field-bolted connections in accordance with AISC 360

Chapter N and specification section 052100. C. Field Inspection: Assure that the work conforms to specified requirements, and include:

1. Inspection of field welding. 2. Verification of proper fit and alignment.

D. Welding Inspection: Assure that the work conforms to specified requirements, and include: 1. Verification that electrodes used for manual shielded metal-arc welding and the electrodes and flux used for

submerged arc welding conform to specified requirements. 2. Verification that the approved welding procedure and the approved welding sequence are followed without

deviation, unless specific approval for change is obtained from the Architect/Engineer. 3. Visual inspection on 100 percent of fillet welds.

E. Welded Connections: Visually inspect all field-welded connections and test at least 10 percent of welds using one of the following: 1. Radiographic testing performed in accordance with ASTM E94. 2. Ultrasonic testing performed in accordance with ASTM E164. 3. Liquid penetrant inspection performed in accordance with ASTM E165/E165M. 4. Magnetic particle inspection performed in accordance with ASTM E709.



3.04 CLEANING A. Clean erected steel joist members of field-applied markings, soil, and mud.


DIVISION 05 - METALS Metropolitan Foundry Theater P# 1709 SECTION 05 31 00 STEEL DECKING

STEEL DECKING 05 31 00 - 1

SECTION 05 31 00 - STEEL DECKING

PART 1 GENERAL



1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Steel Roof deck. B. Composite Floor deck.

1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete topping over metal deck. B. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Placement of anchors for bearing plates embedded in unit masonry assemblies. C. Section 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING: Support framing for openings larger than 12 inches and

supply of shear studs. D. Section 05 21 00 - Steel Joist Framing: Support framing for openings larger than 12 inches . E. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Steel angle concrete stops at deck edges. F. Section 07 81 00 - Applied Fireproofing: Spray applied fireproofing.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014. B. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold Finished; 2013. C. ASTM A510/A510M - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Wire Rods and Coarse Round Wire,

Carbon Steel; 2013. D. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-

Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015. E. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength

Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2015.

F. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015. G. AWS D1.3/D1.3M - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel; 2008. H. ICC-ES AC43 - Acceptance Criteria for Steel Deck Roof and Floor Systems; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc; 2010

(R2013). I. ICC-ES AC70 - Acceptance Criteria for Fasteners Power Driven into Concrete, Steel and Masonry Elements; ICC

Evaluation Service, Inc; 2013. J. SDI (DM) - Publication No.30, Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, and Roof Decks; 2007. K. SDI C - Standard for Composite Steel Deck-Slabs; Steel Deck Institute. L. SDI RD - Standard for Steel Roof Deck; Steel Deck Institute. M. SDI T-CD - Test Standard for Composite Steel Deck- Slabs; Steel Deck Institute. N. SDI QA/QC - Standard for Quality Control and Quality Assurance for Installation of Steel Deck; Steel Deck

Institute.

1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck plan, support locations, projections, openings, reinforcement, pertinent details, and

accessories. B. Product Data: Provide deck profile characteristics, dimensions, structural properties, and finishes.

1.06 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS A. Certificates: Certify that products furnished meet or exceed specified requirements. B. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the work, verifying current AWS certification for the type of

weld being performed.



1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in the production of steel deck with a minimum of 5 years of

experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in the installation of steel deck with minimum 5 years of

experience.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage and handling. B. If ground storage is needed, the deck bundles must be stored off the ground, with one end elevated to provide

drainage. Bundles must be protected against condensation with a ventilated waterproof covering. Bundles must be stacked so there is no danger of tipping, sliding, rolling, shifting or material damage. Bundles must be periodically checked for tightness, and retightened as necessary. _______

C. Deck bundles placed on the building frame must be placed near a main supporting beam at a column or wall. In no case are the bundles to be placed on unbolted frames or on unattached and/or unbridged joists. The structural frame must be properly braced to receive the bundles.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 STEEL DECK MATERIALS A. Composite Steel Deck-Slabs

1. Steel for composite steel deck shall meet the requirements of SDI-C and AISI S100. 2. Finish: G60 galvanized unless noted otherwise.

B. Steel Roof Deck 1. Steel for steel roof deck shall meet the requirements of SDI-RD and AISI S 100. 2. Finish: Primed unless noted otherwise.

2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Bearing Plates and Angles: ASTM A36/A36M steel, unfinished. B. Welding Materials: In accordance with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3 as appropriate. C. Fasteners: Stainless steel, self tapping. D. Powder Actuated Mechanical Fasteners: Steel; with knurled shank and forged ballistic point. Comply with

applicable requirements of ICC-ES AC70. 1. Design Requirements: Provide number and type of fasteners that comply with the applicable requirements of

SDI (DM) design method for roof deck and floor deck applications and ICC-ES AC43. 2. Material: Steel; ASTM A510/A510M, Grade 1077 or equivalent.

a. Hardness: Rockwell C 54.5, minimum. b. Tensile Strength: 285 kips per square inch, minimum. c. Shear Strength: 175 kips per square inch, minimum. d. Washers:

1) Steel Bar Joist Framing Applications: 0.472 inch diameter, minimum. 2) Exposed Roof Deck Applications: 0.591 inch diameter, minimum.

e. Corrosion Resistance: 1) Steel Bar Joist Framing Applications: ASTM B633, SC1, Type III zinc electroplate. 2) Exposed Roof Deck Applications: Provide manufacturer's standard stainless steel sealing caps

with bonded neoprene washer over each fastener. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Hilti, Inc.: www.us.hilti.com. b. Simpson Strong-Tie: www.strongtie.com. c. Other approved manufactures: Submit ICC-ES AC43 and AC70 qualification data.

E. Mechanical Fasteners: Steel; hex washer head, self-drilling, self-tapping. 1. Design Requirements for Sidelap Connections: Provide number and type of fasteners that comply with the

applicable requirements of SDI (DM)SDI design method for roof deck and floor deck applications and ICC-ES AC43.



2. Fasteners for Steel Roof Decks Protected with Waterproofing Membrane: ASTM B633, SC1, Type III zinc electroplate.

3. Fasteners for Exposed Steel Roof Deck Application: Manufacturer's standard stainless steel with bonded neoprene washer.

4. Acceptable Products: a. ITW Commercial Construction North America; ITW CCNA-Buildex Teks Select Series:

www.ITWBuildex.com. b. Other approved manufactures: Submit ICC-ES AC43 and AC70 qualification data.

F. Weld Washers: Mild steel, uncoated, 3/4 inch outside diameter, 1/8 inch thick.

2.03 FABRICATED DECK ACCESSORIES A. Sheet steel for accessories shall confirm ASTM A1008 for painted or uncoated steel and ASTM A653 for

galvanized steel. B. Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Metal closure strips, wet concrete stops, cover plates, and ridge/valley plates, 16

gage minimum sheet steel; of profile and size as indicated; finished same as deck. C. Roof Sump Pans: Formed sheet steel, 14 gage, 0.0747 inch minimum thickness, flat bottom, sloped sides,

recessed 1-1/2 inches below roof deck surface, bearing flange 3 inches wide, sealed watertight.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine support framing and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and

other conditions affecting performance of work of this section. B. All OSHA rules for erection must be followed.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Place deck and accessories in accordance with approved installation drawings. B. Do not place deck panels on partially cured concrete support structures without permission of the designer (as

defined in ANSI/SDI C-2011). C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of support members.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF METAL DECK A. Erect metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual and manufacturer's instructions. Align and level. B. On concrete and masonry surfaces provide minimum 4 inch bearing, unless otherwise specified on Drawings. C. On steel supports provide minimum 3 inch bearing, unless otherwise specified on Drawings. D. Fasten deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports at center-to-center spacing as indicated on

Drawings, parallel with the deck flute and at each transverse flute using methods specified. E. Drive mechanical sidelap connectors completely through adjacent lapped sheets; positively engage adjacent sheets

with minimum three-thread penetration. F. At welded male/female side laps weld at center-to-center spacing as indicated on Drawings. G. Weld deck in accordance with AWS D1.3/D1.3M. H. At deck openings from 6 inches to 12 inches in size, provide 2 x 2 x 1/4 inch steel angle reinforcement. Place

angles perpendicular to flutes; extend minimum two flutes beyond each side of opening and fusion weld to deck at each flute.

I. At deck openings greater than 18 inches in size, provide steel angle reinforcement. as specified in Section 05 12 00.

J. Where deck (other than cellular deck electrical raceway) changes direction, install 6 inch minimum wide sheet steel cover plates, of same thickness as deck. Fasten 12 inches on center maximum.

K. At floor edges, unless perimeter edge angles are detailed, install concrete stops upturned to top surface of slab, to contain wet concrete. Provide stops of sufficient strength to remain stationary without distortion.

L. Position roof drain pans with flange bearing on top surface of deck. Fusion weld at each deck flute. M. Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position, coat welds, burned areas, and damaged

surface coating, with touch-up primer.



3.04 REPAIRS A. Before concrete placement or roof insulation, the deck shall be inspected for tears, dents, or other damage that may

prevent the deck from acting as a tight and substantial form. The need for the repair or temporary shoring of the damaged deck shall be determined by the Architect or Engineer of Record based on structural performance, unless aesthetics have been specifically addressed in the contract documents.

3.05 CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES A. Do not use deck units as a working platform or storage area until units are in position and permanently attached to

the structure. B. Construction loads must not exceed load carrying capacity of the deck.

3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND ASSURANCE A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 40 00. B. Perform field quality control and assurance in accordance with SDI-QA/QC and AISC 360 Chapter N. C. Visually inspect all steel decking to verify that all materials are in acceptable condition and have been properly

installed as specified. D. Visually inspect deck welds prior to being covered by other work.


COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00 - 1

DIVISION 05 – METALS Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING . PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on standard framing members; describe materials and finish, product criteria,

limitations. 1. Provide manufacturer's data on factory-made framing connectors, showing compliance with

requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate component details, framed openings, bearing, anchorage, welds, and type and

location of fasteners, and accessories or items required of related work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FRAMING SYSTEM A. Provide primary and secondary framing members, bridging, bracing, plates, gussets, clips, fittings,

reinforcement, and fastenings as required to provide a complete framing system. B. Design Criteria: Provide completed framing system having the following characteristics:

1. General member design is shown on the structural drawings for the exterior stud framing. Cold-formed steel framing not shown on structural drawings or deviations from the structural drawings shall be designed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the state where the project is located. a. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and erect to withstand specified design loads

for project conditions within required limits. b. Design Loads: In accordance with applicable codes and as specified on structural Drawings. c. Live load deflection meeting the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1) Soffits and Horizontal Assemblies: Maximum vertical deflection under live load of L/360 of span.

2) Exterior Walls: Maximum horizontal deflection under wind load of L/600 for support of masonry veneer, L/240 for support of metal panel and L/360 for other cladding; where L = wall clear height span.

3) Design non-axial loadbearing framing to accommodate not less than 1 in vertical deflection.

2.02 FRAMING MATERIALS A. Studs and Track: ASTM C955; studs formed to channel, "C", or "Sigma" shape with punched web; U-shaped

track in matching nominal width and compatible height. 1. Member Size: As indicated on the Drawings. 2. Stud Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, G90/Z275 coating.

B. Joists and Purlins: Fabricated from ASTM A653/A653M steel sheet, with G90/Z275 hot dipped galvanized coating. 1. Gage and Depth: As indicated on the Drawings.

2.03 WALL SHEATHING A. Wall Sheathing: 5/8” DensGlass.

2.04 FASTENERS A. Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Hot dip galvanized per ASTM A153/A153M. B. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from

corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00 - 2

C. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

D. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION A. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks

to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF STUDS A. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General

Provisions", ASTM C1007 requirements, and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing, torch cutting is not permitted. 2. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding or screw fastening. Wire tying of framing

members is not permitted. 3. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and

methods used in correcting welding work. C. Align floor and ceiling tracks accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends, and at spacings as follows:

1. Anchor Spacing: As shown on Shop Drawings. D. Place studs at spacing indicated or as required to achieve specified design requirements not more than 2

inches from abutting walls, and at all sides of openings. Connect studs to tracks using fastener or welding method.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF JOISTS AND PURLINS A. Install framing components in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.

END OF SECTION 05 40 00 – COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 1

DIVISION 05 - METALS Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P# 1709 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Welders: AWS certified.

1.02 REFERENCES A. Metal Fabrication Work: Comply with AISC Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection

of Structural Steel for Buildings. B. Exposed Metal Fabrication Work: Comply with Section 10 Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel

of AISC Code of Standard Practice. C. Welding: Comply with AWS Structural Welding Code - Steel D1.1.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication, assembly and installation including templates for anchor

bolt placement and submit in accordance with Division 01– General Requirements. B. Samples: Submit powder coat finish samples for Architect’s selection. C. Submit certification by Fabricator that handrails and guardrails have been designed by a Structural

Engineer licensed in the state of Colorado, and that the completed handrail installation conforms to ASTM E985 for structural performance base on testing performed in accordance with ASTM E894 and E935.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Material to be Installed by Others: Deliver anchor bolts and other anchorage devices which are embedded in cast-in-place concrete construction or masonry construction to the project site in time to be installed before the start of cast-in-place concrete or masonry work. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for the installation of anchor bolts and other devices. All delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. General: For work exposed to view, use materials selected for their smoothness and freedom from surface blemishes.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36. C. Steel Bar Grating: ASTM A569 or A36. D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B, or ASTM A501. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, type and grade as required for design loading (if applicable), black finish

unless galvanizing indicated; standard weight Schedule 40 unless otherwise indicated. F. Pipe Bollards: Schedule 80 galvanized steel pipe sections for filling with concrete. G. Gray-Iron Castings: ASTM A48, Class 30. H. Malleable-Iron Castings: ASTM A47. J. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type as indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either galvanized

ferrous castings, malleable iron, coast steel; with steel bolts, washers and shims; hot-dip galvanized. K. Non-Shrink Grout: Refer to Section 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing. L. Fasteners: Provide bolts, nuts, lag bolts, machine screws, wood screws, toggle bolts, masonry

anchorage devices, lock washers as required for application indicated and complying with applicable Federal standards. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners for exterior applications to comply with ASTM A153.

M. Shop Painting: Apply shop primer to surface of metal fabrications except those embedded in concrete or galvanized; comply with SSPC-PA1 and requirements indicated below:

1. Shop Primer: Fabricator’s standard, fast-curing, lead-free, “universal” primer complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-645.

2. Stripe paint edges, corners, crevices, bolts, welds and sharp edges. 3. All interior ferrous metals shall be prime painted, unless noted otherwise.

N. Galvanizing 1. ASTM A386 for assembled products. 2. All exterior ferrous metal shall be galvanized for painted finish, except for lintels, which shall

be prime painted.

METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 2

3. ASTM A123 for rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strips 1/8” and thicker.

4. Galvanizing repair paint: MIL-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint-20, Type I Inorganic.

2.02 FABRICATION A. General

1. Use materials of size and thickness shown, or if not shown, of required size, grade and thickness to produce strength and durability in finished product. Shop-paint all items not specified to be galvanized after fabrication. a. Weld corners and seams continuously; grind exposed welds smooth and flush. b. Form exposed connections with hairline, flush joints; use concealed fasteners where

possible. B. Rough Hardware

1. Furnish custom-fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes for framing and supporting and anchoring woodwork.

C. Ladders 1. Fabricate ladders for locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, and anchorages as

indicated. Comply with requirements of ANSI A14.3 and OSHA Title 29, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Loose Bearing Plates 1. Provide for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete, as indicated. Drill plates to receive

anchor bolts. E. Loose Steel Lintels: Galvanize and fabricate to sizes indicated on Architectural and Structural

Drawings. F. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports

1. Provide as required to complete Work and not included with structural steel framework. Fabricate of welded construction in as large units as possible; drill and tap as required to receive hardware and similar items. Include required anchors for building into other Work; spaced not more than 24” O.C.

G. Miscellaneous Steel Trim 1. Fabricate to shapes and sizes as required for profiles shown; continuous welded joints and

smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices wherever possible. 2. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages; coordinate assembly and installation with other

Work. H. Steel Pipe Railings

1. Fabricate to dimensions shown, or as required by Code, with smooth bends and welded joints using 1 1/4” diameter steel pipe, unless otherwise indicated. Secure posts and rail ends as indicated. Fabricate as detailed to comply with ADA and ICC/ANSI A117.1 accessibility requirements.

2. Open pipe ends are not allowed above floor elevation. Ends shall be closed cleanly with flat plates where terminating against walls. Where not terminating against walls, ends shall be domed.

3. Steel pipe railings shall be powder coat finished. Architect to select color from standard samples submitted by General Contractor/Fabricator. Selected color may vary by location.

J. Exterior railing, custom door pulls and plates, interior wainscot and trim, lamp based, table legs, etc. using decorative channels, angles, plates and rivet heads as illustrated by the Interior Design Drawings – wipe with liquid gun blue finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation; set Work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, measured from established lines and levels. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for installation to other Work.

B. Set loose items on cleaned bearing surfaces, using wedges or other adjustments as required. Solidly pack open spaces with commercial non-shrink grout material.

3.02 TOUCH-UP

A. Touch-up shop paint after installation. Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas, and apply same type paint as used in shop. Use galvanizing repair paint on damaged galvanized surfaces.

END OF SECTION 05 50 00 – METAL FABRICATIONS

END OF DIVISION 05 - METALS

ASPHALTIC DAMPPROOFING 07 11 00 - 1

DIVISION 07-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 07 11 00 ASPHALTIC DAMPPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish and install asphaltic dampproofing and membrane system as shown on Drawings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit copies of Manufacturer’s literature for all products furnished. 1.05 WARRANTY

A. Completed installation shall be warranted jointly by the Manufacturer and Applicator against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three (3) years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DAMPPROOFING

A. Dampproofing shall be cold-applied, emulsified asphalt coating applied to all concrete surfaces that will be in contact with earth or backfill.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. The Waterproofing Applicator shall inspect preceding Work before starting application and shall report all unsatisfactory conditions.

B. Concrete surface shall be substantially cured, dry, clean, smooth, and free from projections and holes. 3.02 PREPARATION

A. Concrete Surfaces 1. Remove loose material on the surface, grease, oil and other contaminants. Surfaces shall be

clear water washed. B. Expansion, Control, and Construction Joints: Fill with sealant and backer rod. C. Cracks: Rout or sawcut cracks exceeding 1/16” in width and fill with sealant. D. Protect adjacent surfaces, not to receive coating, from overspray.

3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply dampproofing material with approved spray equipment.

3.04 CLEANING A. Clean stains from adjacent surfaces.

END OF SECTION 07 11 00 - ASPHALTIC DAMPPROOFING

LIQUID WATER REPELLANT 07 19 00 - 1

DIVISION 07-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 07 19 00 LIQUID WATER REPELLANT PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Apply to all surfaces of brick or masonry exposed to weather. 1.02 TEST AREA

A. Test a minimum 4 ft. by 4 ft. area on each type of masonry. Use the Manufacturer’s application instructions.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit copies of Manufacturer’s literature for all products. B. Submit in accordance with Division 1 – General Requirements.


A. Manufacturer’s representative must visit the site prior to installation and review existing surface conditions and installation procedures with applicators.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL

A. Water repellant shall be SureKlean WeatherSeal H-40 by PROSOCO, Inc. B. Substitutions permitted only after documentation per Division 01 – General Requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION

A. Before applying, read “Protect” and “Precautionary Measures” sections in the Manufacturer’s Product Data Sheet.

3.02 VERTICAL APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS

A. Apply “wet-on-wet”. B. Spray from the bottom up, creating a 6” to 8”. C. Let the first application penetrate for 5-10 minutes. Re-saturate.

3.03 DENSE SURFACES

A. Apply enough product in a single coat to completely wet the surface without creating drips, puddles or rundown.

END OF SECTION 07 19 00 - LIQUID WATER REPELLANT

BUILDING INSULATION 07 21 00 - 1

DIVISION 07-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 07 21 00 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Furnish and install blanket insulation at all exterior framed walls and in double demising walls. B. Refer to Section 07 53 00, Single-Ply Membrane Roofing for roof insulation at “Flat” roof locations.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data for each form and type of insulation indicated in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements.


A. Provide insulation blankets in sizes to fit applications indicated. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Sound Attentuation Insulation/Blanket Insulation 1. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. 2. Certaineed Corp. 3. Approved Substitute.

B. Roof Rigid Insulation, recover board and associated products, accessories and systems from a single manufacturer. 1. Carlisle. 2. Firestone. 3. Atlas. 4. Approved Substitute.

2.03 MATERIALS A. Rigid Insulation: Thicknesses shown x 24” wide polystyrene. B. Sound Attenuation Insulation: Owens-Corning unfaced batt insulation. C. Blanket Insulation: Owen-Corning unfaced thermal batt insulation. D. Sill Sealer: Owens Corning 7-1/2” at all exterior framed walls. E. Rigid Roof Insulation: Provide polyisocyanurate and tapered polyisocyanurate boards. F. Vapor Barrier: Clear, 6 Mil thick Clear Polyethylene. G. Cast Iron lateral Roof Drain Leaders: Owen-Corning unfaced thermal batt insulation.


A. General 1. Comply with insulation Manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Support insulation units by adhesive or mechanical anchorage.

B. Thermal and Sound Attenuation Fiberglass Batt Insulation 1. Install in framed partitions. 2. Friction fit tight to adjoining Work and adjoining insulation for a tight enclosure free from open

joints, holes, cracks and voids. C. Rigid Roofing Insulation: Apply in thicknesses as indicated on Drawing.

END OF SECTION 07 21 00 - BUILDING INSULATION

AIR BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 1

DIVISION 07-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 07 25 00 AIR BARRIERS PART 1 – GENERAL: NOTE: This Section applies only to enclosed conditioned spaces for this Project. 1.01 SUBMITTALS:

A. General: Submit each item in this Article in accordance to the conditions of the Contract and Division 01 General Requirements.

B. Product Data: Submit product specifications, technical data and installation instructions of Manufacturer equaling or exceeding those specified.


A. Installation shall be in accordance with Manufacturer’s installation guidelines and recommendations. B. Provide weather barrier system and accessories produced by single manufacturer. C. Provide Manufacturer’s executed 10-year (ten year) warranty form.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. Tyvek/DuPont, Wilmington, DE 1.800.44.TYVEK. 2. Approved Substitute.

2.02 MATERIALS A. Tyvek ThermaWrap: Spunbonded olefin, non-woven, non-perforated weather resistant barrier.

2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Seam Tape: 3” wide DuPont Tyvek Metalized Tape. B. Fasteners:

1. At wood construction. 2. At steel framing construction. 3. At masonry construction.

C. Sealants: As recommended by the weather barrier Manufacturer. D. Adhesives: As recommended by weather barrier Manufacturer.


A. Install air barrier over exterior side of exterior wall sheathing. B. Flashing C. Opening Preparation

1. Cut weather barrier in a modified “I-cut” pattern. 2. Cut a head flap at 45-degree angle in the weather barrier at window head sheathing.

D. Protect materials and work in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements.

END OF SECTION 07 25 00 - AIR BARRIERS

THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 54 00 - 1

DIVISION 07-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 07 54 00 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The Scope of Work consists of installing a Fully Adhered .060 thick membrane Roofing System over acceptable insulation and recovery boards after verification of suitable substrate as specified in this specification.

1.02 EXTENT OF WORK A. The work to be performed under this specification shall include but is not limited to the following:

furnish all competent supervision, experienced labor, materials, tools and equipment required or necessary in accordance with this specification and applied in strict compliance with the Manufacturer’s latest published specifications and written application instructions of the materials being installed.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. Firestone Thermoplastic TPO Application Guide or similar document from other Approved Manufacturer.

B. National Roofing Contractors Association - NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. C. U.S. Army Corp of Engineering Cold Regions Research and Engineering Laboratory (CRREL)

Guidelines for Vapor Barriers. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to starting work, the applicator must submit the following: 1. Shop drawings showing layout, details of construction and identification of materials in

accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals. 2. Sample of the Manufacturer’s roofing system and membrane material warranties. 3. Submit a letter of certification from the Manufacturer which certifies the contractor is authorized

to install the Manufacturer’s roofing system and lists foremen who have received training from the Manufacturer along with the dates training was received.

B. Upon completion, submit copies of the Manufacturer’s inspection to the Architect upon completion of the installed work, prior to the issuance of the Manufacturer’s warranty.

1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the job site in the Manufacturer’s original, unopened containers or wrappings with

the Manufacturer’s name, brand name and installation instructions intact and legible. Deliver in sufficient quantity to permit work to continue without interruption. All delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements.

B. Comply with the Manufacturer’s written instructions for proper material storage. 1. Store materials, except membrane, between 60°F and 80°F in dry areas protected from water and

direct sunlight. If exposed to lower temperature, restore to 60°F minimum temperature before using.

2. Store materials containing solvents in dry, well ventilated spaces with proper fire and safety precautions. Keep lids on tight. Use before expiration of their shelf life.

C. Insulation and recovery board must be on pallets, off the ground and tightly covered with waterproof materials.

D. Any materials which are found to be damaged or stored in any manner other than as outlined above shall be automatically rejected and shall be removed and replaced at the contractor’s expense.

1.06 WORK SEQUENCE A. Schedule and execute work to prevent leaks. Care should be exercised to provide protection for the

interior of the building and to ensure water does not flow beneath any completed sections of the membrane system.

1.07 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Job Site Considerations 1. All safety regulations required by OSHA and other agencies having jurisdiction must be

followed. 2. During the construction process, the Roofing Contractor is responsible for ensuring that all

components of the membrane roof system, including the finished areas are protected from damage, including, but not limited to:


a. Damage that may result from the continued construction process; b. Direct contact with continuous steam or heat sources when the in-service temperature

is in excess of 106º F; c. Asphalt, coal tar, oil base or plastic roof cements, and re-saturated roof products,

which are not to be used in direct contact with the waterproofing components of the membrane roofing systems;

d. Discharges, such as petroleum products, greases, oils (mineral and vegetable), animal fats and other byproducts, which may come in contact with the membrane.

3. Refer to Manufacturer’s technical information sheet for recommended guidelines for working on an occupied building for specific guidelines when installing adhesives or asphalt products on an occupied building.

4. Cold Weather Application a. When the outside temperature is below 40º F, installation of membrane roof systems

may require additional application precautions: 1) For a minimum of 24 hours before installation, adhesives and sealants should

remain in an environment between 60º F and 80º F. 2) Materials should be used with four (4) hours of removal from a heated

storage area. If materials are not used within that time period, they should be returned to the heated storage area until the temperature of the material returns to the temperature of the heated storage area. Typically, this is twenty-four (24) hours.

1.08 JOB SITE PROTECTION A. Protect paved areas and building elements from damage and staining; provide canvas, boards and sheet

metal (properly secured) as necessary. At completion, remove protection material and return damaged elements to their original conditions.

B. Take precautions to prevent the spread of dust and debris, particularly where such material may sift into the building. Give ample notice to the Tenant’s representative so building contents can be protected. Provide temporary cloth filters on air intake openings upon General Contractor’s approval.

C. Do not overload any portion of the building, either by use of or placement of equipment, storage of debris or storage of materials.

D. Protect against fire and flame spread. Maintain proper and adequate fire extinguishers. E. Take precautions to prevent drains from clogging during execution of this contract. Remove debris at the

completion of each day’s work and clean drains, if required. At completion, test drains to ensure the system is free running and drains are watertight. Remove strainers and plug drains in areas where work is in progress. Install flags or other telltales on plugs. Remove plugs each night and screen drain.

F. Store moisture susceptible materials above ground and protect with waterproof coverings. G. Remove all traces of piled bulk materials and return the job site to its original condition. 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The roofing membrane, adhesives and sealants must be manufactured in the United States by the

Manufacturer of the roofing system. B. The Manufacturer must have a minimum of ten (10) years experience in the manufacturing of

thermoplastic sheeting. C. Unless otherwise noted in this specification, the contractor must strictly comply with the Manufacturer’s

specifications and details. D. All work under this section shall be performed by a single firm with a minimum of three (3) years

experience in the installation of single-ply roofing and shall be an applicator authorized and trained by the Manufacturer for that period of time. In addition, the contractor shall have at least ten (10) installations similar to the one specified with base Manufacturer and must have had key personnel attend a quality control seminar in the last twelve (12) months.

E. Provide adequate number of experienced workmen regularly engaged in this type of work who are skilled in the application techniques of the materials specified. Provide at least one thoroughly trained and experienced superintendent on the job at all times roofing work is in progress.

F. Inspection: Upon completion of the installation, the applicator shall arrange for an inspection to be made by a non-sales technical representative of the membrane Manufacturer in order to determine whether or not corrective work will be required before the warranty will be issued. Notify the building GC twenty-four (24) hours prior to Manufacturer’s final inspection.

G. There shall be no deviations made from this specification or the approved shop drawings without the prior written approval of the Architect. Any deviation from the Manufacturer’s installation procedures must be supported by a written certification on the Manufacturer’s letterhead and presented for the Architect’s consideration.


1.10 WARRANTY A. After final approval of the work, the Manufacturer’s Twenty (20) Year labor and materials warranty shall

be issued. System shall be bid to include any enhancements necessary to provide the specified warranty considering local wind conditions and greater than 10% wall openings condition.

1. All products used in the roofing assembly must be supplied and warranted by the same Manufacturer.

2. Pro-rated warranties shall not be accepted. Warranty samples are required as part of the bid package.

3. Manufacturer warranties must cover labor and material without monetary limitation and shall be transferable.

B. Provide a warranty signed by the Manufacturer and backed by a certifiable warranty pool agreeing to replace/repair defective materials and workmanship for the term of the warranty stipulated above.

1.11 INCREASED WIND SPEED A. Wind speed for this Project exceeds 55 mph. Project must be reviewed by Manufacturer’s Roof Systems

Advisor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. All components are to be products manufactured and supplied by: 1. Firestone Building Products, Firestone Roofing System Solutions Group 2. Approved Substitute B. Unless otherwise specified, all products (including membranes, insulation, fasteners, fastening plates,

and edgings) must be manufactured and supplied by the primary roofing system Manufacturer and covered by the warranty.

2.02 MEMBRANE A. Firestone UltraPly ReflexEON TPO Membrane or Approved Substitute. B. Properties: 1. Fleece Backed 2. Thickness: 0.060” 3. Color: White C. Seams: 1.5” single weld system . 2.03 COVER BOARD: Provide Georgia-Pacific DensDeck or Approved Substitute. 1/2" recovery board

to be installed for hail protection in a single layer adhered over roof insulation. 2.04 ROOF INSULATION A. Insulation: ISO 95+ Polyisocyanurate B. Thickness: Layered in two or more layers to achieve min 6” total thickness. C. Attachment: 1. Primary means of Attachment: Insulation may be mechanically fastened over most of the

roof area. 2. Over the wash bays and for five feet beyond to the east, the first layer of insulation may be

mechanically fastened with additional layers fully adhered above vapor retarder. 2.05 VAPOR RETARDER A. Material: 6 mil polyethylene sheeting. 1. Lapped and fully taped at joints. 2. Fully taped at installation perimeter. 3. Fully taped to penetrating pipes or other items at penetrations. B. Horizontal Location: A vapor retarder shall be installed over the wash bays and minimum 5’-0”

beyond. C. Vertical Location: It is recommended that the Vapor Retarder be installed (fully adhered) above the

first layer of mechanically fastened rigid insulation, and that following layer(s) on insulation be fully adhered above the vapor retarder. However, the Manufacturer shall confirm the location within the assembly to prevent condensation and to meet warranty requirements.

D. Criteria: Vapor Retarder shall comply with the U.S. Army Corp of Engineering Cold Regions Research and Engineering Laboratory (CRREL) guidelines.

2.06 AIR BARRIER A. Where Required: At highest roof plane only, if required by the Manufacturer to meet warranty

considering that this building has large wall openings exceeding 10% of the wall area that may be left


open during a storm. B. Criteria: 1. Air Permeability: Not exceeding 0.004 cfm/sf under a pressure differential of 0.3” water. 2. Continuity: The components must be linked together to insure that there is no break in the air

tightness of the envelope. 3. Structural Integrity: The air barrier must be capable of resting the imposed pressure and

suction wind loads 4. Durability: The air barrier must be suitable for the environmental conditions and compatible

with other installed materials. C. Certification: Manufacturer to submit letter of certification that installed components interface

together to provide the requirements above. 2.07 FASTENERS AND PLATES A. Firestone Heavy Duty or Heavy Duty Plus or Approved Substitute. B. Base layer of roof insulation is to be mechanically fastened to roof deck. C. Follow Manufacturer's recommendations for locations, spacing, etc. 2.08 TAPERED INSULATION A. Sections, profiles and thicknesses as required to provide positive slope toward roof drains as

illustrated on the Architectural Roof Plan. Materials shall be completely compatible with other specified and submitted materials and shall be installed per membrane Manufacturer's recommendations.

2.09 ADHESIVES A. Firestone ISO Adhesive or Approved Substitute for spray-applied full application. 2.10 ROOF WALKWAYS A. Manufacturer's standard roof traffic system installed per Manufacturer's recommendations around all

roof top equipment and as illustrated on the Architectural Roof Plan. 2.11 OTHER MATERIALS

A. Treated wood nailers, membrane flashing, metal flashing (if required) and miscellaneous items and accessories needed to fulfill the Project requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Comply with the Manufacturer’s published instructions for the installation of the membrane roofing

system including proper substrate preparation, job site considerations and weather restrictions. B. Use the largest membrane sheet possible to minimize seams. Position sheets to accommodate contours

of the roof deck and tile splices to avoid bucking water. C. Refer to Manufactured Fully Adhered Roofing System published specification for typical installation

procedures. 3.02 SUBSTRATE INSPECTION

A. Proper selection is needed to ensure adequate penetration of the mechanical fasteners through the top flues of the steel deck and to verify the length of the fastener. Penetration of the fasteners shall be a minimum of 3/4 inch into the steel roof deck.

3.03 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION

A. Defects in the existing roofing system must be reported and documented to the Architect, General Contractor or the building Owner for assessment. The Installer shall not proceed with the installation unless the defects are corrected. 1. The existing substrate must be relatively even without noticeable high spots or depressions.

Accumulated water, ice or snow must be removed to prevent the absorption of moisture in the new roofing components and roofing system.

2. Prior to the placement of membrane underlayment, clear the substrate of debris and foreign material which may be detrimental to the roofing system.

3.04 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Install insulation or membrane underlayment over the substrate with boards butted tightly together and

with no joints or gaps greater than 1/4 inch. Stagger joints both north-south and east-west where multiple layers are provided.


B. The first layer of insulation shall be mechanically fastened in accordance with the Manufacturer’s specifications.

C. Additional layers of insulation shall be mechanically fastened or fully adhered in accordance with the Manufacturer’s specifications.

D. Above vapor retarder, insulation shall be fully adhered. 3.05 RECOVERY BOARD

A. Install recovery board with tight joints staggered from insulation joints. B. Fully adhere recovery board to insulation below in accordance with Manufacturer’s

specifications.

3.06 MEMBRANE PLACEMENT AND BONDING A. Unroll, unfold and position membrane without stretching. Allow the membrane to relax for

approximately 1/2 hour before bonding. Fold the sheet back onto itself so that one half of the underside of the membrane is exposed.

B. Apply Bonding Adhesive in accordance with the Manufacturer’s published instructions, to both the underside of the membrane and the substrate. Achieve 100% coverage of both surfaces. Allow the adhesive to dry until it is tacky but will not string or stick to a dry finger touch.

1. Roll the coated membrane into the coated substrate while avoiding wrinkles. Brush down the bonded half of the membrane sheet with a soft bristle push broom to achieve maximum contact.

2. Fold back the unbonded half of the membrane sheet and repeat the bonding procedure. C. Install adjoining membrane sheets in the same manner, overlapping edges approximately four inches (4”)

Do not apply Bonding Adhesive to the splice area. 3.07 MEMBRANE SPLICING A. Wall Terminations

1. Firestone Termination Bar with AP Sealant applied along the caulk lip. Surface mounted or inserted counter flashing may also be used in accordance with current Firestone details.

B. Curb and Wall Flashings 1. Curbs, walls and expansion joints must be anchored with appropriate base tie-in detail, either

using seam plates and fasteners or using UltraPly QuickSeam Reinforced Perimeter Fastening (RPF) Strip and Batten Strip or two (2”) inch Metal Seam Paltes. Curbs and walls must be flashed using minimum 0.045” UltraPly TPO Membrane or UltraPly TPO 18” Curb Flashing. Flashings may be sealed with welded details or QuickSeam products when acceptable. Details may include UltraPly TPO Coated Metal.

C. Corners 1. UltraPly TPO Inside/Outside Corners or UltraPly QuickSeam Corner Flashing.

D. Roof Edges/Parapets 1. Firestone AnchorGard or EdgeGard Fascia or Drain Bar systems. ANSI/SPRI ES-1 rated edge

metal may also be used / Firestone Coping System or UltraPly TPO Coated Metal. E. Penetrations

1. Flash with UltraPly QuickSeam or UltraPly Pipe Flashing (weldable), UltraPly TPO Penetration Pocket, or field fabricate with UltraPly TPO Unsupported Flashing.

3.08 WALKWAYS A. Install walkways at all traffic concentration points (such as roof hatches, access doors, rooftop ladders,

etc.) and all locations as identified on the project drawing. B. Adhere walkways 100% to the membrane in accordance with the Manufacturer’s specifications. 3.09 DAILY SEAL A. On phased roofing, when the completion of flashings and terminations is not completed by the end of the

work day, a daily seal must be completed to temporarily close the membrane to prevent water infiltration. B. Use membrane sealer in accordance with the Manufacturer’s requirements. 3.10 CLEAN UP A. Perform daily clean-up and remove from the site (in a legally acceptable manner) all wrappings, empty

containers, paper, and other debris in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 70 00 Contract Closeout.

B. Prior to the Manufacturer’s inspection for warranty, the applicator must perform a pre-inspection to review all work and to verify all flashing has been completed as well as the application of all caulking.

END OF SECTION 07 54 00 - THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING

FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 60 00 - 1

DIVISION 07-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 07 60 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Work Included 1. Flashing, Sheet Metal and Scuppers. 2. Parapet Caps and Fascia. 3. Metal Fascias.

1.02 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Fabricated Sheet Metal, General. 1. Conform to profiles and sizes shown, and comply with “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” by

SMACNA.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide samples in accordance with Division 01-General Requirements.

1.04 WARRANTIES

A. All Work: A one (1) year weathertightness guarantee is required.

1.05 DELIVERY A. Delivery of material shall be made only after suitable facilities for its storage and protection are

available on the site. 1.06 STORAGE

A. Store materials out of the weather, in a clean, dry place.


A. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526, 0.20% copper, 22 or 26 gauge as noted; ASTM A 525, designation G90 hot-dip galvanized, mill phosphatized.

B. Parapet Caps and Fascia: Provide prefinished caps at flat roof parapet walls and fascia at canopy overhang areas. Provide color samples for Architect’s selection prior to ordering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONNECTING WORK

A. The applicator shall examine surfaces on which his work is to be applied, and shall notify the Architect in writing if not suitable to receive his work.

3.02 INSTALLATION:

A. Flashing and Sheet Metal 1. Anchor work in place with noncorrosive fasteners, adhesives, setting compounds, tapes and

other materials and devices as recommended by Manufacturer. B. Seal moving joints in metal work with elastomeric sealants. C. Clean metal surfaces of soldering flux and other substances.

3.03 CLEANUP A. Leave work areas clean, free from grease, finger marks and stains. B. Clean up in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements.

3.04 PERFORMANCE

A. Water-tight/weatherproof performance of flashing and sheet metal work is required.

END OF SECTION 07 60 00 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL

ROOF HATCHES 07 72 33 - 1

DIVISION 07-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 07 72 33 ROOF HATCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work Included

1. Prefabricated roof hatch, complete with integral support curb, operable hardware and counterflashings.

2. Fixed railing system attached to hatch support curb. 3. Coordinate with installation of roofing and related metal flashings.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements. 1.03 WARRANTY A. One Year (1) warranty on all parts. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer and Type: S20 hatch as manufactured by Bilco or Approved Substitute. 2.02 ROOF HATCHES

A. Size/Construction: 2’6” x 3’0” size, leaf type. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install roof hatches in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations.

END OF SECTION 07 72 33 - ROOF HATCHES

FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00 - 1

DIVISION 07-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Furnish and install firestopping in conjunction with fire safing at all void spaces at top of fire-rated walls and partitions.

B. Provide and install firestopping materials per the Manufacturer’s recommendations. 1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Material Standards (ASTM). B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL). C. UL Fire Resistance Directory.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. All submittals shall be in accordance with Division 01, General Requirements. B. Submit Manufacturer’s product literature for each type of firestop material to be installed. C. Submit Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each firestop product. D. Upon Completion, Installer to submit certification that materials were installed per Manufacturer’s

instructions and details. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fireproofing Systems (Materials and Design) 1. Shall conform to both Flame (F) and Temperature (T) ratings as required by code.

B. Installation shall be in conformance with Manufacturer’s instructions. 1.05 SEQUENCING

A. Firestop installation shall precede gypsum board finishing except in the case of auditorium demising walls. B. Inspection of firestopping shall precede concealment by other materials.

1.06 PROTECTION

A. Take necessary steps to prevent damage to firestopping by other construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL

A. Architect must approve in writing any substitutes to both materials specified herein and system designs shown on the Drawings.

B. Intumescent materials are required where combustible penetrants are involved. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer to be one of the following: 1. Specified Technologies Inc. (STI) 2. 3M 3. Approved Substitute.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Intumescent Firestop Sealants and Caulks: STI SpecSeal SSS100. B. Latex Firestop Sealance: LC150 Sealant. C. Accessories as per Manufacturer’s recommendations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONDITIONS REQUIRING FIRESTOPPING

A. General: The following locations require firestopping whether shown on the Drawings or not: 1. Through Penetrations. 2. Membrane Penetrations. 3. Construction Joints and Gaps. 4. Other locations where smoke stopping is required by code. 5. Why was the fireplace thrown out of art class? 6. Because it wasn’t drawing very well.

FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00 - 2

3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that construction conditions are safe and suitable for installation per Manufacturer’s

recommendations. 3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Installation shall be in conformance with the Manufacturer’s instructions and details and in conformance with listed UL systems.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Remove spilled and excess materials adjacent to firestops without damaging adjacent surfaces. B. Leave finished work in neat, clean condition.

3.05 INSTRUCTIONS

A. Instruct Owner as to location, appearance, purpose of, and general process of handing firestop pillows.

END OF SECTION 07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING

CONSTRUCTION FIRESAFING 07 84 56 - 1

DIVISION 07-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 07 84 56 CONSTRUCTION FIRESAFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Furnish and install firesafing in conjunction with firestopping at all void spaces at top of fire-rated walls, partitions, and shafts.

B. Furnish and install firesafing at all other locations shown on the drawings. C. Furnish and install firesafing per the Manufacturer’s recommendations, instructions and details. Install

in accordance with UL Systems indicated.

1.02 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Store on clean, raised platform in a dry place in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI). B. 3M Fire Protection Products, St. Paul, MN. C. Firemaster Construction/Safing Joint Fire protection system by Thermal Ceramics, Augusta, GA. D. Approved Substitute.

2.02 SUPPLIES A. Supplies and materials required for Manufacturer’s recommended installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTIONS A. Inspections as required by local Fire Marshal, and/or Building Department. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Position and adhere material in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove excess materials.

B. Clean up in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements.

END OF SECTION 07 84 56 - CONSTRUCTION FIRESAFING

JOINT SEALERS 07 92 00 - 1

DIVISION 07-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALERS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 TESTING

A. Preconstruction Field Tests: Prior to installation of joint sealers, field-test their adhesion to joint substrates. Verify compatibility with joint fillers and materials in contact with sealants.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. In addition to product data submit the following: 1. Samples of each type and color of joint sealer required. 2. Submit in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements.

1.03 STORAGE

A. Store in cool, dry place at room temperature. 1.04 WARRANTY

A. Provide one (1) year warranty on labor and ten (10) year warranty on material.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPATIBILITY

A. Provide joint sealers, joint fillers and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. DAP Inc. 2. W.R. Grace and Co. 3. Parr Inc. 4. Mameco International. 5. Pecora Corp. 6. Tremco Mfg Co. 7. Sonneborn Bldg Prod. 8. Approved Substitute.

B. Types 1. Vertical Joints: Non-sagging one or two component urethane or polyurethane, ASTM C920,

Type M, Grade NS, color to match adjacent wall surfaces as approved by the Architect. 2. Interior Static Joints: General purpose, gun-grade, paintable acrylic latex, ASTM C834. 3. Horizontal Joints: Self-leveling two component urethane or polyurethane, ASTM C920, Type

M, Grade P, color to match adjacent floor or pavement surfaces. 4. Fire: ASTM E 814 UL rated.

C. Sealant Backings, General: Non-staining; compatible with joint substrates. D. Primer: Type as recommended by joint sealer Manufacturer. E. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant Manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Application surfaces must be clean of dirt, moisture and other substrates. B. Prime or seal joint surfaces where recommended by Manufacturer.

3.02 APPLICATION A. Joint Backing: Install backing in joints to receive sealant. B. Sealant Application: Comply with joint sealer Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions. D. Finishing: Finish sealant in horizontal and vertical surfaces slightly concave.

3.03 CLEANING A. Remove all excess material adjacent to the joints.

B. Clean up in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements.

END OF SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALERS

END DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

STEEL DOORS AND HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 08 11 00 - 1

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 08 11 00 STEEL DOORS AND HOLLOW METAL FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 STANDARDS

A. In addition to other specified requirements, comply with Steel Door Institute “Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames” (SDI-100)

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Provide UL label on doors indicated on Door Schedule.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements. B. Templates: Hardware templates for hardware mounted on hollow metal work shall be submitted

directly to the hollow metal Manufacturer. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. General: All delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Provide written warranty in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DOOR AND FRAME MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. R.C. Hollow Metal Company. 4. Steelcraft. (W.Ray Crabb, Inc.) . 5. Elco Metal Products. 2. Western Hollow Metals, Raton, NM. 6. CECO. 3. Gateway Metal Products, Raton, NM. 7. Approved Substitute.

2.02 MATERIALS A. Steel Doors and Frames: hot-rolled, pickled and oiled per ASTM A569 and A568; cold-rolled per

ASTM A366 and A568. B. Anchors and Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard units. C. Fire Rated Steel Doors and Frames: Provide UL Rated Doors and Frames as indicated on the Door

Schedule.

2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects. B. Prepare steel doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware. C. Shop paint exposed surfaces of doors and frame units using Manufacturer’s standard baked-on rust

inhibitive primer. D. Doors: Nominal 1-3/4” thick to comply with SDI-100, of the types and styles indicated. E. Frames: Comply with SDI-100, of the types and styles indicated.

2.04 FINISH

A. Cleaning and Primer: Thoroughly clean surfaces of grease, rust and scale to ensure paint adherence.


A. Frames: 1. Rigidly anchor to walls and partitions and securely brace until surrounding work is

completed. END OF SECTION 08 11 00 - STEEL DOORS AND HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES 08 14 00 - 1

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709

SECTION 08 14 00 WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulatory Requirements: Provide UL label on rated doors as indicated on Door Schedule. 1.02 REFERENCES

A. Reference Standard: Comply with: 1. NWMA Industry Standard 1.S.1.78 - Wood Flush Doors 2. AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standard, latest edition

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. In Addition to product data, submit the following in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements. 1. Shop Drawings indicating location, size, face material, and finishes. 2. Samples: 1’-0” square of each type of core construction, face material and finish required. 3. Provide stain samples on wood species indicated, to match existing.


A. General: All delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements.

B. Delivery: Do not deliver doors to the Project until it is entirely enclosed, drywall and concrete work is completed, and humidity in the building has reached average relative humidity of the locality.

C. Storage: Stack doors flat and off the floor. Do not drag doors across one another.

1.05 WARRANTY A. Provide written warranty in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, 01 70 00.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 INTERIOR SOLID CORE DOORS

A. Plastic Laminate Faces: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Thickness: 1-3/4” unless otherwise indicated. 2. Faces: Plastic laminated. 3. AWI Grade: Custom.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate doors in sizes indicated for job site fitting. B. Shop seal faces and edges of doors for field-applied transparent finish.


A. Inspection: Before installation, verify that frames are proper size and type for the door and are installed as required for proper installation of doors.

B. What do door and window Manufacturers spread on their toast? Jamb. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Fit to width by planing and fit to height using hand cross-cut saw. In no case shall doors be

cut down to opening sizes smaller than those for which they were manufactured. 2. Installation: By skilled finish carpenters or factory authorized installers. 3. Installer: Thoroughly familiar with the requirements of the Manufacturer’s door warranty as

currently in effect and with referenced AWI standard. Assure compliance with all provisions. B. Clearance:

1. Non-Fire Rated Doors: a. Jamb: 1/8”, 1/8” bevel in 2” b. Head: 1/8” c. Between Double Doors: 1/8” d. Bottom at Decorative Floor: 1/2”

WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES 08 14 00 - 2

e. Bottom at Threshold: 1/4” C. Hanging:

1. After sizing doors, fit for hardware as scheduled. Before installation of hardware, brush apply an exterior seal coat to jobsite cut surfaces. Use sealer recommended by the door Manufacturer.

2. Hang doors to be free of binding with hardware functioning properly. 3. Prepare and hang doors when temperature and humidity range of spaces is consistent with

final use and maximum 55% humidity.

3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjustment: At completion of job, adjust doors and hardware as required and leave in proper

operating condition.

END OF SECTION 08 14 00 – WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES

ACCESS DOORS 08 31 13 - 1

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 08 31 13 ACCESS DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing sizes, construction and installation details, in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements.


A. Packing and Shipping: All delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements.

B. Storage and Protection: Deliver and store items in dry, protected areas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCESS DOOR MANUFACTURERS

A. Approved Manufacturers 1. J.L. Industries, Inc. 3. Milcor Inc. 5. Approved Substitute. 2. Karp Associates . 4. Bilco.

2.02 ACCESS DOORS A. Doors: 24”x24” door with prime painted steel at painted wall construction and stainless steel in tile

and other locations as indicated, in types as required by wall construction. B. Door and Frame: 16 gauge steel. Provide key operated cylinder lock. C. Access Doors in Fire Rated Construction

1. Doors shall be UL or Warnock Hersey labeled and meet self-closing and self-latching requirements.

2. Doors shall be UL 1-1/2 hour fire rated when located in a fire rated wall assembly.


A. Install access doors in accordance with Manufacturer’s directions. B. Install plumb and level, true to line.

3.02 CLEANING

A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises.

END OF SECTION 08 31 13 – ACCESS DOORS

COILING COUNTER DOORS 08 33 13 - 1

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 08 33 13 COILING COUNTER DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Manual rolling counter doors with integral frame and countertop, built-in type. 1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing sizes, construction and installation details, in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements. Include special conditions not detailed in Product Data. Show interface with adjacent work.

B. Product Data. C. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals:

1. Provide proof of Manufacturer ISO 9001:2008 registration. 2. Provide proof of Manufacturer and Installer qualifications. 3. Provide Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

D. Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and Maintenance Manual. 2. Certificate stating that installed materials comply with this Specification.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001:2008 registered and a minimum of five (5) years experience in producing counter doors with integral frame assembly of the type specified.

B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer’s approval. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING


B. Storage and Protection: Deliver and store items in dry, protected areas. C. Follow Manufacturer’s instructions.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Standard Warranty: Two years from date of shipment against defects in material and workmanship. B. Maintenance: Submit for owner’s consideration and acceptance of a maintenance service agreement

for installed products. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Manufacturer: Cornell Iron Works, Inc., Crestwood Industrial Park, Mountaintop, PA 18707. 800.233.8366. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL); or Approved Substitute.

B. Model: ESC20.D 2.02 MATERIALS

A. Curtain: 1. Slats: No. 1F, interlocked flat-faced slats, 1-1/2 inches high by 1/2 inch deep, 22 gauge

ASTM A 653, Commercial Quality, galvanized steel with extruded tubular aluminum bottom bar with continuous lift handle and vinyl astragal.

2. Fabricate interlocking slat sections with high strength molded nylon endlocks riveted to ends of alternate slats.

3. Slat Finish: GalvaNex Coating System and phosphate treatment followed by baked-on polyester powder coat, color as selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s standard color range, minimum 32 colors; minimum 2.5 mils cured film thickness; ASTM D-3363 pencil hardness: H or better.

4. Bottom Bar Finish: Aluminum Bar/Steel Slat with Powder Coating: Match slat powder coating.

B. Head and Jamb Frame: Integral welded with guide groove incorporated into jamb design. Build to fit (verify in field) wall thickness. 1. Steel: 16 gauge formed shapes 2. Finish: Steel: Light gray shop prime coat; minimum 0.6 mils cured film thickness.

C. Counterbalance Shaft Assembly: 1. Barrel: Steel pipe capable of supporting curtain load with maximum deflection of 0.03 inches

COILING COUNTER DOORS 08 33 13 - 2

per foot of width. 2. Spring Balance: Oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion spring assembly designed for

proper balance of door to ensure that maximum effort to operate will not exceed 25 lbs (110 N). Provide wheel for applying and adjusting spring torque.

D. Brackets: Fabricate from reinforced [steel] plate with bearings at rotating support points to support counterbalance shaft assembly and form end closures for hood. 1. Finish: Steel: Light gray shop prime coat; minimum 0.6 mils (0.015 mm) cured film

thickness. E. Hood: 16 gauge steel with reinforced top and bottom edges.

1. Finish: Steel: Light gray shop prime coat; minimum 0.6 mils (0.015 mm) cured film thickness.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Locking: Lockable slide bolt on coil side of bottom bar at each jamb extending into slots in guides. 2.04 FABRICATION

A. Factory weld head and jambs into single unit, fully assembled, ready for installation. 2.05 OPERATION

A. Manual Push-Up: Provide lift handles on bottom bar and pole with hook. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates upon which work will be installed and verify conditions are in accordance with approved shop drawings.

B. Coordinate with responsible entity to perform corrective work on unsatisfactory substrates. C. Commencement of work by installer is acceptance of substrate.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install door unit and operating equipment with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers and supports.

B. Follow Manufacturer’s installation instructions. 3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Following completion of installation, including related work by others, lubricate, test, and adjust doors for ease of operation, free from warp, twist, or distortion.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean surfaces soiled by work as recommended by Manufacturer. B. Remove surplus materials and debris from the site.

3.05 DEMONSTRATION

A. Demonstrate proper operation to Owner’s Representative. B. Instruct Owner’s Representative in maintenance procedures.

END OF SECTION 08 33 13 – COILING COUNTER DOORS

OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 33 23 - 1

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Manual overhead rolling doors. B. Fire Rating: N/A this Project.

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Design Requirements: 1. Wind Loading: N/A this project. Door is at interior wall location. 2. Cycle Life: Design doors of standard construction for normal use of up to 20 cycles per day

maximum. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals. Submit the following items: 1. Product Data. 2. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements. Include

special conditions not detailed in Product Data. Show interface with adjacent work. 3. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals:

a. Provide proof of Manufacturer ISO 9001: 2008 Registration. b. Provide proof of Manufacturer and Installer qualifications. See 1.04 below. c. Provide Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

4. Closeout Submittals: Closeout Submittals in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, 01 70 00, Contract Closeout. a. Operation and Maintenance Manual. b. Certificate stating that installed materials comply with this specification.


A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001: 2008 registered and a minimum of five (5) years

experience in producing doors of the type specified. 2. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer’s approval.

1.05 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with Division

1 – General Requirements. B. Follow Manufacturer’s instructions.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Standard Warranty: Two (2) years from date of shipment against defects in material and workmanship.

B. Maintenance: Submit for Owner’s consideration and acceptance of a maintenance service agreement for installed products.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Manufacturer: Cornell Iron: 800.526. 0841. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), ISO 9001:2008 Registered. 1. Distributor: Front Range Raynor Door Co., 3847 South Mason St, Fort Collins, CO 80525;

970.223.9555. B. Model: ESD10.

2.02 MATERIALS A. Curtain:

1. Slats: No. 5F, 24 gauge, Grade 40 steel, ASTM A 653 galvanized steel zinc coating. 2. Bottom Bar: Two 2x2x1/8 inch structural steel angles. 3. Fabricate interlocking sections with high strength cast iron endlocks on alternate slats each

secured with two 1/4” rivets. Provide windlocks as required to meet specified wind load.


4. Slat Finish: GalvaNex Coating System to include an ASTM A 653 galvanized base coating treated with dual process rinsing agents in preparation of a chemical bonding, tan baked-on polyester base coat and a tan baked-on polyester finish coat. The scientific organic material composition and chemical bonding process of GalvaNex produces a superior finish against corrosion and abrasion. GalvaNex components include a limited two year finish warranty.

5. Curtain Configuration: Standard Curtain configuration. 6. Bottom Bar Finish: Steel - Phosphate treatment followed by a tan baked-on polyester powder

coat; minimum 2.5 mils cured film thickness. 7. Bottom Bar Configuration: Standard Bottom Bar Configuration.

B. Guides: Fabricate with structural steel angles. Provide windlock bars of same material when windlocks are required to meet specified wind load. Top of inner and outer guide angles to be flared outwards to form bellmouth for smooth entry of curtain into guides. Provide removable guide stoppers to prevent over travel of curtain and bottom bar. Top 16 1/2” of coil side guide angles to be removable for ease of curtain installation and as needed for future curtain service. 1. Finish: Steel - Phosphate treatment followed by tan baked-on polyester powder coat;

minimum 2.5 mils (0.065 mm) cured film thickness. 2. Guide Configuration: Standard Guide Configuration.

C. Counterbalance Shaft Assembly: 1. Barrel: Steel pipe capable of supporting curtain load with maximum deflection of 0.03 inches

per foot of width. 2. Spring Balance: Oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion spring assembly designed for

proper balance of door to ensure that maximum effort to operate will not exceed 25 lbs. Provide wheel for applying and adjusting spring torque.

D. Brackets: Fabricate from minimum 3/16 inch steel plate with permanently lubricated ball or roller bearings at rotating support points to support counterbalance shaft assembly and form end closures. 1. Finish: Steel - Phosphate treatment followed by a tan baked-on polyester powder coat;

minimum 2.5 mils (0.065 mm) cured film thickness. E. Hood: 24 gauge galvanized steel with reinforced top and bottom edges. Provide minimum 1/4 inch

steel intermediate support brackets as required to prevent excessive sag. 1. Finish: GalvaNex Coating System to include an ASTM A 653 galvanized base coating

treated with dual process rinsing agents in preparation of a chemical bonding, tan baked-on polyester base coat and a tan baked-on polyester finish coat. The scientific organic material composition and chemical bonding process of GalvaNex produces a superior finish against corrosion and abrasion. GalvaNex components include a limited two year finish warranty.

F. Weatherstripping: 1. Bottom Bar: Replaceable, bulb-style, compressible EDPM gasket extending into guides. 2. Guides: Vinyl strip sealing against fascia side of curtain.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Locking: N/A this project. 2.04 OPERATION

A. Manual Chain Hoist: Provide chain hoist operator with endless steel chain, chain pocket wheel and guard, geared reduction unit, and chain keeper secured to guide.

B. Entrapment Protection: N/A this project . PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates upon which work will be installed and verify conditions are in accordance with approved Shop Drawings, in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals.

B. Coordinate with responsible entity to perform corrective work on unsatisfactory substrates. C. Commencement of work by installer is acceptance of substrate.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install door and operating equipment with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers and supports.

B. Follow Manufacturer’s installation instructions. 3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Following completion of installation, including related work by others, lubricate, test, and adjust doors for ease of operation, free from warp, twist, or distortion.


3. 04 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces soiled by work as recommended by Manufacturer. B. Remove surplus materials and debris from the site.

3. 05 DEMONSTRATION

A. Demonstrate proper operation to Owner’s Representative. B. Instruct Owner’s Representative in maintenance procedures.

END OF SECTION 08 33 23 – OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

GLASS OVERHEAD SECTIONAL DOORS 08 36 13 - 1

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 08 36 13 GLASS OVERHEAD SECTIONAL DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Glazed panel sections. B. Operating hardware, motor controls, and supports.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions and required tolerances, connection details, anchorage

spacing, hardware locations, and installation details. Submit in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements.

C. Product Data: Provide component construction, anchorage method, and hardware Submit in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements.

D. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring and special attention.


A. Manufacturer: Sectional doors shall be manufactured by a firm with a minimum of five (5) years experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum three (3) years experience and approved by Manufacturer.

C. Single Source Responsibility: Provide doors, tracks, motors and accessories from one Manufacturer. Provide secondary components from source acceptable to Manufacturer of primary components.

D. Pre-Installation Conference: Schedule and convene a pre-installation conference just prior to commencement of field operations, to establish procedures to maintain optimum working conditions and to coordinate this Work with related and adjacent Work.

E. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials and products in labeled protection packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with Manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Protect from damage from weather, excessive temperatures and construction operations and in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements.

1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to applicable code for motor and motor control requirements. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by U.L. as suitable for the purpose

specified and indicated. 1.07 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer’s limited door and operators System warranty for ten (10) years against cracking, splitting or deterioration due to rust-through.

B. Provide warranty under provisions of Division 01 – General Requirements. C. Warranty: Include minimum 1 year coverage of electric motors.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Overhead Door Company or Approved Substitute. B. Substitutions: Submit to Architect using Section 00 43 25 Substitution Request Form to obtain

approval according to Division 01 – General Requirements.

GLASS OVERHEAD SECTIONAL DOORS 08 36 13 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that wall openings are ready to receive Work and opening dimensions and tolerances are

within specified limits. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare opening to permit correct installation of door unit to perimeter air and vapor barrier seal. B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install door unit assembly in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions. B. Anchor assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress. C. Securely brace door tracks suspended from structure. Secure tracks to structural members only. D. Fit and align door assembly including hardware, level and plumb, to provide smooth operation. E. Coordinate installation of electrical service. Complete power and control writing from disconnect to

unit components. F. Coordinate installation of sealants and backing materials at frame perimeter as specified in Division

07 – Thermal and Moisture Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealers. 3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent Work. B. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/16 inch (1/16”). C. Maximum Variation from Level: 1/16 inch (1/16”). D. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (1/8”) from ten (10’) foot straight edge.

3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Test sectional doors for proper operation and adjust as necessary to provide proper operation without

binding or distortion. B. Touch up damaged coatings and finishes, and repair minor damage. C. Clean exposed surfaces using non-abrasive materials and methods recommended by Manufacturer.

3.06 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES A. Prepare and start systems under provisions of Division 01 - General Requirements B. Ensure the operation and adjustments to door assembly for smooth operation.

END OF SECTION 08 36 13 – GLASS OVERHEAD SECTIONAL DOORS

ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13 - 1

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709

SECTION 08 41 13 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish and install all necessary materials, labor and equipment for the complete installation of aluminum storefront, aluminum entrance doors, door frames, glass, and hardware as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.

1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide certified test results showing systems have been tested by a recognized testing laboratory and provide performance equal to or surpassing specified system.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include fabrication methods, finishing, hardware, accessories and installation recommendations

B. Shop Drawings: In accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements. C. Samples: Pairs of each finish, on 12” long sections of extrusions and on 6” square sheets. D. Templates: Hardware templates for all hardware mounted in aluminum doors and frames.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Store frames and doors in positions necessary to prevent twisting.

1.05 WARRANTY A. Provide written warranty in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements.

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulatory Requirements: Provide UL label on rated doors as indicated on Door Schedule.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Kawneer B. Vistawall C. Approved Substitute

2.02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Members 1. Comply with ASTM B 221 for extrusions and ASTM B 209 for sheet or plate. B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other noncorrosive material. C. Weatherstripping: Replaceable compressible neoprene or molded PVC type gaskets. D. Glass and Glazing Materials: Comply with requirements of “Glass and Glazing”, Section 08 81 00. E. Accessories: Provide matching aluminum brake metal, closures, etc. where detailed or required.

2.04 ALUMINUM ENTRANCE DOORS AND STOREFRONT FRAMING A. Provide pairs of Series 190 doors with TriFab 451T framing as manufactured by Kawneer Company,

Inc., or Approved Substitute. 2.05 ALUMINUM ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE

A. Pull Handles: Kawneer CO-9 Fluropon “Satin”. B. Hinges and Pivots

1. Butt Hinges a. 4-1/2” x 4” Template butts with non-removable pin (NRP). b. 1-1/2 pair per leaf.

2. Offset Pivots: a. Kawneer standard top, bottom, and intermediate pivots.

C. Door Closers 1. Surface Overhead Closers: LCN 4040.

D. Thresholds

1. Manufacturer’s standard maximum height of 1/2”. E. Lock Cylinders

1. Provide under Finish Hardware Section 08 71 00. F. Submit cut sheets on all hardware to Architect for approval. Obtain approval prior to ordering.

ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13 - 2

2.06 FINISH A. Custom Color: Red – Submit Sample for Architect’s approval.

2.07 FABRICATION

A. Sizes of units and profile requirements, are indicated on Drawings. Field verify dimensions.


A. Inspection: Inspect to verify that opening for aluminum frames are proper size, plumb, square and level before installation of frames is started.

B. All glass framing shall be set in correct locations as shown in the details and shall be level, square, plumb and in alignment with other Work.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Installation: By skilled finish carpenters or factory authorized installers.

B. Hanging: 1. After sizing doors, fit for hardware as scheduled. 2. Hang doors to be free of binding with hardware functioning properly.

3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjusting: At completion of job, adjust doors and hardware as required and Leave in proper operating

condition. B. Cleaning: Leave protective coating in place until building is substantially completed, remove and

leave surfaces clean upon completion.

END OF SECTION 08 41 13 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

SPECIAL FUNCTION WINDOWS 08 56 00 - 1

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 08 56 00 SPECIAL FUNCTION WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Projection Booth Window Portholes. Product to be purchased and installed by Tenant. Contractor to provide rough opening only.



B. Storage and Protection: Deliver and store items in dry, protected areas. C. Follow Manufacturer’s instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Manufacturer: Kelmar Systems Inc. or Approved Substitute. 2.02 SIZE

A. Porthole Size: 34” x 24” frame. B. Rough Opening: 35 1/2” x 25 1/2". To determine Rough Opening, add 1-3/8”to Specified Size. C. Clear Opening for Projected Light Path is 32-5/8”w x 22-5/8” h.

2.03 OPERATION

A. Unit shall be Fixed, Closed Non-operable, per IBC 409.2. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION (By Tenant)

A. General: Install in accordance to Manufacturer’s installation instructions. 3.03 CLEANING (By Tenant)

A. Clean surfaces soiled by work as recommended by Manufacturer. B. Remove surplus materials and debris from the site.

END OF SECTION 08 56 00 – SPECIAL FUNCTION WINDOWS

FINISH HARDWARE 08 70 00 - 1

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 08 70 00 FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Submit samples of hardware items, showing each required finish from each Manufacturer. B. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use in doors and frames of the thicknesses, profile,

security and similar requirements indicated, as necessary for proper installation and function.

1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Hardware Schedule: Submit by “Hardware Sets” as set forth in schedule included on Drawings. B. Operating and Maintenance Data: Submit in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements.



B. Storage and Protection: Provide a secured area with sufficient space and shelving in which to store and inventory all materials under lock and key. Protect hardware from damage at all times.

C. All delivery, storage and handling shall be in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements. 1.04 WARRANTY

A. Provide Manufacturer’s written warranty for all hardware provided. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with the following standards: 1. ANSI A117.1: Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable

by Physically Handicapped People. 2. ANSI/NFPA 80: Fire Doors and Windows 3. UL Standard 305: Panic Hardware 4. Americans with Disabilities Act “ADA”

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: five (5) years’ experience in manufacture of comparable systems. C. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Hardware listed or furnished shall meet requirements of Federal, State and Local codes having jurisdiction.


A. Should certain hardware items be unavailable or have been replaced by new series, Contractor shall supply hardware list from Approved Manufacturers which has same appearance, function and quality.

B. Keying: All keying shall be keyed to a master key system. Keying Schedule must be approved prior to ordering any locks.

2.02 HARDWARE SCHEDULE: REFER TO CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS.

2.03 KEYING

A. Door Locks: Tenant will be responsible for rekeying following construction. B. All locksets shall be construction keyed.

2.04 ACCESSIBILITY

A. Hardware for doors accessible to use by the handicapped shall comply with all federal, state and local codes which shall supersede this Section. The Architect MUST be notified of any conflicts between regulations and the Specifications prior to the purchase and installation of any hardware.

2.05 FINISH

A. 315/711 Black Anodized.

FINISH HARDWARE 08 70 00 - 2

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General: Provide a factory hardware technician to be present to assist and instruct those applying finish hardware.

B. Fastening: Furnish items of hardware with attachment screws, bolts, nuts, etc. as required to attach hardware to type of material involved and with finish to match hardware with which they are to be used.

C. Weatherstripping and Thresholds: Run weatherstripping full height of both jambs and full width of head. Run thresholds full width of opening. Run door bottoms full width of doors.

D. Painting: Do not install door silencers, kickplates, pushplates, door bottoms, and wall stops until after painting is complete.

F. Adjusting: Prior to final inspection, hardware Manufacturer’s representative shall inspect and adjust door closers, locks and items requiring close adjustment and regulation and check all keying.

3.02 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Maintenance Manuals: Provide in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements. Include printed sheets from Manufacturers covering hardware furnished.

END OF SECTION 08 70 00 - FINISH HARDWARE

GLASS AND GLAZING 08 81 00 - 1

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 08 81 00 GLASS AND GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Glass and glazing materials shall provide continuity of building enclosure and air vapor seal. B. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, with full recovery of glazing materials,

whichever is less. 1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: 1. Submit structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special

handling or installation requirements for glass and plastic materials. B. Samples: Submit samples as follows:

1. (2) samples 8” x 8” in size, illustrating glass and plastic units, coloration and design. 2. 4” long bead of glazing sealant, color as selected.

C. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Submit Manufacturer’s certification that sealed insulated glass meets or exceeds specified requirements.


A. Standards 1. ANSI/ASTM E330. 2. ANSI 297.1.

B. Every piece of glass shall bear a label designating type, thickness and quality. Do not remove labels until inspected by Architect.


A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer’s original unopened packing with labels intact.in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements.

B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. C. Handling: Comply with Manufacturer’s instructions.

1.05 WARRANTY A. Provide five (5) year Manufacturer’s warranty for sealed glass units from seal failure, interpane

dusting or misting, and replacement of same. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A. Glass Materials: 1. PPG Ind. 2. SPI Glass Corp. 3. AFGD. 4. Approved Substitute.

B. Sealed Insulating Glass Materials: 1. Cardinal IG 2. PPG Md. 3. Approved Substitute

2.02 GLASS MATERIALS

A. Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality q3 glazing select; 1/4” (6mm) thick minimum.

B. Safety Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT fully tempered Condition A uncoated, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality q3 glazing select, conforming to ANSI 297.1; 1/4” (6mm) thick minimum.

2.03 SEALED INSULATING GLASS MATERIALS

A. Insulating Glass Units for Windows: Low-E ASTM E774 and E773: double pane with polysobutylene primary seal and silicone secondary seal. Low-E glass total unit thickness of 1 inch.

2.04 MARKINGS

A. Tempered glass shall have each light permanently etched with Manufacturer’s name and his compliance with ANSI Z-97.1.


A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions.

GLASS AND GLAZING 08 81 00 - 2

B. Examine framing or glazing channel surfaces, backing, removable stop design, and conditions under which glazing is to be performed.

C. Coordination: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with or will be concealed by this Work.

D. Verify that frames are plumb and square.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Field Measurements: Field measure openings before ordering tempered glass products. B. Protection: Completely cover glass during spray painting, texturing or other construction operations

that might cause damage to glass.

3.03 INSTALLATION A. Comply with combined recommendations of Glass Manufacturer and Manufacturer of sealants and

other materials used in glazing, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. B. Comply with “Glazing Manual” by FGMA, except as shown and specified otherwise by

Manufacturers of glass and glazing materials.

3.04 CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials,

equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition in accordance with Division 01 – General Requirements.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect glass from breakage immediately upon installation, by attachment of crossed streamers to framing held away from glass.

B. Be responsible to replace any glass broken or damaged during shipping, storage, or installation.

END OF SECTION 08 81 00 - GLASS AND GLAZING

END OF DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

GYPSUM WALL BOARD AND CEILING SYSTEMS 09 20 00 - 1

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 09 20 00 GYPSUM WALLBOARD AND CEILING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 STANDARDS

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. C 36: Specification for Gypsum Wallboard

2. C 620: Specification for Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board 3. C 840: Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board

B. Gypsum Association: (GA) 1. GA-214: Recommended Specifications: Levels of Gypsum Board Finish.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Sample: Submit 2’x2’ sample of textures for approval before starting finishing Work in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions for each product specified. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. During gypsum board application and finishing, maintain temperatures within the building within the range of 50q to 70q F. Provide adequate ventilation to eliminate excess moisture.

B. Environmental Requirements: Establish and maintain application and finishing environment in accordance with ASTM C 840.


A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain gypsum board products, joint treatment products, and textured coatings from a single Manufacturer.


A. Packing and Shipping: Have materials shipped in Manufacturer’s original packages showing Manufacturer’s name and product brand name. All delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements.

B. Storage and Protection: Store materials inside and protected from damage by the elements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. United States Gypsum Co. (USG) D. G-P Gypsum Corp. B. National Gypsum Co. E. Approved Substitute. C. Celotex Building Products.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Metal Furring: USG Drywall Hat Channel-Furring or Approved Substitute. B. Resilient Channel: USG RC-1 resilient channels. C. Wall Board for partitions at ceramic tile location: Georgia Pacific 5/8 inch Dens-Shield Tile Backer. D. Wall Board for Partitions and Ceilings: 5/8” thick “Fire Code X” tapered Gypsum board: “Fire Code

X”: Comply with ASTM C630 ‘X’. E. Gypsum Ceiling Board: A gypsum core ceiling panel with additives to enhance the sag resistance of

the core. F. Gypsum Sheathing Board: A gypsum core sheathing panel with additives to enhance the water

resistance of the core. G. Shaftwall Coreboard: A gypsum core shaftwall panel with additives to enhance fire resistance of the

core ASTM C 442, Type ‘X’. 1” thick. H. Fire-Rated Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: A gypsum core soffit panel with additives to enhance the

fire resistance and the sag resistance of the core. J. Acoustical Sealant: Non-drying butyl rubber acoustical sealant Pecora #BA-98, at non-exposed

locations. USG Acoustical Sealant at exposed locations. K. Adhesive: As recommended by the Gypsum Wallboard Manufacturer. L. Suspended Gypsum Ceiling System: USG or Approved Substitute. M. Access Doors: Shall be Milcor or Approved Substitute. Provide quantity as required by code.

Coordinate locations with General Contractor and verify all locations with Architect, prior to installation.

GYPSUM WALL BOARD AND CEILING SYSTEMS 09 20 00 - 2


A. Inspection: Inspect framing to receive drywall. Report any unsatisfactory conditions. B. Acceptance: Beginning of Work indicates acceptance of framing.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Apply and finish in accordance with Gypsum Association GA 216. B. Layout: Apply wall panels vertically full height. Apply ceiling panels in as long lengths as practical. C. Multiple Layers: Apply with screws and adhesive per UL design and code requirements at locations

indicated, and at all walls and ceilings indicated to be one (1) hour and two (2) hour rated as required and indicated.

D. Cut Holes: Holes for electrical devices, pipes, etc. shall not exceed size of cover plate or escutcheon. E. Acoustical Sealant: Apply at all penetrations of gypsum board at walls with acoustical insulation. F. Finishing: Finish joints and fastener dimples as recommended by Manufacturer. G. Texturing: Light orange peel texture. H. Exposed Edges

1. At all exposed edges, use corner beads or casing beads to provide a true edge. 2. Complete metal framing at corners.

J. Control Joints Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, install control joints at 30 feet maximum spacing in

walls, ceilings, and soffits. K. Cleaning 1. Do not allow the accumulation of scraps and debris arising from the Work of this section.

2. Maintain the premises in a neat and orderly condition at all times. L. Single-Layer Application

1. Apply gypsum board with long dimension either parallel or perpendicular to framing. 2. Install gypsum board by means of screw attachment.

M. Double-Layer Application 1. Apply base layer with long dimension parallel to studs.

a. Install base layer by means of screw attachment. b. Provide fire taping only.

2. Precut and fit face layer by either laminating to base layer with adhesive or screws. a. Apply face layer with long dimension parallel to studs. b. Offset vertical joints at least one (1) stud space between layers.

N. Three-Layer Application 1. Apply base layer vertically with long dimension parallel to studs. 2. Stagger joints from those in adjacent layers and on opposite sides of partition.

3.03 SOUND CONTROL A. The General Contractor is cautioned as to the importance of quality control in the construction of

gypsum board sound walls. B. Comply with Manufacturer’s recommendations for location of acoustical sealant beads, and close off

sound-flanking paths around or through the Work, including sealing of partitions above acoustical ceiling. 1. Install partitions to completely conform to STC acoustical ratings and hourly fire resistance

ratings noted. 2. Pack all void spaces between roof deck and runners with acoustical insulation. 3. Terminate tops of all partitions with compressible seals.

3.04 WALLS TO RECEIVE WALLCOVERING

A. Walls to receive wallcovering shall be bedded, taped and finish sanded only.

END OF SECTION 09 20 00 – GYPSUM WALL BOARD AND CEILING SYSTEMS

PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09 21 13 - 1

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 09 21 13 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE

A. Weather Resistant Barrier. B. Portland Cement Plaster Base Coat. C. Tinted Primer Coat. D. Colored Plaster Finish Coat.


A. Applicator: Company specializing in cement plaster work with three (3) years experience.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data on plaster materials, characteristics and limitations of products specified. B. Products to be installed in accordance with Manufacturer’s written instructions. C. Provide color and finish samples for Architect’s approval. D. Provide sample Manufacturer’s standard five (5) year warranty.

1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply plaster when substrate or ambient air temperature is less than 50o F or more than 80o F.


A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Sto Industries, Inc. 2. Approved Substitute

B. All components of the system shall be obtained from one Manufacturer or its authorized distributors. 2.02 WEATHER-RESISTANT BARRIER

A. Minimum Grade ‘D’ kraft building paper complying with UBC Standard 14-1, or asphalt saturated rag felt complying with UL Standard Specification SS-A-1983.

2.03 BASE COAT (Brown Coat)

A. 1x20 24 gauge galvanized steel wire mesh reinforcing. B. Concentrate: Factory-prepared mixture of:

1. Type I or Type II Portland cement complying with UBC Standard 19-1. C. Sand: Clean and free from deleterious material. D. Accessories as recommended by Manufacturer’s details.

2.04 PRIMER

A. Tinted to match color of finish coat. B. “Sanded” texture application.

2.05 FINISH COAT A. Concentrate: Factory prepared mixture.


A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive Work. B. Mechanical and Electrical: Verify services within walls have been tested and approved. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect surfaces near the Work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.

3.03 INSTALLATION A. Apply one (1) ply of kraft building paper or felt underlayment over substrate; weatherlap edges four

(4”) inches minimum. Fasten in place and apply stucco per Manufacturer’s Specifications.

PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09 21 13 - 2

3.04 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Establish control and expansion joints with specified joint device.

3.05 PLASTERING A. Apply plaster in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions. B. Apply base coat to a nominal thickness of 3/8” and a finish coat to a nominal thickness of 1/8”. C. After curing, apply primer coat and wait twenty-four (24) hours before proceeding with finish coat. D. Apply finish coat and wood float to a smooth and consistent finish. E. A single surface should be completed to prevent bad joints.

3.06 TOLERANCES: A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

END OF SECTION 09 21 13 – PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER

CERAMIC TILE 09 30 10 - 1

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 09 30 10 CERAMIC TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 STANDARDS

A. Meet requirements and recommendations of applicable Standards.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality, grade, and certificates: Tile shall be Standard Grade. B. Installation of tile Work shall be in accordance with and conform to ANSI A108.1, A108.4, A108.5.

1.03 SAMPLES

A. Submit samples to the Interior Designer for approval and color selection. B. Do not order materials until samples have been approved.

1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver and store materials in their original unopened containers bearing the Manufacturer’s label. B. Deliver dry-set mortar in sealed, moisture-proof containers.

1.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Refer to Finishes Schedule on Interior Designers Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE

A. Refer to Finishes Schedule on Interior Designers Drawings.

2.02 RELATED MATERIALS A. Setting Type: Thin-set at walls (TCA Method W243); cement mortar bed with cleavage membrane at

floors (TCA Method F111). B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4. C. Water: Potable. D. Grout: Refer to Finishes Schedule on Interior Designers Drawings.

2.03 MIXES A. Thinset Mortar: Mix in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Grout: Mix in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE

A. Grind or fill concrete substrates as required to comply with allowable variations. B. Beginning of Work indicate acceptance of substrates.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Align joints of cove bases and trim with adjacent tile joints. B. Apply tile in strict accordance with recommendations of.

3.03 CURING

A. Damp Cure grouts a minimum of 72 hours after grouting. B. Close areas to traffic until tile is firmly set.

3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Complete cleaning and protections in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements. B. Replace ceramic tiles with broken corners, cracks, fractures, and minor breaks.

END OF SECTION 09 30 10 – CERAMIC TILE

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 50 00 - 1

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 09 50 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 STANDARDS AND QUALITY

A. Meet requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of the Industry Standards. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Applicator Qualifications 1. Applicator shall have satisfactorily installed accepted suspension system and acoustical units

on at least three (3) other projects of equal scope. B. Design Criteria

1. Deflection: Suspension system components, hangers and fastening devices shall support light fixtures, ceiling grilles, and acoustical units without deflecting more than 1/360 of the span.

C. Fire Safety Requirements: 1. Maximum Flame Spread index of acoustical materials: 25.

D. Seismic Requirements: 1. Ceilings shall be designed and detailed to comply with applicable code requirements for

seismic bracing of ceiling suspension system.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements. B. Shop Drawings shall be submitted in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements. C. Product Data: All product data shall be submitted in accordance with Division 1, General

Requirements. D. Verification Samples shall be submitted in accordance with Division 1.

1. Full size samples of each type of acoustical unit required. 2. 12 inch (12”) long samples of each type of finish of exposed suspension member and trim.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store materials in their original unopened protective containers in accordance with

Division 01 - General Requirements. B. Deliver materials with Manufacturer’s labels indicating brand name, pattern, size, thickness, and fire

rating, as applicable, legible and intact. C. Store materials off the floor to assure proper protection from water and cover if necessary.

1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements

1. Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, and dust-generating activities have been terminated.

B. Do not install acoustical ceilings until Work above ceilings is completed. C. Conditions at Start of Work:

1. Starting of Work will be considered acceptance by the General Contractor of the surfaces involved.

1.06 MAINTENANCE

A. Provide extra materials in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS INTERIOR

A. Exposed Grid Armstrong Prelude ML 15/16” Exposed Tee System. B. Exposed Grid Armstrong Prelude XL 15/16” Exposed Tee System.

2.02 ACOUSTICAL TILES INTERIOR

A. Acoustical Panel: Armstrong, 24”x48”x5/8”, #1830 Fine Fissured. Angled Tegular. Color: Tech Black (BL) Tile.

B. Acoustical Panel: Armstrong, 24”x48”x3/4”, #1824 Fine Fissured. Angled Tegular. Color: White (WH) Tile.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide all accessories as recommended by Manufacturer.

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 50 00 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. Lay out spaces and arrange suspension system in regular pattern as shown on the Drawings. B. Beginning of Work indicates acceptance of substrates.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Contractor shall use a laser device for installation of ceiling grid. B. Install acoustic treatment after moist materials have been installed. C. Perform all installation according to the Code of Practices of Acoustical Ceiling System Installation. D. Install acoustical treatment and suspension system according to instructions and recommendations of

the Manufacturer. 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Complete cleaning and protections in accordance with Division 01 – General Requirements 3.04 EXTRA STOCK

A. Provide five percent (5%) additional ceiling tile material, of each type, identical to that installed, for maintenance and replacement use.

END OF SECTION 09 50 00 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE 09 65 00 - 1

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Resilient flooring and base where indicated on the Finish Schedule or on the Drawings.

1.02 JOB CONDITIONS A. Maintain minimum temperature of 65ºF in spaces to receive resilient. B. Install resilient flooring and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been

completed. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements. B. Shop Drawings shall be submitted in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements. C. Product Data: All product data shall be submitted in accordance with Division 1, General

Requirements.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store materials in their original unopened protective containers in accordance with

Division 01 - General Requirements.

1.05 MAINTENANCE A. Provide extra materials in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Slip Resistant Sheet Vinyl at stair landings. B. Resilient Base C. Reducer Strips D. Stair Nosings E. Accessories F. Rubber Stair Treads

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide all accessories as recommended by Manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. Broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered, inspect subfloor conditions, and take full responsibility for complete Work.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install flooring using method indicated in strict compliance with Manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Finishing: After completion of installation and just prior to final inspection of Work, thoroughly clean floor and accessories.

B. Apply polish and buff, with type of polish, number of coats, and buffing procedures in compliance with flooring Manufacturer’s instructions.

3.04 EXTRA STOCK

A. After completion of Work, deliver to Project site replacement materials from same manufactured lot as materials installed.

END OF SECTION 09 65 00 – RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE

CARPET GLUE-DOWN 09 68 13 - 1

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 09 68 13 CARPET GLUE-DOWN PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDES A. Carpet Materials and Accessories are to be supplied by Tenant.

B. Carpet Materials and Accessories are to be installed by General Contractor under separate contract with Tenant. See Matrix of Responsibility. General Contractor to coordinate schedule.

C. Carpet is to be installed with pad at all locations except within Auditoriums and at Projection Rooms. 1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit samples in accordance with Division 1 General Requirements.

1.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data.


A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in tufted carpet with three (3) years minimum experience. B. Installer: Company with three (3) years minimum experience.

1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for carpet flammability requirements in accordance with ASTM E84.

1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain minimum 70o F ambient temperature three (3) days prior to, during, and 24 hours after

installation of materials.

1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 100 sq.ft. of carpeting of each color specified.


A. Refer to Finishes Schedule on Interior Designers Drawings and coordinate product with Interior Designer.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Sub-Floor Filler. B. Primers and Adhesives. C. Pad.


A. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. Verify concrete floors are dry to a maximum moisture content of 7%. C. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Apply carpet and adhesive in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions.

3.04 CLEANING A. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces, and in accordance with Division 1 General Requirements.

3.05 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic from carpeted areas for 24 hours after installation.

END OF SECTION 09 68 13 – CARPET GLUE-DOWN

PAINTING AND STAINING 09 90 00 - 1

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND STAINING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Painting and finishing of interior and exterior items and surfaces. 1. Verify colors with Architect and Interior Designer prior to ordering.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Paint or Stain Samples: Make paint or stain 12”x12” samples of each finish and color.

1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials required for painting in unbroken packages bearing the brand and name of

Manufacturer in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: In winter weather, paint or stain only when the temperature is 50º F over and surfaces are absolutely dry.

B. Condition of Spaces and Surfaces: Spaces must be clean before finishing is started. C. Protection: Furnish and lay drop cloths or mask off areas where painting is being done to protect

floors and other Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: The best quality materials as manufactured by any of the following Manufacturers will be acceptable: 1. Sherwin-Williams Approved Substitute.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. General: 1. Wall shall be perfectly dry, clean and smooth before starting Work.

3.02 WORKMANSHIP

A. Spread materials evenly without runs or sagging of materials. Subcontractor shall be responsible for any poor Work caused by improper surface preparation.

B. This Work shall be done in all cases after doors have been fitted and are ready for final hanging. C. Finish coat shall be in color as selected by Interior Designer. Confirm before ordering. Tint primers to

match finish coat. D. What happened when the boat carrying red paint bumped into the boat carrying blue paint? (They

were marooned.) 3.03 EXTERIOR NEW CONSTRUCTION

A. Ferrous Metal Prime Coat: Alkyd Rust Inhibitive Paint Finish: Two coats Gloss/Alkyd B. Galvanized Metal Prime Coat: Galvanized Metal Primer Finish: Two coats Gloss/Alkyd C. Wood Two coats Exterior Semi-Gloss Latex Paint

3.04 INTERIOR NEW CONSTRUCTION A. Wood

First Coat: Wood Filler and Sand Prime Coat: Alkyd Enamel, and sand again after Prime Coat Finish: Two coats Satin/Alkyd

B. Ferrous Metal Prime Coat: Alkyd Rust Inhibitive Paint Finish: Two coats Satin/Alkyd

PAINTING AND STAINING 09 90 00 - 2

C. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard Prime Coat: Vinyl Acrylic Latex Finish: Two coats Satin/Latex or Epoxy as indicated D. Ductliner Clips: Sherwin-Williams Product: Interior Latex. Finish: Eggshell/Satin.

Color: Sherwin-Williams Caviar #6990.

3.05 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS A. Paint miscellaneous objects including, but not limited to, flashings, vents, exhaust fans, roof drains

etc., color as selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s standard palette.

3.06 CORRECTIONS AND CLEAN UP A. All adjoining surfaces, finished floors and fixtures shall be carefully protected throughout the painting

operations. Protect painted surfaces until final acceptance of Work.

3.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver stock of extra materials to Tenant, in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements.

END OF SECTION 09 90 00 - PAINTING AND STAINING

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED WALL PANEL SYSTEM 09 98 13 - 1

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 09 98 13 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED WALL PANEL SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide and Install full height at roof ladder and as a 48” wainscot on walls as indicated on Room Finish Schedule.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide samples of panels and trim for color and finish approval in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. USB Interiors or approved substitute.

2.02 MATERIALS A. Fiberglass reinforced panel “Tufliner” #9121, embossed finish, Class ‘A’. B. Refer to Architect’s Room Finish Schedule for exact locations. Verify colors prior to ordering.


A. General: Erect plumb, level and true and securely attached to walls and floors. Exercise particular care to avoid damage to the finished partitions, walls or floors.

END OF SECTION 09 98 13 – FIBERGLASS REINFORCED WALL PANEL SYSTEM

INTERIOR PLASTIC SIGNS 10 06 10 - 1

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 10 06 10 INTERIOR PLASTIC SIGNS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Engraved plastic signs. 1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Division 1 General Requirements. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. All delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements.

1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not install signs when ambient temperature is below 70o F. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. DiVinci Signs B. Approved Substitute. 2.02 SIGN TYPES

A. Men: One (1) location. Color to be selected by Tenant. B. Women: One (1) location. Color to be selected by Tenant. C. Unisex: One (1) location. Color to be selected by Tenant. D. Host Station: Color to be selected by Tenant. E. Customer Service: Color to be selected by Tenant. F. Stairway Signage as required by Building Code. G. Other signs as shown on the Door Schedule on Architectural Drawings and as required by local

governing codes. 2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Tape Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions.

END OF SECTION 10 06 10 – INTERIOR PLASTIC SIGNS

SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 16 - 1

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P# 1709 SECTION 10 21 16 SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data 1. Submit in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. B85 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Die Castings. 2. B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 3. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 286 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Contribution of Wall and Ceiling Interior Finish to Room Fire Growth.


A. Compartment Configurations 1. Toilet Partitions: Floor mounted, overhead braced. 2. Urinal screens: Wall mounted. Shall be sealed and braced.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review: 1. Shop Drawings shall be in accordance with Division 01 – General Requirements. Include

dimensioned layout, elevations, trim, closures, and accessories. 2. Product Data: Shall be in accordance with Division 01 – General Requirements. Include

Manufacturer's descriptive data for panels, hardware, and accessories. Samples: Shall be in accordance with Division 01 – General Requirements.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years experience in manufacture of solid plastic toilet compartments with products in satisfactory use under similar service conditions.

B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years experience in work. 1.06 WARRANTIES

A. Provide Manufacturer’s 25 year warranty against breakage, corrosion, and delamination under normal conditions.


A. Approved Manufacturer: Scranton Products. B. Approved Substitute. 2.02 MATERIALS

A. Style: Hiny Hiders 1. Doors, Panels and Pilasters:

a. High density polyethylene (HDPE), fabricated from extruded polymer resins, forming single thickness panel.

b. Waterproof and nonabsorbent, with self-lubricating surface, resistant to marks by pens, pencils, markers, and other writing instruments.

c. 1 inch thick with edges rounded to 1/4 inch radius. d. Recycled content: Minimum 25 percent. e. Fire hazard classification: Class A flame spread/smoke developed rating, tested to

ASTM E84. f. Color: Mosaic Onyx.

2. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, 6463-T5 alloy and temper. 3. Aluminum Die Castings: ASTM B85, A380 alloy. 4. Injection Molded Plastic: High density polyethylene. 5. Rubber: Abrasion resistant Styrene Butadiene Rubber, 65 to 80 Shore A durometer, Black.

SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 16 - 2

2.03 HARDWARE A Hinges:

1. Inswing hinges: a. Hidden pivot type fabricated from heavy-duty cast aluminum. b. Auto-close feature, adjustable to 15 degree open position. c. Mounted to doors with stainless steel Torx head screws and through bolted to metal

post with tamper proof Torx head sex bolts. d. Hinge pivot point: 6 to 8 inches from edge of door; maintain sufficient clearance to

water closet. 2. Outswing hinges:

a. Fabricated from extruded aluminum. b. Auto-close feature, adjustable to 15 degree open position. c. Surface mounted to doors with stainless steel Torx head screws and fastened to metal

posts with countersunk tamper proof screws. 3. Provide for field adjustment of plus or minus 0.125 inch laterally and plus or minus 0.125

inch vertically. B. Door Keeper:

1. inches long, fabricated from heavy duty extruded aluminum, clear anodized finish. 2. Mount in gap between dividing panel and door.

C. Latch and Housing: 1. Heavy duty extruded aluminum. 2. Latch housing: Clear anodized finish. 3. Slide bolt and button: Black anodized finish.

D. Coat Hook/Bumper: Combination type, chrome plated Zamak. E. Door Pulls and Push Plates:

1. Heavy duty extruded aluminum, clear anodized finish. 2. Single component providing door pull capability on outswing doors.

2.04 COMPONENTS

A. Doors and Dividing Panels: 1. 62 inches high, mounted 8 to 14 inches above finished floor. 2. Doors: 60 degree angle on two opposite edges for enhanced privacy. 3. Dividing panels: Two modular pieces, both slotted on one edge to accept wall bracket.

B. Metal Posts: 82.75 inches high, heavy duty extruded aluminum, clear anodized finish, fastened to foot with stainless steel tamper resistant screw.

C. Hidden Shoe (Foot): One-piece molded polyethylene invisible shoe inserted into metal post and secured to metal post with stainless steel tamper resistant screw.

D. Headrail Cap and Corner Cap: One-piece molded polyethylene secured to metal post with stainless steel tamper resistant screw; adjustable to level headrail to finished floor.

E. Hidden Wall Brackets: 61 inches long, heavy-duty extruded aluminum, clear anodized finish, inserted into slotted panel and fastened to panels with stainless steel tamper resistant screws.

F. Headrail: Heavy duty extruded aluminum, designer anti-grip design, clear anodized finish, fastened to headrail bracket with stainless steel tamper resistant screw and to headrail cap or corner cap with stainless steel tamper resistant screw.

G. Headrail Brackets: Heavy duty extruded aluminum, clear anodized finish, secured to wall with stainless steel tamper screws.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. INSTALLATION 1. Install compartments in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved Shop

Drawings. 2. Install rigid, straight, plumb, and level. 3. Locate bottom edge of doors and panels twelve (12) inches above finished floor. 4. Provide uniform, maximum 3/8 inch vertical clearance at doors. 5. Not Acceptable: Evidence of cutting, drilling, or patching.

B. ADJUSTING

1. Adjust doors and latches to operate correctly.

END OF SECTION 10 21 16 - SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 28 13 - 1

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P# 1709 SECTION 10 28 13 TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data 1. Submit in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPONENTS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Bobrick Washroom Equip. Inc. 2. Bradley Corp. 3. American Specialties, Inc. 4. American Dispenser Co. 5. Charles Parker Co. 6. Approved Substitute

B. Accessory Type: Bobrick Washroom Equipment as indicated on Drawings or approved equal. 2.02 FINISHES

A. All finishes are to be Stainless Steel or Polished Aluminum. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General Contractor to confirm locations of blocking in walls as needed for grab bars and any other toilet accessories.

B. Install toilet accessory units in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions. C. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces after removing temporary labels and protective coatings.

END OF SECTION 10 28 13 - TOILET ACCESSORIES

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 10 44 16 - 1

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 10 44 16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS PART 1 – GENERAL NOTE: Fire extinguishers are to be provided by the General Contractor through separate contract with the Tenant. Cabinets and Installation of cabinets is part of General Contractor’s Base Bid/Work for the Landlord. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide new UL listed fire extinguishers bearing UL “Listing Mark” for extinguishers indicated. 1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: 1. Submit in accordance with Division 1 General Requirements. 2. Provide Schematic Drawing showing types of extinguishers, quantities and locations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. J.L. Industries. 6. Standard Fire Hose Co. 2. Larsens Mfg. Co. 7. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co. 3. Norris Industries. 8. General Fire Extinguisher Corp. 4. Seco Manufacturing, Inc. 9. Alenco. 5. Potter-Roemer 10. Approved Substitute.

B. Extinguishers: 10# multi-purpose A-B-C type from J.L. Industries Ambassador Semi-Recessed and Surface-Mounted Cabinets, with FE letters.


A. Extinguishers: Install at locations selected by Fire Authority and approved by the Tenant, and leave fully charged. Verify Quantities required with Fire Authority, prior to ordering.

END OF SECTION 10 44 16 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS

METAL LOCKERS 10 51 13 - 1

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 10 51 13 METAL LOCKERS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE

A. Furnish and install new steel lockers, accessories and finish metal trim as shown or indicated on drawings. Concrete or masonry bases, wood furring, blocking or trim as may be required by drawings are included in other Sections of this Specification.

B. Lockers Product and Installation is to be performed by the General Contractor under separate contract with the Tenant.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing locker types, sizes, quantities, including all necessary details relating to anchoring, trim installation and relationship to adjacent surfaces. Submit in accordance with Division 1 General Requirements.

B. Numbering: Locker numbering sequence will be provided by the approving authority and noted on approved drawings returned to the locker Contractor.

C. Color Charts: Provide color charts showing Manufacturer’s available colors. Color to be approved by Tenant prior to ordering.


A. Uniformity: Provide each type of metal locker as produced by a single Manufacturer, including necessary installation accessories, fittings and fasteners.

B. Job conditions: Do not deliver metal lockers until building is enclosed and ready for locker installation. Protect from damage during delivery, handling, storage and installation. Division 1 - General Requirements.

PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER

A. Manufacturer to be one of the following: 1. Republic Storage Systems Company, Inc. 3. Penco Products, Inc. 2. Lyon Metal Products. 4. Approved Substitute.

2.02 LOCKERS

A. Style: Double Tier B. Type: Quiet Locker with 6 in. legs by Republic Storage Systems. C. Size: 12” x 12” x 36”. D. Color: To be selected by Tenant.

2.03 FABRICATION - GENERAL

A. Material: All major steel parts shall be made of mild cold rolled steel. B. Construction: Lockers shall be pre-assembled of welded construction in multiple groups conforming

with job requirements. C. Door Frames: Shall be 16 gauge formed into deep 1” face channel shapes with a continuous vertical

door strike integral with the frame on both sides of the door opening. D. Doors: Double tier doors shall be formed from one piece. Doors shall be 14 gauge formed steel G. Latching: Shall be one-piece, pre-lubricated, spring steel latch completely contained within the lock

bar, under tension, to provide a rattle-free operation. H. Handles: All handle parts shall be made from sturdy zinc die cast material. K. Body: All locker body components shall be made of cold rolled steel specially formed for added

strength and rigidity. M. Number Plates: Each locker shall have a polished aluminum number plate with black numerals not

less than 1/2” high. N. Finish: the surfaces of the steel shall be thoroughly cleaned and phosphatized in a seven-stage

process. All parts shall be finished with a heavy coat of enamel, baked on at 300 degrees for 30 minutes.

Q. Color: Doors, frames and all body parts shall be finished in colors selected by Tenant from Manufacturer’s collection of standard colors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

METAL LOCKERS 10 51 13 - 2

3.01 INSTALLATION A. Lockers must be installed in accordance with Manufacturer’s approved drawings. Installation shall

be level and plumb with flush surfaces and rigid attachment to anchoring surfaces. B. Adjustment: Upon completion of installation, inspect lockers and adjust as necessary for proper door

and locking mechanism operation.

END OF SECTION 10 51 13 - METAL LOCKERS

END OF DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

LOCK BOX(ES) 11 90 00 - 1

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 11 90 00 LOCK BOX(ES) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements. B. Product Data: Submit copies of Manufacturer’s specifications and standard detail drawings for

panels products in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements. C. Certificates: Manufacturer’s forms to be signed by Local Fire Authority.


A. Coordination: 1. Contractor shall obtain required forms from Manufacturer and forward them to the Local

Fire Department for signature. A copy should be sent to the Architect and Owner. 2. Manufacturer will not ship lock box(es) until they receive executed forms from the Fire

Department. B. Locations of lock box(es) are approximate. Verify exact locations where lock box(es) are required

with Local Fire Authority and the Architect prior to installation. C. Heard about the vampire who was locked up in an asylum? D. He went bats.

1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Delivery: Deliver materials in sealed, undamaged containers, identified with material name, date of manufacture and lot number and store products to prevent damage and excessive exposure to damage by other trades.

B. All delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements.


A. Lock Box: High Security, surface-mounted, liftoff-face, steel; “Knox-Box” Model 3201, as manufactured by The Knox Co., Phoenix, AZ (800.522.5669). 1. Size: 7 inches wide x 7 inches high x 3 inches deep. 2. Door shall be weatherstripped. 3. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard primer and polyester powder coat in Black.

B. Silicone Sealant: One-part, neutral-cure, gun grade, conforming to ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25; GE “Silpruf 2000,” Dow Corning “790 Building Sealant”, or Approved Substitute.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install lock box in accordance with Manufacturer’s directions.

B. Mount of Height indicated on Architectural Elevations Drawings. C. Seal around lock box frame, if required, with silicone sealant.

END OF SECTION 11 90 00 - LOCK BOX(ES)

END OF DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT

MANUFACTURED SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL COMPONENTS 13 48 13 - 1

DIVISION 13-SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 13 48 13 MANUFACTURED SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL COMPONENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: vibration absorption material. 1.02 REFERENCES

A. General: Standards listed by reference, and are identified by issuing authority, authority abbreviation, designation number or title by issuing authority.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM E90-02 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound

Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions in accordance with Division 1 – General Requirements. Sales/Support: 800.397.8791; www.soundproofingcompany.com [email protected] 2441 Great Northern Dr., Fargo, ND 58102; 989-832-1602; [email protected] www.GreenGlueCompany.com


A. Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer with experience with similar projects. B. Materials Qualifications: Provide ASTM test reports from independent laboratories with NVLAP

certification of standards compliance, documenting product performance specified for: 1. Acoustical properties 2. Physical properties 3. Fire-related properties

C. Receiving, Storage and Handling 1. Verify the quantity and condition of materials received. 2. Provide secure area for storage. 3. Keep material from freezing, keep above 40 degrees F.

D. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by Manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside Manufacturer's absolute limits.


A. Manufacturer: The Green Glue Company 1. Substitutions shall not be considered.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Provide Green Glue Viscoelastic damping compound. 1. Substitutions shall not be considered.

B. Physical Properties: 1. Active Content: 68% +/-5%. 2. Working Time: 30 minutes at room temperature. 3. Viscosity: Light Paste 65,000 cpd. 4. Color: Green. 5. VOC: >2 g/l. 6. Flash Point: >200 degrees F. 7. Application Temperature: 40 to 90 degrees F.

C. Fire-related Properties: 1. Product is able to be inserted into fire-rated assembly per the International Building Code.


A. Verification of Site Conditions 1. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. 2. Do not begin if room temperature is below freezing.

MANUFACTURED SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL COMPONENTS 13 48 13 - 2

3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly before installation. B. Follow the Manufacturer’s guidelines for preparation and installation.

3.03 GENERAL MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Refer to and comply with Manufacturer’s installation instructions. B. Green Glue allows for 30 minutes of work time, however, assemble the panels as soon as possible. C. Green Glue will reach optimal performance in 30 days after assembly. D. Cleanup with soap and water while glue is wet. E. Green Glue contains no hazardous materials. Dispose of empty containers as with any building

material. 3.04 INSTRUCTIONS FOR USING GREEN GLUE WITH DRYWALL

A. Construct standard wall framing. B. Install the first standard layer of drywall as normal. C. Remove any dust or debris from drywall surfaces to be glued. D. Apply prescribed quantity of Green Glue in a random pattern to the back of the second layer of

drywall. E. Assemble the coated drywall layer to the first layer and screw into place as normal.

1. Use standard drywall screws. 2. Screw the second layer into the wall studs. 3. Screw spacing according to local building code.

F. Seal the assembly with caulk or sealant. 1. Seal the intersection of the wall and floor. 2. Seal any gaps between walls and ceiling. 3. Seal the electrical boxes.

G. Drywall can be finished immediately after wall assembly 3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Repair or replace any mechanical damage or deficiencies before Substantial Completion.

3.06 CLEANING A. Clean up in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements.

END OF SECTION 13 48 13 MANUFACTURED SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL COMPONENTS

END DIVISION 13- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 22 10 00 PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS

PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS 22 10 00 - 1

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe hangers and supports. 2. Pipe and pipe fittings. 3. Valves. 4. Piping specialties. 5. Plumbing drainage specialties. 6. Plumbing supply specialties. 7. Plumbing pumps.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: 1. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load carrying

capacity. 2. Valves: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for each

service. 3. Plumbing drainage specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information with sizes,

capacities, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. 4. Plumbing supply specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information with sizes,

capacities, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. 5. Pumps: Include capacities, pump curves, equipment performance, and electrical

characteristics.

B. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Design data, indicate pipe sizes, load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts lists and maintenance procedures.


A. Perform Work in accordance with all international, state and local codes.

B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Furnish standard manufacturer warranty for pumps.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Furnish materials in accordance with all international, state and local codes.

B. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.

C. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

D. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.

E. Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated, carbon-steel adjustable, ring.

2.2 PIPES AND TUBES

A. Sanitary Sewer Piping:

Above Grade: 1. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight, with neoprene gaskets and stainless

steel clamps. (within return air plenum if required)

Buried Within 5 Feet of Building: 1. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665 polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material.

a. Fittings: PVC, ASTM D2665. b. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.

2. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665, ASTM D3034, or ASTM F679 with PVC fittings and elastomeric gasket joints.

3. Water Piping, Buried Within 5 Feet of Building: Copper Tubing: ASTM B42, Tempered Type K annealed without fittings.

B. Water Piping: 1. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L drawn, with cast brass or wrought copper fittings

and Grade 95TA solder joints.

Storm Water Piping:

Above Grade: 1. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 service weight with neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum.

Insulated. Buried Within 5 Feet of Building: 1. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034 SDR 26, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material.

a. Fittings: PVC, ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034. b. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.

C. Equipment Drains and Overflows:



1. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L drawn, cast brass, wrought copper fittings, lead free solder joints.

2. PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40, or ASTM D2241, SDR 21 or 26, PVC fittings, solvent weld joints.

D. Flue and Combustion Air Piping: 1. PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material.

a. Fittings: ASTM D2466, Schedule 40, PVC. b. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.

Prime joints with a contrasting color.

2.3 VALVES

A. Furnish materials in accordance with all international, state and local codes.

B. For drinking water service, provide valves complying with NSF 61.

C. Ball Valves: 1. Up to 2 inches: Bronze or stainless steel one piece body, chrome plated brass ball, teflon

seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle, solder or threaded ends. 2. Over 2 inches: Cast steel flanged body, chrome plated steel ball, Teflon seat and stuffing

box seals and lever handle.

D. Plug Valves: 1. Up to 2 inches: Bronze body, bronze tapered plug, non-lubricated, Teflon packing,

threaded ends. 2. Over 2 inches: Cast iron body and plug, pressure lubricated, Teflon packing, flanged

ends.

E. Swing Check Valves: 1. Up to 2 inches: Bronze body and swing disc, solder or threaded ends. 2. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends.

F. Spring Loaded Check Valves: 1. Iron body, bronze trim with threaded, wafer or flanged ends and stainless steel spring

with renewable composition disc.

G. Relief Valves: 1. Bronze body, Teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure

actuated capacities ASME certified and labeled.

2.4 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Flanges, Unions, and Couplings: 1. Pipe Size 2 inches and Under: Malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous piping; bronze

unions for copper pipe, soldered joints. 2. Pipe Size Over 2 inches: Forged steel flanges for ferrous piping; bronze flanges for

copper piping; preformed neoprene gaskets. 3. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings: Malleable iron housing, C-shape elastomer

composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers.



4. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier.

B. Strainers:

C. Furnish materials in accordance with all international, state and local codes. 1. Size 2 inches and Under: Threaded brass or iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y

pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen. 2. Size 2-1/2 inch to 4 inch: Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern

with 3/64 inch stainless steel perforated screen.

D. Flexible Connectors:

E. Furnish materials in accordance with all international, state and local codes. 1. Corrugated stainless steel hose with single layer of stainless steel exterior braiding,

minimum 9 inches long with copper tube ends; for maximum working pressure 300 psig .

2.5 PLUMBING DRAINAGE SPECIALTIES

A. Roof Drains: 1. Reference plumbing fixture schedule shown on the contract drawings.

B. Floor Drains: 1. Reference plumbing fixture schedule shown on the contract drawings.

C. Floor Sinks: 1. Reference plumbing fixture schedule shown on the contract drawings.

D. Grease Interceptors: 1. Reference plumbing fixture schedule shown on the contract drawings.

E. Cleanouts: 1. Reference plumbing fixture schedule shown on the contract drawings.

2.6 PLUMBING SUPPLY SPECIALTIES

A. Backflow Preventers: 1. Reference plumbing fixture schedule shown on the contract drawings.

B. Water Hammer Arrestors: 1. Reference plumbing fixture schedule shown on the contract drawings.

C. Thermostatic Mixing Valves: 1. Reference plumbing fixture schedule shown on the contract drawings.

D. Hose Bibbs/Hydrants: 1. Reference plumbing fixture schedule shown on the contract drawings.

E. Diaphragm-type Compression Tanks: 1. Reference plumbing fixture schedule shown on the contract drawings.



2.7 IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS 1. Reference pump schedule shown on the contract drawings.

PIPING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.

B. Where contradictions occur between this Section and Division 1, the most stringent of the

two shall apply. 1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's product data on the following: 1. Insulation. 2. Jackets, coatings and protective finishes. 3. Sealers, mastics and adhesives. 4. Fitting covers.

1.3 FLAME AND SMOKE RATINGS

A. Provide composite installation (insulation, jacket, covering, sealer, mastic and adhesive) complying with the following: 1. Flame Spread: 25 or Less. 2. Smoke Developed: 50 or Less. 3. Method: ASTM E84 (NFPA 255).

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY

A. Deliver insulation products in factory containers bearing manufacturer's label showing fire hazard rating, density and thickness.

1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. Exposed Location: Located in mechanical rooms or other rooms.

B. Concealed Location: Located in pipe chases, furred spaces, attics, crawl-spaces, above suspended ceilings, or other locations not exposed to view.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE INSULATION

A. Manufacturers: 1. Design Basis: Johns Manville 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Armstrong.



b. Certainteed. c. Foster. d. Owens-Corning. e. Knauf.

B. Materials:

1. Fiberglass Pipe Insulation: Schuller Micro-Lok 850, heavy density pipe insulation with AP-T jacket.

2. Fiberglass Pipe Fitting Insulation: Schuller "Zeston" fitting covers with factory-cut fiberglass insulation insert.

3. Flexible Unicellular Pipe Insulation: Rubatex, Armaflex or Imcolock.

C. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following: 1. Fiberglass pipe insulation above ground inside buildings. 2. Flexible unicellular pipe insulation on outdoor chilled water and refrigerant

piping. 3. Flexible unicellular pipe insulation on water piping under slab.

D. Thickness:

1. Domestic Hot and Cold Water Piping (Above Grade): a. All sizes: 1”.

d. Run-outs up to 2”: 1/2" Fiberglass.2. Roof Drains and Bowls and Roof Drainage Piping:

a. All sizes: 1” Fiberglass. E. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following:

1. Fiberglass pipe insulation above ground inside buildings. 2. Flexible unicellular pipe insulation underground.

2.2 PIPE AND FITTING COVERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Design Basis: John Manville. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Armstrong. b. Certainteed. c. Knauf.

B. Material: UV Resistant PVC.

C. Thickness: 0.020 inches.

D. Fire and Smoke Rating: 25/50.

E. Closure System: Solvent glue continuous all joints and seams.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavate.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.

B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside piping before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.3 INSTALLATION - INSERTS

A. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms.

B. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams.

C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches.

D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.

E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab.

3.4 INSTALLATION - PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Install dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.

B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.

C. Route piping parallel to building structure and maintain gradient.

D. Install piping to maintain headroom. Group piping to conserve space. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.

F. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.

G. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors.



H. Install piping system allowing clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.

I. Install identification on piping systems.

J. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.

3.5 INSTALLATION - VALVES

A. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

B. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.

C. Install ball valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.

D. Install spring loaded check valves on discharge of pumps.

E. Install plug valves for throttling service. Install non-lubricated plug valves only when shut-off or isolating valves are also installed.

3.6 INSTALLATION - PLUMBING SUPPLY PIPING

A. Install water piping in accordance with ASME B31.9.

B. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 31 20 00.

C. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to obtain not less than 5.0 ft of cover.

D. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies.

E. Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points.

F. Install piping from relief valves, back-flow preventers and drains to nearest floor drain.

G. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold water supply piping where indicated on the Drawings.

H. Provide water service complete with approved reduced pressure principle back-flow preventer and water pressure reducing valve. Install flow controls in water circulating systems as indicated on Drawings.

I. Disinfecting of Domestic Water Systems: 1. Prior to starting, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. 2. Verify pH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or

soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric).



3. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder and tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain residual from 50 to 80 mg/L.

4. Bleed water from outlets to obtain distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets.

5. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. 6. When final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. 7. Flush disinfectant from system until residual concentration is equal to incoming water or

1.0 mg/L. 8. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from

water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651. 9. Install Work in accordance Reference plumbing fixture schedule shown on the contract

drawings.

J. INSTALLATION - PLUMBING DRAINAGE PIPING

K. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.

L. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Install with clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system.

M. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.

N. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.

O. Establish elevations of buried piping outside building to provide not less than 4 ft of cover.

P. Install piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly.

Q. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 31 20 00.

R. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.

S. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/4 inch per foot, 2 percent minimum. Maintain gradients.

T. Test drainage piping in accordance with local code requirements. 1. Install Work in accordance Reference plumbing fixture schedule shown on the contract

drawings.

U. INSTALLATION - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

V. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.

W. Install hangers with minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.

X. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.



Y. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.

Z. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with maximum spacing between hangers per IPC.

AA. Where piping is installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe or trapeze hangers.

BB. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.

CC. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.

DD. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.

EE. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. 3.7 PIPE INSULATION

A. Installation: 1. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to testing and acceptance of tests. 2. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces.

a. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with a single cut piece to complete the run.

b. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other. 3. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating.

a. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure a complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.

4. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.

5. Install protective sheet metal shield around bottom half of pipe insulation at each pipe support sufficient to prevent crushing of the insulation.

6. Except as noted, cover valves, flanges, fittings, Victaulic couplings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. a. Install factory-molded, pre-cut or job-fabricated units (at Installer's

option), except where a specific form or type is indicated. b. Do not cover:

(1) Valve operators. (2) Threaded or solder joint strainers. (3) Balancing valves. (4) Blow-down end of strainers except on chilled water. (5) Stem of balancing valves. (6) Vibration isolators.

7. Mark location of unions and flanges covered by insulation with permanent paint or ink, painted stencil or approved label.

8. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on insulation of cold pipes, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage.



9. Insulate between pipe and pipe saddles. 10. Seal ends of sections with vapor barrier cement at:

a. 21 ft. intervals. b. Valves and fittings.

11. Replace existing insulation removed or damaged because of work on this project. 12. Do not insulate basket access flange of flanged strainers except on chilled water.

3.8 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT

A. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturation.

B. Protection: The insulation Installer shall advise the Contractor of required protection for the

insulation work during the remainder of the construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration

3.9 INSTALLATION - PUMPS

A. Reference diagrams on the Drawings.

3.10 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM

A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. Verify pH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric).

B. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual. Bleed water from outlets to accomplish distribution.

C. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. When final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.

D. Flush disinfectant from system. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C601.

END OF SECTION 22 10 00 – PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS

DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATION & AIR CONDITIONING Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 1

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment. 2. Sleeves. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 4. Formed steel channel. 5. Firestopping relating to HVAC work. 6. Firestopping accessories.


A. Firestopping: Conform to FM for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics.

B. Firestopping: Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of materials used.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for piping and equipment identification list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for pipe identification and valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number.

B. Product Data for Pipe and Equipment Identification: Submit for mechanical identification manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.


A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Colorado and Larimer County Standards.

B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

A. Manufacturers: 1. Craftmark 2. Brady 3. Kolbi 4. Seton 5. Substitutions: Permitted

B. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1.



2.02 SLEEVES

A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel.

B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 thick galvanized steel.

C. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Galvanized steel.

D. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Galvanized steel or wood.

E. Sealant: Acrylic for non-fire rated.

2.03 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Furnish materials in accordance with State of Colorado and Larimer County Standards.

B. Product Description: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.

2.04 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL

A. Furnish materials in accordance with State of Louisiana and Larimer County Standards.

B. Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage thick steel. With holes 1-1/2 inches on center.

2.05 FIRESTOPPING

A. Manufacturers: 1. 3M Fire Protection 2. DAP 3. Tremco 4. Grabber 5. Substitutions: Permitted

B. Product Description: Different types of products by multiple manufacturers are acceptable as required to meet specified system description and performance requirements; provide only one type for each similar application. 1. Silicone Firestopping Elastomeric Firestopping: Single component silicone elastomeric

compound and compatible silicone sealant. 2. Intumescent Firestopping: Intumescent putty compound which expands on exposure to

surface heat gain.

2.06 FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces and suitable for required fire ratings.



B. Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and other devices required to position and retain materials in place.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.06 EXAMINATION

A. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves.

3.07 INSTALLATION - PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Install plastic nameplates with adhesive.

B. Install plastic tags with corrosion resistant metal chain.

3.08 INSTALLATION - SLEEVES

A. Exterior watertight entries: Seal with mechanical sleeve seals.

B. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.

C. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.

D. Extend sleeves through floors 1inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves.

E. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with firestopping insulation and caulk airtight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.

F. Install stainless steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.

3.09 INSTALLATION - FIRESTOPPING

A. Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves, piping, ductwork, conduit and other items, requiring firestopping.

END OF SECTION 23 05 00 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATION & AIR CONDITIONING Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 23 07 00 HVAC INSULATION

HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00 - 1/3

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. HVAC ductwork insulation, jackets, and accessories.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

B. Product Data: Submit product description, thermal characteristics and list of materials and thickness for each service, and location.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturers published literature indicating proper installation procedures.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Test pipe insulation for maximum flame spread index of 25 and maximum smoke developed index of not exceeding 50 in accordance with ASTM E84.

B. Factory fabricated fitting covers manufactured in accordance with ASTM C450.

C. Perform Work in accordance with State of Colorado and Larimer County Standards.


A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness.

B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, by storing in original wrapping.

1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions are within range recommended by manufacturer.

B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.04 MANUFACTURER

A. Manufacturers; Glass Fiber and Mineral Fiber Insulation: 1. Johns Manville 2. Certainteed



3. Owens Corning 4. Knauf 5. Substitutions: Not permitted

2.02 REFRIGERANT PIPE INSULATION

A. ASTM C534, Grade 1, Type I, flexible, closed cell elastomeric insulation, tubular.

1 Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F (0.039 at 25 degrees C). 2. Insulation shall have a flame spread index of less than 25 and a smoke developed

index of less than 50 as tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Insulation shall be manufactured without the use of CFC’s, HFC’s or HCFC’s. The

insulation shall be formaldehyde free, low VOC’s, fiber free, dust free and resistant to mold and mildew.

4. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu-in/h-ft² at 75ºF mean temperature as tested in accordance with ASTM C 177 or ASTM C 518.

2.03 REFRIGERANT PIPE INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation Pipe Hanger: Polyurethane insert with aluminum single piece construction with self adhesive closure. Thickness to match pipe insulation.

B. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation. 1. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu-in/h-ft² at 75ºF mean temperature as

tested in accordance with ASTM C 177 or ASTM C 518.

B. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation.

2.06 DUCTWORK INSULATION 1. ASTM C1290, Type III, flexible glass fiber, commercial grade with factory applied

reinforced aluminum foil jacket meeting ASTM C1136, Type II. 2. Thermal Conductivity: 0.30 at 75 degrees F. 3. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 degrees F 4. Density: 0.75 pound per cubic foot. 5. R-value: 1-1/2” R 5.1, 2” R 6.8 @ 75 degrees F 6. Maximum 25% compression.

2.07 DUCTWORK INSULATION JACKETS

A. Vapor Retarder Jacket: 1. FSK jacket with puncture resistance of 25 (TAPPI Test T803) 2. Water vapor transmission: ASTM E96/E96M; 0.02 perm. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.

2.08 DUCTWORK INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. Vapor Retarder Tape: 1. FSK or foil tape, minimum 3” wide.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify refrigerant piping and ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials.

B. Verify surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.

3.02 INSTALLATION – REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEMS

C. Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation: 1. Push insulation on to piping. 2. Miter joints at elbows. 3. Seal seams and butt joints with manufacturer’s recommended adhesive. 4. When application requires multiple layers, apply with joints staggered. 5. Insulate fittings and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent

pipe. 6. 12 Mil PVC jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping.

3.03 INSTALLATION - DUCTWORK SYSTEMS

A. Duct dimensions indicated on Drawings are finished inside dimensions.

B. Insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature: 1. Provide insulation with vapor retarder jackets. 2. Finish with tape and vapor retarder jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible

connections, and expansion joints.

C. Insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature: 1. Provide with or without standard vapor retarder jacket. 2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of

insulation.

D. Ductwork Exposed in Finished Spaces: Finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting. 1. Attach insulation using steel banding or by welded pins and clips. 2. Install insulation without sag on underside of ductwork. Use additional fasteners to

prevent sagging.

END OF SECTION 23 07 00-HVAC INSULATION

DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATION & AIR CONDITIONING Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 23 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC

Commissioning of HVAC 23 08 00 - 1

SECTION 23 08 00 - COMMISSIONING OF HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. HVAC commissioning description. 2. HVAC commissioning responsibilities.

1.02 COMMISSIONING DESCRIPTION

A. HVAC commissioning process includes the following tasks: 1. Testing and startup of HVAC equipment and systems. 2. Equipment and system verification checks. 3. Assistance in functional performance testing to verify testing and balancing, and equipment

and system performance. 4. Provide qualified personnel to assist in commissioning tests, including seasonal testing. 5. Complete and endorse functional performance test checklists provided by Commissioning

Authority to assure equipment and systems are fully operational and ready for functional performance testing.

6. Provide equipment, materials, and labor necessary to correct deficiencies found during commissioning process to fulfill contract and warranty requirements.

7. Provide operation and maintenance information and record drawings to Commissioning Authority for review verification and organization, prior to distribution.

8. Provide assistance to Commissioning Authority to develop, edit, and document system operation descriptions.

9. Provide training for systems specified in this Section with coordination by Commissioning Authority.

B. Equipment and Systems to Be Commissioned: 1. New HVAC systems that were installed under this contract.

C. The following is a partial list of equipment that may be included in this HVAC Commissioning: 1. Pumps. 2. Boilers. 3. Piping systems. 4. Ductwork. 5. Variable frequency drives. 6. Packaged roof top air conditioning units. 7. Split system air conditioning units. 8. Humidifiers. 9. Air handling units. 10. Rooftop unit RTU-1 thru RTU-10 duct system. 11. Packaged heat pump units. 12. Unit heaters. 13. Heat exchangers. 14. Computer room units.



15. Variable volume terminal units. 16. Fans. 17. Fire dampers. 18. Indoor air quality. 19. Equipment sound control. 20. Equipment vibration control. 21. Dust collection system. 22. Kitchen hood supply systems. 23. Kitchen hood exhaust systems. 24. Automatic HVAC control system. 25. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing work.

D. Perform seasonal function performance tests for the following equipment and systems: 1. Heating equipment during heating season. 2. Cooling equipment during cooling season.

1.03 COMMISSIONING SUBMITTALS

A. Draft Forms: Submit draft of system verification form and functional performance test checklist.

B. Test Reports: Indicate data on system verification form for each piece of equipment and system as specified. Use AABC forms as guidelines.

C. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies preventing completion of equipment or system verification checks equipment or system to achieve specified performance.


A. Project Record Documents: Record revisions to equipment and system documentation necessitated by commissioning.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit revisions to operation and maintenance manuals when necessary revisions are discovered during commissioning.


A. Perform Work in accordance with ASHRAE Guideline 1 requirements or as per the authority having jurisdiction.

B. Perform Work in accordance with State of Colorado and Larimer County Standards.

C. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

1.06 COMMISSIONING RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Equipment or System Installer Commissioning Responsibilities: 1. Attend commissioning meetings. 2. Ensure temperature controls installer performs assigned commissioning responsibilities as

specified below.



3. Ensure testing, adjusting, and balancing agency performs assigned commissioning responsibilities as specified.

4. Provide instructions and demonstrations for Owner's personnel. 5. Ensure subcontractors perform assigned commissioning responsibilities. 6. Ensure participation of equipment manufacturers in appropriate startup, testing, and training

activities when required by individual equipment specifications. 7. Develop startup and initial checkout plan using manufacturer’s startup procedures and

functional performance checklists for equipment and systems to be commissioned. 8. During verification check and startup process, execute HVAC related portions of checklists

for equipment and systems to be commissioned. 9. Perform and document completed startup and system operational checkout procedures,

providing copy to Commissioning Authority. 10. Provide manufacturer’s representatives to execute starting of equipment. Ensure

representatives are available and present during agreed upon schedules and are in attendance for duration to complete tests, adjustments and problem-solving.

11. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements to maintain validity of warranties.

12. Provide personnel to assist Commissioning Authority during equipment or system verification checks and functional performance tests.

13. Prior to functional performance tests, review test procedures to ensure feasibility, safety and equipment protection and provide necessary written alarm limits to be used during tests.

14. Prior to startup, inspect, check, and verify correct and complete installation of equipment and system components for verification checks included in commissioning plan. When deficient or incomplete work is discovered, ensure corrective action is taken and re-check until equipment or system is ready for startup.

15. Provide factory supervised startup services for equipment and systems specified in Sections 23 30 00 and 23 74 13. Coordinate work with manufacturer and Commissioning Authority.

16. Perform verification checks and startup on equipment and systems as specified. 17. Assist Commissioning Authority in performing functional performance tests on equipment

and systems as specified. 18. Perform operation and maintenance training sessions scheduled by Commissioning

Authority. 19. Conduct HVAC system orientation and inspection.

B. Temperature Controls Installer Commissioning Responsibilities: 1. Attend commissioning meetings. 2. Review design for ability of systems to be controlled including the following:

a. Confirm proper hardware requirements exists to perform functional performance testing.

b. Confirm proper safeties and interlocks are included in design. c. Confirm proper sizing of system control valves and actuators and control valve

operation will result capacity control identified in Contract Documents. d. Confirm proper sizing of system control dampers and actuators and damper operation

will result in proper damper positioning. e. Confirm sensors selected are within device ranges. f. Review sequences of operation and obtain clarification from Architect/Engineer. g. Indicate delineation of control between packaged controls and building automation

system, listing BAS monitor points and BAS adjustable control points.



h. Provide written sequences of operation for packaged controlled equipment. Equipment manufacturers’ stock sequences may be included, when accompanied by additional narrative to reflect Project conditions.

3. Inspect, check, and confirm proper operation and performance of control hardware and software provided in other HVAC sections.

4. Submit proposed procedures for performing automatic temperature control system point-to-point checks to Commissioning Authority and Architect/Engineer.

5. Inspect check and confirm correct installation and operation of automatic temperature control system input and output device operation through point-to-point checks.

6. Perform training sessions to instruct Owner's personnel in hardware operation, software operation, programming, and application in accordance with commissioning plan and requirements of Section 23 74 13.

7. Demonstrate system performance and operation to Commissioning Authority during functional performance tests including each mode of operation.

8. Provide control system technician to assist during Commissioning Authority verification check and functional performance testing.

9. Provide control system technician to assist testing, adjusting, and balancing agency during performance of testing, adjusting, and balancing work.

10. Assist in performing operation and maintenance training sessions scheduled by Commissioning Authority.

C. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency Commissioning Responsibilities: 1. Attend commissioning meetings. 2. Participate in verification of testing, adjusting, and balancing report for verification or

diagnostic purposes. Repeat sample of 10 percent of measurements contained in testing, adjusting, and balancing report as selected by Commissioning Authority.

3. Assist in performing operation and maintenance training sessions scheduled by Commissioning Authority.

1.07 COMMISSIONING MEETINGS

A. Attend initial commissioning meeting and progress commissioning meetings as required by Commissioning Authority.

1.08 SCHEDULING

A. Prepare schedule indicating anticipated start dates for the following: 1. Piping system pressure testing. 2. Piping system flushing and cleaning. 3. Ductwork cleaning. 4. Ductwork pressure testing. 5. Equipment and system startups. 6. Automatic temperature control system checkout. 7. Testing, adjusting, and balancing. 8. HVAC system orientation and inspections. 9. Operation and maintenance manual submittals. 10. Training sessions.



B. Schedule seasonal tests of equipment and systems during peak weather conditions to observe full-load performance.

C. Schedule occupancy sensitive tests of equipment and systems during conditions of both minimum and maximum occupancy or use.

1.09 COORDINATION

A. Notify Commissioning Authority minimum of four weeks in advance of the following: 1. Scheduled equipment and system startups. 2. Scheduled automatic temperature control system checkout. 3. Scheduled start of testing, adjusting, and balancing work.

B. Coordinate programming of automatic temperature control system with construction and commissioning schedules.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install additional balancing dampers, balancing valves, access doors, test ports, and pressure and temperature taps required to meet performance requirements.

B. Place HVAC systems and equipment into full operation and continue operation during each working day of commissioning.

C. Install replacement sheaves and belts to obtain system performance, as requested by Commissioning Authority.

D. Install test holes in ductwork and plenums as requested by Commissioning Authority for taking air measurements.

E. Prior to start of functional performance test, install replacement filters in equipment.

3.02 FIELD TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Seasonal Sensitive Functional Performance Tests: 1. Test heating equipment at winter design temperatures. 2. Test cooling equipment at summer design temperatures with fully occupied building. 3. Participate in testing delayed beyond Final Completion to test performance at peak seasonal

conditions.



B. Be responsible to participate in initial and alternate peak season test of systems required to demonstrate performance.

C. Occupancy Sensitive Functional Performance Tests: 1. Test equipment and systems affected by occupancy variations at minimum and peak loads to

observe system performance. 2. Participate in testing delayed beyond Final Completion to test performance with actual

occupancy conditions.

END OF SECTION 23 08 00-COMMISSIONING OF HVAC

DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATION & AIR CONDITIONING Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 23 11 00 FACILITY FUEL PIPING

FACILITY FUEL PIPING 23 11 00 - 1

SECTION 23 11 00 - FACILITY FUEL PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe hangers and supports. 2. Pipe and pipe fittings. 3. Valves.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: 1. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load carrying

capacity. 2. Valves: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for each

service.

B. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Design data, indicate pipe sizes, load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions for material and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts lists and maintenance procedures.


A. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 54.

B. List and label flexible connectors in accordance with UL 536.

C. Perform Work in accordance with State of Colorado and Larimer County standards.

D. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for pumps.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Furnish materials in accordance with State of Colorado and Larimer County Standards.

B. Conform to ASME B31.9, MSS SP 69

C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron or Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring.

D. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

E. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.

F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 inches: Cast iron hook.

G. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.

H. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

I. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4 inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.

J. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Over: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support.

K. Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated, carbon-steel adjustable, ring.

2.02 PIPES AND TUBES

A. Natural Gas Piping, Buried: 1. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B, Schedule 40 black with polyethylene jacket and

welded joints. 2. Polyethylene Pipe: ASTM D2513, SDR 11.5, with socket type fittings and fusion welded

joints.

B. Natural Gas Piping, above Grade: 1. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B, Schedule 40 black, with malleable iron or forged

steel fittings, screwed or welded. 2. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, annealed with wrought copper fittings and

compression joints. 3. Corrugated Stainless Steel Tubing: ANSI LC 1. 4. Regulator Vent Piping, Above Grade:

a. Indoors: Same as natural gas piping, above grade. b. Outdoors: PVC pipe, tubing, and fittings, UL 651.



2.03 VALVES

A. Furnish materials in accordance with State of Colorado and Larimer County standards.

B. Gate Valves: 1. Up to 2 inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, non-rising stem, hand wheel, inside screw, double

wedge disc, soldered or threaded. 2. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, hand wheel, OS&Y, solid wedge, flanged

or grooved ends.

C. Globe Valves: 1. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem and hand wheel, inside screw,

renewable composition disc, solder or threaded ends, with back seating capacity. 2. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, hand wheel, OS&Y, plug type disc,

flanged ends, renewable seat and disc.

D. Ball Valves: 1. Up to 2 inches: Bronze or stainless steel one piece body, chrome plated brass ball, teflon

seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle, solder or threaded ends. 2. Over 2 inches: Cast steel flanged body, chrome plated steel ball, Teflon seat and stuffing box

seals and lever handle.

E. Plug Valves: 1. Up to 2 inches: Bronze body, bronze tapered plug, non-lubricated, Teflon packing, threaded

ends. 2. Over 2 inches: Cast iron body and plug, pressure lubricated, Teflon packing, flanged ends.

F. Swing Check Valves: 1. Up to 2 inches: Bronze body and swing disc, solder or threaded ends. 2. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends.

G. Spring Loaded Check Valves: 1. Iron body, bronze trim with threaded, wafer or flanged ends and stainless steel spring with

renewable composition disc.

2.04 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Flanges, Unions, and Couplings: 1. Pipe Size 2 inches and Under: Malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous piping; bronze

unions for copper pipe, soldered joints. 2. Pipe Size Over 2 inches: Forged steel flanges for ferrous piping; bronze flanges for copper

piping; preformed neoprene gaskets. 3. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder

end, water impervious isolation barrier.

B. Flexible Connectors: 1. Furnish materials in accordance with State of Colorado and Larimer County standards. 2. Corrugated stainless steel hose with single layer of exterior braiding, minimum 9 inches long

with copper tube ends; for maximum working pressure 300 psig.



C. Pressure Gages: Furnish materials in accordance with State of Colorado and Larimer County standards. 1. Gage: ASME B40.1, UL 404 with bourdon tube, rotary brass movement, brass socket, front

calibration adjustment, black scale on white background. a. Case: Stainless Steel. b. Bourdon Tube: LF Brass and Type 316 stainless steel]. c. Dial Size: 2-1/2 inch diameter. d. Mid-Scale Accuracy: One percent. e. Scale: Psi.

D. Pressure Regulator: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavate.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside piping before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.03 INSTALLATION - INSERTS

A. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms.

B. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams.

C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches.

D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.

E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut flush with top of slab.

3.04 INSTALLATION - PIPING SYSTEM

A. Install dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.

B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.

C. Route piping parallel to building structure and maintain gradient.



D. Install piping to maintain headroom. Group piping to conserve space. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.

F. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.

G. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors.

H. Install piping system allowing clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.

I. For exposed natural gas lines other than steel pipe, attach yellow pipe labels with "GAS" in black lettering, at maximum 5 foot spacing.

J. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.

K. Where required, bend pipe with pipe bending tools in accordance with procedures intended for that purpose.

3.05 INSTALLATION - VALVES

A. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

B. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.

C. Install globe valves for throttling or manual flow control services.

3.06 INSTALLATION - PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Install pressure gages with pulsation dampers. Provide ball valve to isolate each gage. Extend nipples to allow clearance from insulation.

B. Install gages in locations where they are easily read from normal operating level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical.

C. Adjust gages to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate to zero.

3.07 INSTALLATION - FUEL PIPING

A. Install natural gas piping in accordance with ANSI/NFPA Z223.1.

B. Install natural gas piping in accordance with NFPA 54.

C. Size and install gas piping to provide sufficient gas to supply maximum appliance demand at pressure higher than appliance minimum inlet pressure.



D. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.

E. Establish elevations of buried piping outside building to provide not less than 1 ft of cover.

F. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility company.

G. Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in weatherproof hood. Protect vent against entry of insects and foreign material. 1. Minimum Vent Size: Connection size at regulator vent connection. 2. Run individual vent line from each relief device, independent of breather vents. 3. Breather vents may be manifolded together with piping sized for combined appliance vent

requirements.

H. Test natural gas piping in accordance with NFPA 54.

3.08 INSTALLATION - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.

B. Install hangers with minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.

C. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.

D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.

E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers.

F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub.

G. Where piping is installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe or trapeze hangers.

H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.

I. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.

J. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.

K. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.

END OF SECTION 23 11 00-FACILITY FUEL PIPING


HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 30 00 - 1

SECTION 23 05 00 - HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Ductwork. 2. Ductwork accessories. 3. Fans. 4. Terminal units. 5. Air Outlets.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit duct fabrication drawings, drawn to scale not smaller than 1/8 inch equals 1 foot, on drawing sheets same size as Contract Documents, indicating: 1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation details, including plans, elevations, sections, details

of components, and attachments to other work. 2. Duct layout, indicating pressure classifications and sizes in plan view. For exhaust duct

systems, indicate classification of materials handled as defined in this section. 3. Fittings. 4. Reinforcing details and spacing. 5. Seam and joint construction details. 6. Penetrations through fire rated and other walls. 7. Terminal unit and coil installations. 8. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment, vibration isolation, and

duct attachment.

B. Product Data: 1. Submit sizes, capacities, materials, controls and connections to other work. 2. Submit catalog performance ratings, construction, electric and duct connections, flashing and

dimensions for fans and exhausters.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts lists, and wiring diagrams.

D. Samples: Submit two samples of replacement filter media with frame.

E. Field Quality Control Reports

F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit relevant instructions.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for filter replacement, spare parts lists, and wiring diagrams.




A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Colorado and Larimer County Standards. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DUCTWORK

A. Duct Materials: 1. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A653/A653M galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality,

having min. G602.10 oz/sf 2. Steel Ducts: ASTM A1011/A1011M. 3. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws. 4. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36/A36M; steel , galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or

continuously threaded.

B. Ductwork Fabrication: 1. Fabricate and support rectangular ducts in accordance with 2005 SMACNA HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.

2. Fabricate and support round ducts with longitudinal seams in accordance with 2005 SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible (Round Duct Construction Standards). Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.

3. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with minimum radius 1-1/2 times centerline duct width. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide airfoil turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, furnish turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.

4. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream.

5. Provide standard 45-degree lateral wye takeoffs. When space does not allow 45-degree lateral wye takeoff, use 90-degree conical tee connections.

6. Seal joints between duct sections and duct seams with welds, gaskets, mastic adhesives, mastic plus embedded fabric systems, or tape. a. Sealants, Mastics and Tapes: Conform to UL 181A. Provide products bearing

appropriate UL 181A markings. b. Do not provide sealing products not bearing UL approval markings.

C. Insulated Flexible Ducts: Furnish Perform Work in accordance with State of Colorado and Larimer County Standards. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1. Product Description: Two ply vinyl film supported by helical wound spring steel wire;

fiberglass insulation; polyethylene vapor barrier film. 2. Pressure Rating: 10 inches wg positive and 1.0 inches wg negative. 3. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm. 4. Temperature Range: -10 degrees F to 160 degrees F. 5. Thermal Resistance: 4.2square feet-hour-degree F per BTU.



D. Transverse Duct Connection System:

E. Furnish materials in accordance with State of Colorado and Larimer County Standards. 1. Product Description: SMACNA "F" rated rigidity class connection, interlocking angle and

duct edge connection system with sealant, gasket, cleats, and corner clips.

2.02 DUCT ACCESSORIES

A. Volume Control Dampers: 1. Fabricate in accordance with 2005 SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible, and as indicated on Drawings. 2. Fabricate splitter dampers of material matching duct gage to 24 inches size in each direction,

and two gages heavier for larger sizes. Secure with continuous hinge or rod. Operate with minimum 1/4 inch diameter rod.

3. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 12 x 30 inch. 4. Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x 72

inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware.

5. Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, furnish end bearings. 6. Furnish locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. Where

width exceeds 30 inches, furnish regulator at both ends.

B. Turning Devices and Extractors: 1. Multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel or aluminum construction;

with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps. 2. Multi-blade device with radius blades attached to pivoting frame and bracket, steel or

aluminum construction, with push-pull operator strap.

C. Flexible Duct Connections: 1. UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A,

approximately 3 inches wide, crimped into metal edging strip.

D. Duct Access Doors: 1. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible. 2. Access doors smaller than 12 inches square secured with sash locks. Access doors with sheet

metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.

E. Static Fire Dampers: 1. Furnish materials in accordance with State of Colorado and Larimer County Standards. 2. Fire Rating: UL 555 classified and labeled as a 1-1/2 hour static fire damper. 3. Air Flow Rating: UL approved for dual directional air flow. 4. Integral Sleeve Frame: Minimum 20 gage by 12 inches roll formed, galvanized steel. 5. Blades:

a. Style: Curtain type, in airstream. b. Action: Spring or gravity closure upon fusible link release. c. Orientation: Horizontal.

6. Material: Minimum 24 gage roll formed, galvanized steel. 7. Closure Springs: Type 301 stainless steel, constant force type, if required.



8. Temperature Release Device: a. Fusible link, 165 degrees F. b. Mounting: Vertical.

9. Duct Transition Connection, Damper Style: a. B style - rectangular connection, blades out of air stream, high free area.

10. Finish: Mill galvanized. 11. Picture Frame Mounting Angles:

a. One-piece, roll formed retaining angles 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 inches. b. Factory matched and shipped attached to damper.

F. Back-draft Dampers: 1. Furnish materials in accordance with Colorado and Larimer County Standards. 2. Gravity back-draft dampers size 18 x 18 inches or smaller, furnished with air moving

equipment, furnish of air moving equipment manufacturers standard construction. 3. Fabricate multi-blade, parallel action gravity balanced back-draft dampers of galvanized

steel, or extruded aluminum, with center pivoted blades, with sealed edges, linked together, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin.

2.03 FANS

A. Upblast Centrifugal Roof Fans: 1. Manufacturers:

a. Acme b. Penn Barry c. Greenheck d. Twin City. e. Substitutions: Permitted.

2. Fan Unit: Upblast type. V-belt drive, spun aluminum housing; resilient mounted motor; aluminum wire bird screen; square base to suit roof curb with continuous curb gaskets.

3. Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed; variable and adjustable pitch motor sheave selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid-position; fan shaft with self-aligning pre-lubricated ball bearings.

4. Motor:Totally enclosed fan cooled. 5. Roof Curb: 12 high of aluminum construction with continuously welded seams, built-in cant

strips and factory installed nailer strip. 6. Disconnect Switch: Factory wired, non-fusible, in housing for thermal overload protected

motor NEMAType 3Renclosure. 7. Accessories:

a. Backdraft Damper: Gravity actuated, aluminum multiple blade construction, felt edged with offset hinge pin, nylon bearings, blades linked.

2.04 TERMINAL UNITS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Carrier 2. Trane 3. York 4. AAON 5. Lennox



6. Substitutions: Permitted.

B. Ceiling mounted variable air volume supply air control terminals for connection to single duct, central air systems, with hot water heating coils.

C. Identification: Each marked with label and air flow indicator, including unit nominal air flow, maximum factory set airflow, minimum factory set air flow, and coil type.

D. Basic Assembly: 1. Casings: Minimum 22 gage galvanized steel. 2. Lining: Minimum ½ inch thick neoprene or vinyl coated fiberglass insulation. 3. Plenum Air Inlets: Rectangular, not duct attachment 4. Plenum Air Outlets: Round or S-slip and drive connections. 5. Configuration: Primary air valve assembly inside unit casing. Locate control components

inside protective metal shroud. 6. Volume Damper: Construct of galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating

bearings, positioned normally open. 7. Accessories: DDC Controls, air volume sensor.

E. Hot Water Heating Coil: Copper tube mechanically expanded into aluminum plate fins, factory installed.

F. Automatic Damper Operator: 1. Electric Actuator: 24 volt with remote temperature read and reset capability.

G. Thermostat: Wall mounted DDC type with appropriate mounting hardware.

2.05 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Titus 2. Carnes 3. Krueger 4. Price. 5. Substitutions: Permitted..

B. Ceiling Diffusers: Rectangular adjustable pattern, stamped or spun, multi-core type diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern, with sectoring baffles where indicated; radial opposed blade damper and equalizing grid; baked white enamel finish.

C. Registers/Grilles: Streamlined and individually adjustable blades, two-way deflection , damper; with baked white enamel finish.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify sizes of equipment connections before fabricating transitions.



B. Verify rated walls are ready for fire damper installation.

C. Verify ducts and equipment installation are ready for accessories.

D. Check location of air outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Metal Ducts: Install in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

B. Install back-draft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans.

C. Prevent passage of unfiltered air around filters by installing felt, rubber, or neoprene gaskets.

D. Install filter gage static pressure tips upstream and downstream of filters. Mount filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum, in accessible position. Adjust and level.

E. Cut openings in ductwork to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Cut pitot tube openings for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to eliminate against air leakage.

F. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. Apply duct insulation specified in Section 22 07 00.

G. At installer’s option, fiberglass ductwork may be substituted for internally or externally insulated or non-insulated low-pressure sheet metal ductwork.

H. During construction install temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.

I. Install fire dampers at locations as indicated on Drawings. Install with perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges.

J. Access Doors: Install access doors at the following locations: 1. Spaced every 50 feet of straight duct. 2. Upstream of each elbow. 3. Upstream of each reheat coil. 4. Before and after each automatic control damper. 5. Before and after each fire damper. 6. Downstream of each VAV box.

7. Access Door Sizes: Install minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access. Install 4 x 4 inch for balancing dampers only. Review locations prior to fabrication.

8. Mark access doors for fire on outside surface, with minimum 1/2 inch high letters reading: FIRE DAMPER.



K. Install fire dampers at locations as indicated on Drawings. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges. 1. Install smoke dampers and combination smoke and fire dampers in accordance with NFPA

92A. 2. Install dampers square and free from racking with blades running horizontally. 3. Do not compress or stretch damper frame into duct or opening. 4. Handle damper using sleeve or frame. Do not lift damper using blades, actuator, or jack

shaft. 5. Support terminal units individually from structure. Do not support from adjacent ductwork.

Install with minimum of 6 ft of 1inch thick lined ductwork downstream of units.

L. Install balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers and grilles and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of diffuser, or grille and register assembly.

M. Do not locate air registers, diffusers or grilles in floors of toilet or bathing rooms.

N. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.

O. Install fans with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads.

P. Install sheaves required for final air balance.

Q. Install safety screen where fan inlet or outlet is exposed.

R. For outdoor ductwork, protect ductwork, ductwork supports, linings and coverings from weather.

S. Install fans with access to adjustable blade axial fan wheels for varying blade angle setting. Adjust blades for varying range of volume and pressure.

3.03 TESTING

1. For ductwork designed for 3 inches w.c. above ambient, pressure test minimum 25 percent of ductwork after duct cleaning, but before duct insulation is applied or ductwork is concealed. Submit test report.

2. Test in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. 3. Maximum Allowable Leakage: In accordance with ICC IECC.

END OF SECTION 23 30 00-HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION

DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATION & AIR CONDITIONING Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 23 74 00 PACKAGED OUTDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS

Packaged Outdoor Central-Station Air-handling Units 23 74 13 - 1

SECTION 23 74 13 - PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes modular factory fabricated air-handling units and accessories.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, unit dimensions, weight loading, required clearances, construction details, field connection details, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

B. Product Data, Submit the following: 1. Published Literature: Indicate capacities, ratings, gages and finishes of materials, and electrical

characteristics and connection requirements. 2. Filters: Data for filter media, filter performance data, filter assembly, and filter frames. 3. Fans: Performance and fan curves with specified operating point plotted, power, RPM. 4. Sound Power Level Data: Fan outlet and casing radiation at rated capacity. 5. Dampers: Include leakage, pressure drop, and sample calibration curves. Indicate materials, construction,

dimensions, and installation details. 6. Electrical Requirements: Power supply wiring including wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring.

Indicate factory installed and field installed wiring.

C. Samples: Submit two samples of each type of replacement filter media with frame.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, spare parts lists, and wiring diagrams.


A. Outside Air Damper Leakage: Test in accordance with AMCA 500.

B. Perform Work in accordance with State of Colorado and Larimer County Standards.

C. Maintain one copy of each document on site.


A. Accept units and components on site in factory protective containers, with factory shipping skids and lifting lugs. Inspect for damage.

B. Protect units from weather and construction traffic by storing in dry, roofed location.



1.6 WARRANTY

A. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for air handling units.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish two sets of fan belts for each unit.

B. Furnish one set of filters for each unit.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 AIR HANDLING UNITS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Carrier 2. Trane 3. Johnson Controls (Tempmaster) 4. AAON 5. York 6. Lennox. 7. Substitutions: Permitted.

B. Configuration: Fan and coil section plus accessories, including: 1. Cooling coil section. 2. Heating coil. 3. Filter section. 4. Combination filter/mixing box section. 5. Mixing box section.

C. Performance Base: 5000 feet altitude.

D. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.

E. Roof Curb: 1. Field fabricated or factory assembled, galvanized steel mounting curb designed and manufactured by unit

manufacturer. 2. Perimeter type with support of air handling sections. 3. Base of unit shall have a minimum of four locations for thru- the- base gas and electrical

connections (factory- installed or field- installed), standard. 4. Minimum of 14 inches high and include wood nailer strip. 5. Furnish gaskets for field mounting.

2.2 UNITARY ROOF TOP UNITS

A. UNIT 1. Unit shall use Puron® refrigerant. 2. Unit shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 3. Unit must be selected and installed in compliance with local, state, and federal codes. 4. Unit meets ASHRAE 90.1- 2013 minimum efficiency requirements.



5. 3- phase units are Energy Star certified. 6. Unit shall be rated in accordance with AHRI Standards 210/240 and 340/360. 7. Unit shall be designed to conform to ASHRAE 15. 8. Unit shall be UL- tested and certified in accordance with ANSI Z21.47 Standards and UL or ETL-

listed and certified under Canadian standards as a total package for safety requirements. 9. Insulation and adhesive shall meet NFPA 90A requirements for flame spread and smoke generation. 10. Unit internal insulation linings shall be resistant to mold growth in accordance with “mold growth and

humidity” test in ASTM C1338, G21, and UL 181 or comparable test method. Air stream surfaces shall be evaluated in accordance with the “Erosion Test” in UL 181, as part of ASTM C1071.

11. Unit casing shall be capable of withstanding 500- hour salt spray exposure per ASTM B117 (scribed specimen).

12. Roof curb shall be designed to conform to NRCA Standards. 13. Unit shall be subjected to a completely automated run test on the assembly line. The data for each

unit will be stored at the factory, and must be available upon request. 14. Unit shall be designed in accordance with UL Standard 1995, including tested to withstand rain. 15. Unit shall be constructed to prevent intrusion of snow and tested to prevent snow intrusion into the

control box up to 40 mph. 16. Unit shake tested to assurance level 1, ASTM D4169 to ensure shipping reliability. 17. High Efficient Motors listed shall meet section 313 of the Energy Independence and Security Act of

2007 (EISA 2007).

B. Gas Heat Compartment: 1. Aluminum foil- faced fiberglass insulation shall be used. 2. Insulation and adhesive shall meet NFPA 90A requirements for flame spread and smoke generation. 3. All gas piping connecting to unit gas valve shall enter the unit cabinet at a single location on side of unit

(horizontal plane). 4. Thru- the- base capability 5. (1.) Standard unit shall have a thru- the- base gas- line location using a raised, embossed portion of the

unit basepan. 6. (2.) Optional, factory- approved, watertight connection method must be used for thru- the- base gas

connections. 7. (3.) No basepan penetration, other than those authorized by the manufacturer, is permitted.

C. Evaporator Fan and Motor 1. Evaporator fan motor: 2. Shall have permanently lubricated bearings. 3. Shall have inherent automatic- reset thermal overload protection or circuit breaker. 4. Shall have a maximum continuous bhp rating for continuous duty operation; no safety factors above that

rating shall be required. 5. Electric Drive (Direct Drive) X13 – 5 Speed/Torque Evaporator Fan: 6. Multi- speed motor with easy quick adjustment settings. 7. Blower fan shall be double- inlet type with forward- curved blades. 8. Shall be constructed from steel with a corrosion resistant finish and dynamically balanced.

D. Belt- driven Evaporator Fan: 1. Belt drive shall include an adjustable- pitch motor pulley. 2. Shall use sealed, permanently lubricated ball- bearing type. 3. Blower fan shall be double- inlet type with forward- curved blades. 4. Shall be constructed from steel with a corrosion resistant finish and dynamically balanced.



5. Standard on all 07- 14 size and 04- 06 with Humidi- MiZer models. Optional on all 04- 06 3- phase models. 23 81 19.13.N. Condenser Fans and Motors

E. Condenser fan motors: 1. Shall be a totally enclosed motor. 2. Shall use permanently lubricated bearings. 3. Shall have inherent thermal overload protection with an automatic reset feature. 4. Shall use a shaft- down design on 04 to 12 models and shaft- up on 14 size with rain shield.

F. Condenser Fans: 1. Shall be a direct- driven propeller type fan. 2. Shall have galvalum blades riveted to corrosion- resistant steel spiders and shall be dynamically balanced.

23 81 19.13.O. Special Features Options and Accessories 3. Staged Air Volume System (SAV™) for 2- stage cooling models only:

G. Evaporator fan motor: 1. (1.) Shall have permanently lubricated bearings. 2. (2.) Shall have a maximum continuous bhp rating for continuous duty operation; no safety factors above

that rating. 3. (3.) Shall be Variable Frequency duty and 2- speed control. 4. (4.) Shall contain motor shaft grounding ring to prevent electrical bearing fluting damage by safely

diverting harmful shaft voltages and bearing currents to ground.

H. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD). Only available on 2- speed indoor fan motor option (SAV): 1. Factory- supplied VFDs qualify, through ABB for a 24- month warranty from date of commissioning or

30 months from date of sale, whichever occurs first. 2. Shall be installed inside the unit cabinet, mounted, wired and tested. 3. Shall contain Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) frequency protection. 4. Insulated Gate Bi- Polar Transistors (IGBT) used to produce the output pulse width modulated (PWM)

waveform, allowing for quiet motor operation. 5. Self diagnostics with fault and power code LED indicator. Field accessory Display Kit available for

further diagnostics and special setup applications. 6. RS485 capability standard. 7. Electronic thermal overload protection. 8. 5% swinging chokes for harmonic reduction and improved power factor. 9. All printed circuit boards shall be conformal coated.

I. Economizer Section: 1. Integrated EconoMi$er IV, EconoMi$er2, and EconoMi$er X standard leak rate models. (Factory-

installed on 3 phase models only. Field- installed on all 3 and 1 phase models) 2. Integrated, gear driven opposing modulating blade design type capable of simultaneous economizer and

compressor operation. 3. Independent modules for vertical or horizontal return configuration shall be available. Vertical return

modules shall be available as a factory- installed option. 4. Damper blades shall be galvanized steel with composite gears. Plastic or composite blades on intake or

return shall not be acceptable. 5. Shall include all hardware and controls to provide free cooling with outdoor air when temperature and/or

humidity are below setpoints. 6. Shall be equipped with gear driven dampers for both the outdoor ventilation air and the return air for

positive air stream control.



7. Standard leak rate shall be equipped with dampers not to exceed 2% leakage at 1 in. wg pressure differential.

J. Economizer Controller: 1. Economizer controller shall provide: 2- line LCD interface screen for setup, configuration and

troubleshooting 2. On- board Fault Detection and Diagnostics (FDD) that senses and alerts when the economizer is not

operating properly, per California Title 24. 3. Sensor failure loss of communication identification (4.) Automatic sensor detection 4. Capabilities for use with multiple- speed indoor fan systems 5. Utilize digital sensors: Dry bulb and Enthalpy 6. Shall be capable of introducing up to 100% outdoor air. 7. Shall be equipped with a barometric relief damper capable of relieving up to 100% return air and contain

seals that meet ASHRAE 90.1- 2013 requirements. 8. Shall be designed to close damper(s) during loss- of- power situations with spring return built into motor. 9. Dry bulb outdoor air temperature sensor shall be provided as standard. Enthalpy sensor is also available

on factory- installed economizers only. Outdoor air sensor setpoint shall be adjustable and shall range from 40 to 100° F (4 to 38° C). Additional sensor options shall be available as accessories.

10. The economizer controller shall also provide control of an accessory power exhaust unit function. Factory set at 100%, with a range of 0% to 100%.

11. The economizer shall maintain minimum airflow into the building during occupied period and provide design ventilation rate for full occupancy.

12. Dampers shall be completely closed when the unit is in the unoccupied mode. 13. Economizer controller shall accept a 2- 10 Vdc CO2 sensor input for IAQ/DCV control. In this mode,

dampers shall modulate the outdoor air damper to provide ventilation based on the sensor input. 14. Compressor lockout temperature on W7220 is adjustable from - 45° F to 80° F, set at a factory default of

32° F. Others shall open at 35° F (2C) and closes at 50° F (10° C) 15. Actuator shall be direct coupled to economizer gear. No linkage arms or control rods shall be acceptable. 16. Economizer controller shall provide indications when in free cooling mode, in the DCV mode, or the

exhaust fan contact is closed.

K. Electrical Re quirements 1. All unit power wiring shall enter unit cabinet at a single, factory- prepared, knockout location. 2. Thru- the- base capability. 3. Standard unit shall have a thru- the- base electrical location (s) using a raised, embossed portion of the

unit basepan. 4. Optional, factory- approved, watertight connection method must be used for thru- the- base electrical

connections. 5. basepan penetration, other than those authorized by the manufacturer, is permitted.

L. Floor Plate: 1. Galvanized Steel.

M. Cabinet panels shall be easily removable for servicing.

N. Unit shall have one factory- installed, tool- less, removable, filter access panel. 1. Panels covering control box, indoor fan, indoor fan motor, gas components (where applicable), and

compressors shall have a molded composite handles. 2. Condenser Coil Hail Guard Assembly (Factory- installed option on 3- phase models. Field- installed on

all 3 and 1 phase models): 3. Shall protect against damage from hail.



4. Shall be of louvered style. 5. Unit- Mounted, Non- Fused Disconnect Switch: 6. Switch shall be factory- installed, internally mounted. 7. National Electric Code (NEC) and UL or ETL approved non- fused switch shall provide unit power

shutoff. 8. Shall be accessible from outside the unit. 9. Shall provide local shutdown and lockout capability. 10. Sized only for the unit as ordered from the factory. Does not accommodate field- installed devices. 11. HACR Breaker 12. These manual reset devices provide overload and short circuit protection for the unit. Factory wired and

mounted with the units, with access cover to help provide environmental protection. On 575V applications, HACR breaker can only be used with WYE power distribution systems. Use on Delta power distribution systems is prohibited.

13. Sized only for the unit as ordered from the factory. Does not accommodate field- installed devices. 14. Convenience Outlet: 15. Powered convenience outlet (3- phase models only). 16. Outlet shall be powered from main line power to the rooftop unit. 17. Outlet shall be powered from line side or load side of disconnect by installing contractor, as required by

code. If outlet is powered from load side of disconnect, unit electrical ratings shall be UL or ETL certified and rated for additional outlet amperage.

18. Outlet shall be factory- installed and internally mounted with easily accessible 115- v female receptacle. Outlet shall include 15 amp GFI receptacles with independent fuse protection.

19. Voltage required to operate convenience outlet shall be provided by a factory- installed step- down transformer.

20. Outlet shall be accessible from outside the unit. 21. Outlet shall include a field- installed “Wet in Use” cover.

O. Heat Exchanger 1. Heat exchanger shall be an induced draft design. Positive pressure heat exchanger designs shall not be

allowed. 2. Shall incorporate a direct- spark ignition system and redundant main gas valve. 3. Gas supply pressure at the inlet to the rooftop unit gas valve must match that required by the

manufacturer. 4. The heat exchanger shall be controlled by an integrated gas controller (IGC) microprocessor. 5. IGC board shall notify users of fault using an LED (light- emitting diode). 6. The LED shall be visible without removing the control box access panel. 7. IGC board shall contain algorithms that modify evaporator- fan operation to prevent future cycling on

high temperature limit switch. 8. Unit shall be equipped with anti- cycle protection with one short cycle on unit flame rollout switch or 4

continuous short cycles on the high temperature limit switch. Fault indication shall be made using an LED.

P. Induced draft Combustion Blower 1. Induced draft combustion motor and blower 2. Shall be a direct- drive, single inlet, forward- curved centrifugal type. 3. Shall be made from steel with a corrosion- resistant finish. 4. Shall have permanently lubricated sealed bearings. 5. Shall have inherent thermal overload protection. 6. Shall have an automatic reset

Q. Standard Heat Exchanger Construction



1. Heat exchanger shall be of the tubular- section type constructed of a minimum of 20- gauge steel coated with a nominal 1.2 mil aluminum- silicone alloy for corrosion resistance.

2. Burners shall be of the in- shot type constructed of aluminum- coated steel. 3. Burners shall incorporate orifices for rated heat output up to 2000 ft (610m) elevation. Additional

accessory kits may be required for applications above 2000 ft (610m) elevation, depending on local gas supply conditions.

4. Each heat exchanger tube shall contain multiple dimples for increased heating effectiveness.

R. Refrigerant Components: 1. Refrigerant circuit shall include the following control, safety, and maintenance features: 2. Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) shall help provide optimum performance across the entire

operating range. 3. Shall contain removable power element to allow change out of power element and bulb without removing

the valve body. 4. Refrigerant filter drier - Solid core design. 5. Service gauge connections on suction and discharge lines. 6. Pressure gauge access through a specially designed access port in the top panel of the unit. 7. There shall be gauge line access port in the skin of the rooftop, covered by a black, removable plug. 8. The plug shall be easy to remove and replace. 9. When the plug is removed, the gauge access port shall enable maintenance personnel to route their

pressure gauge lines. 10. This gauge access port shall facilitate correct and accurate condenser pressure readings by enabling the

reading with the compressor access panel on. 11. The plug shall be made of a leak proof, UV- resistant, composite material. 12. Compressors 13. Unit shall use fully hermetic, scroll compressor for each independent refrigeration circuit. 14. Models shall be available with single compressor/single stage cooling designs on 04 – 07 sizes models,

single compressor/2- stage cooling on 07 size, and 2 compressor/2- stage cooling models on 08 – 14 sizes. 15. Compressor motors shall be cooled by refrigerant gas passing through motor windings. 16. Compressors shall be internally protected from high discharge temperature conditions. 17. Compressors shall be protected from an over- temperature and over- amperage conditions by an internal,

motor overload device. 18. Compressor shall be factory mounted on rubber grommets. 19. Compressor motors shall have internal line break thermal, current overload and high pressure differential

protection. 20. Crankcase heaters shall not be required for normal operating range, unless provided by the factory. 23 81

19.13.L

S. Condensate and drains. 1. Drain Pans: Single thickness galvanized steel with welded corners. Cross break and pitch to drain

connection. Condensate pan and connections: 2. Shall be an internally sloped condensate drain pan made of a noncorrosive material. 3. Shall comply with ASHRAE Standard 62. 4. Shall use a 3/4- in - 14 NPT drain connection, possible either through the bottom or side of the drain

pan. Connection shall be made per manufacturer’s recommendations.

T. Strength: Furnish structure to brace casings for suction pressure of 2.5 inch wg, with maximum deflection of 1 in 200.

U. Propeller Power Exhaust:



1. Power exhaust shall be used in conjunction with an integrated economizer. 2. Independent modules for vertical or horizontal return configurations shall be available. 3. Horizontal power exhaust is shall be mounted in return ductwork. 4. Power exhaust shall be controlled by economizer controller operation. Exhaust fans shall be energized

when dampers open past the 0- 100% adjustable setpoint on the economizer control. 5. Roof Curbs (Vertical): 6. Full perimeter roof curb with exhaust capability providing separate air streams for energy recovery from

the exhaust air without supply air contamination. 7. Formed galvanized steel with wood nailer strip and shall be capable of supporting entire unit weight. 8. Permits installation and securing of ductwork to curb prior to mounting unit on the curb. 9. High Altitude Gas Conversion Kit: 10. Package shall contain all the necessary hardware and instructions to convert a standard natural gas unit to

operate from 2000- 7000 ft (610 to 2134m) elevation with natural gas or from 0- 7000 ft (90- 2134m) elevation with liquefied propane.

11. Outdoor Air Enthalpy Sensor: 12. The outdoor air enthalpy sensor shall be used to provide single enthalpy control. When used in

conjunction with a return air enthalpy sensor, the unit will provide differential enthalpy control. The sensor allows the unit to determine if outside air is suitable for free cooling.

13. Return Air Enthalpy Sensor: 14. The return air enthalpy sensor shall be used in conjunction with an outdoor air enthalpy sensor to provide

differential enthalpy control. 15. Indoor Air Quality (CO2) Sensor: 16. Shall be able to provide demand ventilation indoor air quality (IAQ) control. 17. The IAQ sensor shall be available in duct mount, wall mount, or wall mount with LED display. The

setpoint shall have adjustment capability. 18. Smoke detectors (factory- installed only): 19. Shall be a Four- Wire Controller and Detector. 20. Shall be environmental compensated with differential sensing for reliable, stable, and drift- free

sensitivity. 21. Shall use magnet- activated test/reset sensor switches. 22. Shall have tool- less connection terminal access. 23. Shall have a recessed momentary switch for testing and resetting the detector. 24. Controller shall include: 25. (1.) One set of normally open alarm initiation contacts for connection to an initiating device circuit on a

fire alarm control panel. 26. (2.) Two Form- C auxiliary alarm relays for interface with rooftop unit or other equipment. 27. (3.) One Form- C supervision (trouble) relay to control the operation of the Trouble LED on a remote

test/ reset station. 28. (4.) Capable of direct connection to two individual detector modules. 29. (5.) Can be wired to up to 14 other duct smoke detectors for multiple fan shutdown applications

2.3 FANS

A. Type: Forward curved, type fan.

B. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and label with AMCA Certified Rating Seal.

C. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300 and label with AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal.

D. Bearings: Self-aligning, grease lubricated, ball or roller bearings with lubrication fittings extended to exterior of casing with copper tube and grease fitting rigidly attached to casing.



E. Mounting: Locate fan and motor internally on welded steel base coated with corrosion resistant paint. Factory mount motor on slide rails. Furnish access to motor, drive, and bearings through removable casing panels or hinged access doors. Mount base on vibration isolators.

F. Fan Modulation: Variable Frequency Drive.

G. Flexible Connection: Separate unit from connecting ductwork.

2.4 MOTORS

A. Motor Type: NEMA MG 1.

2.5 BEARINGS AND DRIVES

A. Bearings: Pillow block type, self-aligning, grease-lubricated L-50 life at 100,000 hours.

B. Shafts: Solid, hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with key-way, and protectively coated with lubricating oil.

C. V-Belt Drive: Cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts, and keyed. Variable and adjustable pitch sheaves for motors 15 hp and under selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid-position; fixed sheave for 20 hp and over, matched belts, and drive rated as recommended by manufacturer or minimum 1.5 times nameplate rating of motor.

D. Belt Guard: Fabricate to SMACNA Standard; 0.106 inch thick, 3/4 inch diamond mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation, with provision for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in place.

2.6 OUTSIDE AIR MEASURING AND MODULATION DEVICE

A. Factory mounted in outside air and return air openings.

B. Damper and airflow measurement assembly sized to accommodate minimum outside airflow as indicated on drawings.

C. Construction: 1. Frame: Extruded aluminum. 2. Blades:

a. Modulating Air Control: 1) Style: Airfoil-shaped, single-piece. 2) Action: Parallel. 3) Orientation: Horizontal. 4) Material: Heavy gage 6063-T5 extruded aluminum. 5) Width: Maximum 5 inches.

b. Stationary Sensing: 1) Style: Airfoil-shaped, single-piece. 2) Orientation: Horizontal. 3) Material: Heavy gage 6063-T5 extruded aluminum. 4) Width: Maximum 5-1/4 inches. 5) Finish: Anodized.

3. Bearings: Self-lubricating molded synthetic sleeve, turning in extruded hole in frame. 4. Seals:



a. Blade: Extruded rubber. Mechanically attached to blade edge. b. Jamb: Stainless steel, flexible metal compression type. c. Linkage: Concealed in frame. d. Axles: Minimum 1/2 inch diameter plated steel, hex-shaped, mechanically attached to blade. e. Mounting: Vertical. f. Electric Actuator: 24 V, 60 Hz, modulating, with position feedback.

5. Digital Controller: Application specific controller. Programming logic and calibration in nonvolatile EPROM. Controller uses generic 0 - 10 vdc inputs and outputs for interface to building automation system.

6. Air Straightener Section: 3 inches deep section contained in 5 inch long sleeve attached to damper-airflow monitor frame.

7. Finish: Mill aluminum.

D. Performance Data: 1. Temperature Rating: Withstand -40 to 140 degrees F. 2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 5 percent. 3. Leakage: Maximum of 2.0 cfm per square foot at 1.0 inches wg pressure differential. 4. Measures from 15 percent to 100 percent of unit nominal air flow. 5. Adjusts air flow for temperature variations. 6. Provides 2 to 10 volt DC signal corresponding to actual air flow.

E. Accessories: 1. Actuator Heater: Allow actuator operation in ambient temperatures to -40 degrees F.

2.7 CONTROLS

A. Controls: Refer to Section 23 09 00

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify roof curbs are installed and dimensions are as shown on shop drawings.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Furnish roof curbs for installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with ARI 430.

B. Roof Curb: 1. Assemble roof curb. 2. Install roof curb level. 3. Coordinate curb installation and flashing. 4. Install units on roof curb providing watertight enclosure to protect ductwork and utility services. 5. Install gasket material between unit base and roof curb.

C. Install flexible connections between unit and inlet and discharge ductwork. Install metal bands of connectors parallel with minimum 1 inch flex between ductwork and fan while running.



D. Install assembled units with vibration isolators. Install isolated fans with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads. Install restraining snubbers as required. Adjust snubbers to prevent tension in flexible connectors when fan is operating.

E. Install condensate piping with trap and route from drain pan to nearest roof drain.

F. Provide fixed sheaves required for final air balance.

G. Insulate coil headers located outside airflow as specified for piping.

3.4 INSTALLATION CHILLED WATER COOLING COIL

A. Make connections to coils with unions or flanges.

B. Connect water supply to leaving airside of coil (counter flow arrangement).

C. Locate water supply at bottom of supply header and return water connection at top.

D. Install water coils to allow draining and install drain connection at low points.

E. Install the following piping accessories on chilled water piping connections. 1. On supply:

a. Thermometer well and thermometer. b. Well for temperature sensor. c. Shutoff valve. d. Strainer. e. Control valve. f. Pressure gage.

2. On return: a. Thermometer well and thermometer. b. Well for temperature sensor. c. Pressure gage. d. Shutoff valve. e. Balancing valve.

F. Install automatic air vents at high points complete with shutoff valve.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Furnish initial start-up and shutdown during first year of operation, including routine servicing and checkout.

B. Furnish services of factory trained representative for minimum of one days to leak test, refrigerant pressure test, evacuate, dehydrate, charge, start-up, calibrate controls, and instruct Owner on operation and maintenance.

C. Vacuum clean coils and inside of unit cabinet.

D. Install new throwaway filters in units at Substantial Completion.

E. Demonstrate unit operation and maintenance.



F. Furnish services of manufacturer's technical representative for one 8 hour day to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of units. Schedule training with Owner, provide at least 7 days notice to Architect of training date.

G. Do not operate units until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.

END OF SECTION 23 74 00-PACKAGED OUTDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 1

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Raceways. 2. Building wire and connectors. 3. Supporting devices for electrical components. 4. Electrical identification. 5. Electricity-metering components. 6. Touchup painting.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. D. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. E. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For electricity-metering equipment. B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts of electricity-metering equipment.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.05 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical installations that follow. 1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other structural

components as they are constructed. B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the

Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in the building. C. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies.

1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities and services, including provision for electricity-metering components.

2. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility company providing electrical power and other services.

D. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by finished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel. C. Select one of two paragraphs below if slotted-steel channel supports are used. D. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C-clamps

with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps or click-type hangers. E. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. F. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and

insulating wedging plug for nonarmored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs have number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body constructed of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.

2.02 EQUIPMENT FOR UTILITY COMPANY'S ELECTRICITY METERING

A. Current-Transformer Cabinets: Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company. B. Meter Sockets: Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company.


2.03 TOUCHUP PAINT A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment finish. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom.

B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations.

D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope. 3.02 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

B. Install wiring at outlets according to NEC 300-14. C. Connect outlet and component connections to wiring systems and to ground. Tighten electrical

connectors and terminals, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.

3.03 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION

A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel system components.

B. Dry Locations: Steel materials. C. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. D. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads.

3.04 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components. B. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide U-bolts,

clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for securing hanger rods and conduits.

C. Coordinate paragraph below with Drawings. D. Install 1/4-inch- diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise indicated. E. Spring-steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be used instead

of malleable-iron hangers for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to slotted channel and angle supports.

F. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.

G. Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors. H. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support. Support sheet-

metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. J. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures,

pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength.

K. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core-drilled holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire-rated gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry walls.

M. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise indicated. 3.05 UTILITY COMPANY ELECTRICITY-METERING EQUIPMENT

A. Install equipment according to utility company's written requirements. Provide grounding and empty conduits as required by utility company.

3.06 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to achieve fire-resistance rating of the assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping."


A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following: 1. Raceways.


2. Building wire and connectors. 3. Supporting devices for electrical components. 4. Electrical identification. 5. Electricity-metering components. 6. Touchup painting.

3.08 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 26 05 00 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 13 - 1

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 26 05 13 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less.



Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

2.02 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Alcan Aluminum Corporation; Alcan Cable Div. 2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 3. General Cable Corporation. 4. Senator Wire & Cable Company. 5. Southwire Company.

B. Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Insulation Applications" Article for insulation type, cable construction, and ratings.

C. Conductor Material: Copper and/or Aluminum. D. Conductor Insulation Types: Type THW, THHN-THWN, XHHW, UF, USE and SO. E. Multiconductor Cable: Armored cable, Type AC, Metal-clad cable or Type MC.

2.03 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Available Manufacturers: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. AMP Incorporated/Tyco International. 3. Hubbell/Anderson. 4. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 5. 3M Company; Electrical Products Division.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway, XHHW, single conductors in raceway, SE or USE multiconductor cable.

B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway, Armored cable, Type AC, Metal-clad cable or Type MC.

C. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway, Armored cable, Type AC, Metal-clad cable or Type MC.

302 INSTALLATION

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not

deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 13 - 2

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

E. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." F. Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements according to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration

Firestop Systems." G. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section

3.03 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

C. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors.

END OF SECTION 26 05 13 – CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 05 26 - 1

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in other Sections.


A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Grounding Conductors, Cables, Connectors, and Rods:

a. Apache Grounding/Erico Inc. b. Boggs, Inc. c. Chance/Hubbell. d. Copperweld Corp. e. Dossert Corp. f. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group. g. Framatome Connectors/Burndy Electrical. h. Galvan Industries, Inc. j. Hastings Fiber Glass Products, Inc. k. Ideal Industries, Inc. m. ILSCO. n. Kearney/Cooper Power Systems. p. Korns: C. C. Korns Co.; Division of Robroy Industries. q. Lyncole XIT Grounding. r. O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group. s. Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell. t. Salisbury: W. H. Salisbury & Co. u. Superior Grounding Systems, Inc. v. Thomas & Betts, Electrical.

2.02 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." B. If only copper conductors are permitted in Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables," delete

paragraph below. C. Material: Copper. D. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation. E. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable. F. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded, unless otherwise indicated. G. Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.

2.03 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS

A. Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items.

B. Bolted Connectors: Bolted-pressure-type connectors, or compression type. C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's written

instructions. 2.04 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel.


B. Ground Rods: Sectional type; copper-clad steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION

A. Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials.

B. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors. C. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for underground connections. D. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps.

3.02 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicated.

B. Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and circuits. C. Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic raceways unless they

are designated for telephone or data cables. D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate equipment grounding

conductor to each electric water heater, heat-tracing, and antifrost heating cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

E. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Provide a grounding electrode in addition to installing a separate equipment grounding conductor with supply branch-circuit conductors.

F. When applicable: Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System: Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Ground Rods: Install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes. 1. Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise

indicated. 2. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors. Use exothermic welds, except at

test wells and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging copper coating.

B. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation hangers and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type connection is required; then, use a bolted clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance.

D. Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes by grounding clamp connectors. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor to street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

E. Ufer Ground (Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NFPA 70, Paragraph 250-81(c), using a minimum of 20 feet of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG. If concrete foundation is less than 20 feet long, coil excess conductor within the base of the foundation. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building grounding grid or to a grounding electrode external to concrete.

3.04 CONNECTIONS


A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.

B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.

C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type connectors.

D. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.

F. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor.

END OF SECTION 26 05 26 – GROUNDING AND BONDING

ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AMD SEISMIC RESTRAINTS 26 05 29 - 1

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 26 05 29 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AMD SEISMIC RESTRAINTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Seismic restraints for electrical equipment and systems. 3. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. IBC: International Building Code. C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. D. NBC: National Building Code. E. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. F. SBC: Standard Building Code. G. Seismic Restraint: A structural support element such as a metal framing member, a cable, an anchor bolt

or stud, a fastening device, or an assembly of these items used to transmit seismic forces from an item of equipment or system to building structure and to limit movement of item during a seismic event.

H. IBC: International Building Code. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of electrical support and seismic-restraint component used.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials and dimensions and identify hardware, including attachment and anchorage devices. Include the following: 1. Fabricated Supports: Representations of field-fabricated supports not detailed on Drawings. 2. Seismic Restraints: Detail anchorage and bracing not defined by details or charts on Drawings.

Include the following: a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include

calculations of combined tensile and shear loads. b. Details: Detail fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the

restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events.

C. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints.

D. Welding certificates. E. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the UBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.

B. Testing of Seismic Anchorage Devices: Comply with testing requirements in Part 3 and in Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints."

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.02 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed under this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.


B. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-3, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Cooper B-Line; a division of Cooper Industries. b. ERICO International Corporation. c. Allied Support Systems; Power-Strut Unit. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.; O-Strut Div. f. National Pipe Hanger Corp. g. Thomas & Betts Corporation. h. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. j. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Finishes: a. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to

MFMA-3. b. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating

applied according to MFMA-3. c. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to

MFMA-3 3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for structural loading.

C. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin channels and angles with 9/16-inch diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c., in at least 1 surface. 1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Allied Support Systems; Aickinstrut Unit. b. Cooper B-Line; a division of Cooper Industries. c. Fabco Plastics Wholesale Limited. d. Seasafe, Inc.

2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for use with those items.

3. Rated Strength: Selected to suit structural loading. D. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1. E. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings,

designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. F. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body

and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

G. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

H. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete,

steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Available Manufacturers:

1) Hilti, Inc. 2) ITW Construction Products. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co. Inc.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Available Manufacturers:

1) Cooper B-Line; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc 3) Hilti, Inc. 4) ITW Construction Products. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC. 6) Powers Fasteners.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron slotted-support-system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-3 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.


2.03 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT COMPONENTS A. Rated Strength, Features, and Application Requirements for Restraint Components: As defined in

reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Structural Safety Factor: Strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components used shall

be at least five times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected. B. Angle and Channel-Type Brace Assemblies: Steel angles or steel slotted-support-system components;

with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end.

C. Cable Restraints: ASTM A 603, zinc-coated, steel wire rope attached to steel or stainless-steel thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable service. 1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. b. Loos & Co., Inc. c. Mason Industries, Inc.

2. Seismic Mountings, Anchors, and Attachments: Devices as specified in Part 2 "Support, Anchorage, and Attachment Components" Article, selected to resist seismic forces.

3. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchors: Neoprene units designed for seismically rated rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs used.

4. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for seismically rated rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices used.

2.04 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems, except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps approved for application.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.02 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements, except as specified in this Article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be

supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. C. Install seismic-restraint components using methods approved by the evaluation service providing

required submittals for component. D. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be

adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. E. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical

items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers

and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

5. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. 6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.


F. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

END OF SECTION 26 05 29 – ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AMD SEISMIC RESTRAINTS

RACEWAYS AND BOXES 26 05 33 - 1

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring. B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for supports, anchors, and identification products.

2. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in boxes and for floor-box service fittings.

1.02 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing. C. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. D. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. E. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. F. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit. G. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.



B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.05 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.


A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.

2.02 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Available Manufacturers: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Alflex Inc. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 4. Electri-Flex Co. 5. Grinnell Co./Tyco International; Allied Tube and Conduit Div. 6. LTV Steel Tubular Products Company. 7. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 8. O-Z Gedney; Unit of General Signal. 9. Wheatland Tube Co.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. C. Aluminum Rigid Conduit: ANSI C80.5. D. IMC: ANSI C80.6. E. Plastic-Coated Steel Conduit and Fittings: NEMA RN 1. F. Plastic-Coated IMC and Fittings: NEMA RN 1. G. EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3.

1. Fittings: Set-screw or compression type. H. FMC: Zinc-coated steel. J. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.


K. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit and tubing materials. 2.03 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Available Manufacturers: 1. American International. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 3. Arnco Corp. 4. Cantex Inc. 5. Certainteed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. 6. Condux International. 7. ElecSYS, Inc. 8. Electri-Flex Co. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 11. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc. 12. Spiralduct, Inc./AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 13. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

B. ENT: NEMA TC 13. C. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 PVC. D. ENT and RNC Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. E. LFNC: UL 1660.

2.04 METAL WIREWAYS

A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Hoffman. 2. Square D.

B. Material and Construction: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated. C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down

straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. D. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply with

NFPA 70. E. Wireway Covers: As indicated. F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.05 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS

A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Hoffman. 2. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

B. Description: PVC plastic, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with snap-on cover and mechanically coupled connections with plastic fasteners.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply with NFPA 70.

2.06 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Finish with manufacturer's standard prime coating. 1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Airey-Thompson Sentinel Lighting; Wiremold Company (The). b. Thomas & Betts Corporation. c. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). d. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.

B. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC compound. 1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Butler Manufacturing Co.; Walker Division. b. Enduro Composite Systems. c. Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Device Division. d. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. e. Panduit Corp. f. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).

g. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division. C. Types, sizes, and channels as indicated and required for each application, with fittings that match and

mate with raceways.


2.07 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Available Manufacturers:

1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Emerson/General Signal; Appleton Electric Company. 3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co. 4. Hoffman. 5. Hubbell, Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. 6. O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal. 7. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc. 8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division. 9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet-PLM Division. 10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co. 11. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). 13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1. C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover. D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2. E. Floor Boxes: Cast metal, fully adjustable, rectangular. F. Floor Boxes: Nonmetallic, nonadjustable, round. G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. H. Cast-Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover. J. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous hinge cover and flush latch.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic, finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint.

K. Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage and include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

2.08 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled surface raceways, enclosures, and cabinets before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: 1. Exposed: Rigid steel or IMC. 2. Concealed: Rigid steel or IMC. 3. Underground, Single Run: RNC. 4. Underground, Grouped: RNC. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric

Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: 1. Exposed: EMT or RNC. 2. Concealed: EMT, ENT or RNC. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric

Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC; except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 4. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit. 5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except as follows:

a. Damp or Wet Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4, nonmetallic. C. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings approved for use with that

material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

B. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. C. Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." D. Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways. E. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portions of

bends are not visible above the finished slab.


F. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance,

considering type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated. H. Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow

surface contours as much as possible. J. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints tight. K. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tools. M. Terminations:

1. Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, one inside and one outside box.

2. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are exposed.

N. Surface Raceways: Install a separate, green, ground conductor in raceways from junction box supplying raceways to receptacle or fixture ground terminals.

P. Set floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. Q. Install hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner.

3.03 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by

manufacturer. 3.04 CLEANING

A. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished raceways and boxes, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.

END OF SECTION 26 05 33 – RACEWAYS AND BOXES

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 05 53 - 1

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 26 05 53 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes electrical identification materials and devices required to comply with ANSI C2, NFPA 70, OSHA standards, and authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 RACEWAY AND CABLE LABELS

A. Colored Adhesive Tape: Self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide. B. Underground-Line Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, vinyl tape.

1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick. 2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service. 3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 4. Printed legend indicating type of underground line.

2.02 NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS

A. Safety Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145. B. Engraved Plastic Nameplates and Signs: Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate, minimum 1/16

inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. in. and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes. 1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.

C. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32, stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.


A. Identification Materials and Devices: Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

B. Lettering, Colors, and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations with corresponding designations in the Contract Documents or with those required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

C. Sequence of Work: If identification is applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification after completing finish work.

D. Color-Coding of Secondary Phase Conductors: Use the following colors for service, feeder and branch-circuit phase conductors: 1. 208/120-V Conductors:

a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C. Blue. d. Neutral: White.

2. 480/277-V Conductors: a. Phase A: Brown. b. Phase B: Orange. c. Phase C. Yellow. d. Neutral: Grey.

3. Factory apply color the entire length of conductors, except the following field-applied, color-coding methods may be used instead of factory-coded wire for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG: a. Phase tape for a distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or

taps are made.

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 05 53 - 2

E. Equipment Identification Labels: Engraved plastic laminate labels, 1”x3”, with 3/8” high lettering minimum. 1. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. 2. Electrical switchgear and switchboards. 3. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. 4. Power transfer equipment. 5. Contactors.

END OF SECTION 26 05 53 – ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 1

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes load centers and panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, and associated auxiliary equipment rated 600 V and less for the following types: 1. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 2. Distribution panelboards.

B. Related Sections include the following: Division 16 Section "Fuses." 1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. C. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. D. RMS: Root mean square. E. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. F. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, TVSS device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices,

equipment features, and ratings. Include the following: a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. c. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. d. UL listing for series rating of installed devices if applicable. e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective

devices and auxiliary components. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between

manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. C. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing. D. Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1. In addition to requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. 2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.



B. Comply with NEMA PB 1. C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements.


A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Panelboards, Overcurrent Protective Devices, Controllers, Contactors, and Accessories:

a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products. b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Div. c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. d. Square D Co.


2.02 FABRICATION AND FEATURES

A. Enclosures: Flush and surface mounted cabinets. NEMA PB 1, Type 1, to meet environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Front: Door in Door construction secured to box. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.

C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer coat. D. Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted inside metal frame, inside panelboard door. E. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. F. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground conductors; bonded

to box. G. Service Equipment Label: UL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with main service

disconnect switches. 2.03 PANELBOARD SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING

A. As indicated on panel schedules. 2.04 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

B. Doors: Front mounted with concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 2.05 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Doors: Front mounted, secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. B. Main Overcurrent Protective Devices: As indicated on drawings. C. Branch overcurrent protective devices shall be one of the following:

1. For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers. 2. For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit

breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal. 3. Fused switches.

2.06 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. B. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number

of poles. C. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle.


A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1. B. Mounting Heights: Top of trim 74 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. C. Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts

uniformly flush with wall finish. D. Circuit Directory: Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads.

Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. E. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

3.02 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

B. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.

3.03 CONNECTIONS

A. Install equipment grounding connections for panelboards with ground continuity to main electrical ground bus.

B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows: 1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and

control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit.


B. Testing: After installing panelboards and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.

3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges. 3.06 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.

END OF SECTION 26 24 16 – PANELBOARDS

WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 1

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 26 27 16 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes receptacles, connectors, switches, and finish plates. 1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product specified. B. Maintenance Data: For materials and products to include in maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with NEMA WD 1. C. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Wiring Devices:

a. Bryant Electric, Inc. b. Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. GE Company; GE Wiring Devices. d. Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Devices Div. e. Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. f. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. g. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div. h. Pyle-National, Inc.; an Amphenol Co.

2. Multioutlet Assemblies: a. Airey-Thompson Co. b. Wiremold.

3. Poke-through, Floor Service Outlets and Telephone/Power Poles: a. American Electric. b. Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Devices Div. c. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div. d. Square D Co. e. Wiremold.

2.02 RECEPTACLES

A. Straight-Blade and Locking Receptacles: General-Duty grade. B. GFCI Receptacles: Feed-through type, with integral NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R duplex

receptacle arranged to protect connected downstream receptacles on same circuit. Design units for installation in a 2-3/4-inch- deep outlet box without an adapter.

C. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Equipment grounding contacts connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. 1. Devices: Listed and labeled as isolated-ground receptacles. 2. Isolation Method: Integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts.

D. Industrial Heavy-Duty Receptacle: Comply with IEC 309-1. 2.03 SWITCHES

Snap Switches: General-duty, quiet type. 2.04 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Nylon unless otherwise indicated.

WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 2

2.05 FINISHES A. Color: White, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code.


A. Install devices and assemblies plumb and secure. B. Install wall plates when painting is complete. C. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical, and

grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. D. Protect devices and assemblies during painting.

3.02 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." 3.03 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch-circuit equipment grounding conductor. B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturers published torque-tightening

values. If manufacturers torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.04 CLEANING

A. Internally clean devices, device outlet boxes, and enclosures. Replace stained or improperly painted wall plates or devices.

END OF SECTION 26 27 26 – WIRING DEVICES

FUSES 26 28 13 - 1

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 26 28 13 FUSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes cartridge fuses, rated 600 V and less, for use in switches, panelboards, switchboards, controllers, disconnects; and spare fuse cabinets.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and ratings for each fuse type indicated.

B. Product Data: Include the following for each fuse type indicated: 1. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and

ratings. 2. Let-through current curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 3. Time-current curves, coordination charts and tables, and related data. 4. Fuse size for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches.

C. Maintenance Data: For tripping devices to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Provide fuses from a single manufacturer. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with NEMA FU 1. D. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F or more than 100 deg F, apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate fuse ratings with HVAC and refrigeration equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size.


A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cooper Industries, Inc.; Bussmann Div. 2. Eagle Electric Mfg. Co., Inc. 3. Ferraz Corp. 4. General Electric Co.; Wiring Devices Div. 5. Gould Shawmut. 6. Tracor, Inc.; Littelfuse, Inc. Subsidiary.

2.02 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuse; class and current rating indicated; voltage rating consistent with circuit voltage.


A. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

B. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.

FUSES 26 28 13 - 2

3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Install labels indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch.

END OF SECTION 26 28 13 – FUSES

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16 - 1

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes individually mounted enclosed switches and circuit breakers used for the following: 1. Service disconnecting means. 2. Feeder and branch-circuit protection. 3. Motor and equipment disconnecting means.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for attachment plugs, receptacles, and toggle switches

used for disconnecting means. 2. Division 16 Section "Switchboards" for individually enclosed, fusible switches used as feeder

protection. 3. Division 16 Section "Fuses" for fusible devices.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. B. RMS: Root mean square. C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each switch and circuit breaker. 1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service

space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following: a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Current and voltage ratings. c. Short-circuit current rating. d. UL listing for series rating of installed devices if applicable. e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective

devices and auxiliary components. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-

installed and field-installed wiring. C. Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers and for components to include in

maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures," include the following: 1. Routine maintenance requirements for components. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting switches and circuit breakers. 3. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit breaker.



B. Comply with NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1. C. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.



A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Fusible Switches:

a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products. b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division. c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. d. Square D Co.

2. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers: a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products. b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division. c. Klockner-Moeller. d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. e. Square D Co.

3. Combination Circuit Breaker and Ground-Fault Trip: a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products. b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division. c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. d. Square D Co.

4. Molded-Case, Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products. b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division. c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. d. Square D Co.

5. Integrally Fused, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers: a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products. b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division. c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. d. Square D Co.

2.02 ENCLOSED SWITCHES A. Enclosed, Nonfusible Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type GD, with lockable handle. B. Enclosed, Fusible Switch, 800 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with clips to accommodate

specified fuses, lockable handle with two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. 2.03 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and

instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Electronic Trip Unit Circuit Breakers: RMS sensing; field-replaceable rating plug; with the following field-adjustable settings: a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

5. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiter-style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker; trip activation on fuse opening or on opening of fuse compartment door.

6. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations. 7. Molded-Case Switch: Molded-case circuit breaker without trip units.

B. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 1. Lugs: Mechanical style suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and material of conductors. 2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting

loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment. 3. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-

delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. 4. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit.


2.04 ENCLOSURES A. NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1 to meet environmental conditions of installed location.

1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 2.05 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested enclosures before shipping.


A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and

temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.

3.04 CONNECTIONS

A. Install equipment grounding connections for switches and circuit breakers with ground continuity to main electrical ground bus.

B. Install power wiring. Install wiring between switches and circuit breakers, and control and indication devices.

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows: 1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch, circuit breaker, component, and control

circuit. 2. Test continuity of each line- and load-side circuit.

B. Testing: After installing enclosed switches and circuit breakers and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. 1. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;

otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3.06 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges. 3.07 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of enclosures. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.

END OF SECTION 26 28 16 – ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 51 00 - 1

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes interior lighting fixtures, lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces, lamps, ballasts, emergency lighting units, and accessories.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture indicated, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, and the following: 1. Dimensions of fixtures. 2. Certified results of laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for photometric performance. 3. Emergency lighting unit battery and charger. 4. Fluorescent and high-intensity-discharge ballasts. 5. Types of lamps.

B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights, method of field assembly, components, features, and accessories. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for fixtures and differentiate between manufacturer-installed

and field-installed wiring. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fixtures, Emergency Lighting Units, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. NFPA 101 Compliance: Comply with visibility and luminance requirements for exit signs.


A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products indicated in the Luminaire Schedules on the drawings.

2.02 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE COMPONENTS, GENERAL

A. Metal Parts: Free from burrs, sharp corners, and edges. B. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and

sagging. C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free from light leakage under operating

conditions, and arranged to permit relamping without use of tools. Arrange doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other pieces to prevent accidental falling during relamping and when secured in operating position.

D. Reflecting Surfaces: Minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. 4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.

E. Lenses, Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic or annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Plastic: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and

ultraviolet radiation. 2. Lens Thickness: 0.125 inch minimum, unless thickness is indicated otherwise.

2.03 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements: Comply with UL 924 and the following: 1. Sign Colors and Lettering Size: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs: As follows: 1. Lamps for AC Operation: Light-emitting diodes, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.

C. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained power pack. 1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type with special warranty. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from unit when circuit voltage drops to 80

percent of nominal or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 51 00 - 2

2.04 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS A. General Requirements: Self-contained units. Comply with UL 924. Units include the following

features: 1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type with minimum 10-year nominal life and

special warranty. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of

nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.


A. Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceiling and walls, and secure according to manufacturer's written instructions and approved submittal materials. Install lamps in each fixture.

3.02 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment. 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. B. Tests: As follows:

1. Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation. 2. Emergency Lighting: Interrupt electrical supply to demonstrate proper operation. 3. Verify normal transfer to battery source and retransfer to normal.

C. Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly.

3.04 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Clean fixtures internally and externally after installation. Use methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.

B. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities.

END OF SECTION 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING

EXTERIOR LIGHTING 26 56 00 - 1

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes exterior lighting units with luminaires, lamps, ballasts, poles/support structures, and accessories.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 26 Section "Interior Lighting" for interior fixtures, lamps, ballasts, emergency lighting

units, and accessories; and for exterior luminaires normally mounted on buildings. 1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Lighting Unit: A luminaire or an assembly of luminaires complete with a common support, including pole, post, or other structure, and mounting and support accessories.

B. Luminaire (Light Fixture): A complete lighting device consisting of lamp(s) and ballast(s), when applicable, together with parts designed to distribute light, to position and protect lamps, and to connect lamps to power supply.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of lighting unit indicated, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. Materials and dimensions of luminaires and poles. 2. Certified results of laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for photometric performance. 3. High-intensity-discharge luminaire ballasts.

B. Shop Drawings: Anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer. C. Maintenance Data: For lighting units to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.


A. Luminaires and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, for their indicated use, location, and installation conditions by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction

B. Comply with ANSI C2. C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING OF POLES

A. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on fiberglass poles until just before pole installation. Handle poles with web fabric straps.

B. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on metal poles until just before pole installation. For poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps.


A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products indicated in the Lighting Fixture Schedule.

2.02 LUMINAIRES

A. Metal Parts: Free from burrs, sharp corners, and edges. B. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support

to prevent warping and sagging. C. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use.

Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires. D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free from light leakage under operating

conditions, and arranged to permit relamping without use of tools. Arrange doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other pieces to prevent accidental falling during relamping and when secured in operating position. Provide for door removal for cleaning or replacing lens. Arrange to disconnect ballast when door opens.

E. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel. F. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and

ultraviolet radiation. G. Reflecting Surfaces: Minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING 26 56 00 - 2

H. Lenses and Refractors: Materials as indicated. Use heat- and aging-resistant, resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lens and refractor in luminaire doors.

J. Photoelectric Relays: As follows: 1. Contact Relays: Single throw, arranged to fail in the on position and factory set to turn light unit

on at 1.5 to 3 fc and off at 4.5 to 10 fc with 15-second minimum time delay. 2. Relay Mounting: In luminaire housing.


A. Install poles as follows: 1. Use web fabric slings (not chain or cable) to raise and set poles. 2. Mount pole to foundation with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque level recommended

by pole manufacturer. 3. Secure poles level, plumb, and square. 4. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use nonshrinking or expanding concrete grout

firmly packed in entire void space. 5. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch- diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout. Arrange to

drain condensation from interior of pole. B. Luminaire Attachment: Fasten to indicated structural supports. C. Lamp luminaires with indicated lamps according to manufacturer's written instructions. Replace

malfunctioning lamps. 3.02 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment. 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

B. Ground metal poles/support structures according to Division 16 Section "Grounding." 1. Nonmetallic Poles: Ground metallic components of lighting units and foundations.


A. Inspect each installed unit for damage. Replace damaged units. B. Tests and Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires and

energizing circuits with normal power source. C. Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest. Repeat procedure until units

operate properly. 3.04 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Clean units after installation. Use methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. B. Adjust amiable luminaires and luminaires with adjustable lamp position to provide required light

distributions and intensities.

END OF SECTION 26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

EXCAVATION AND FILL 31 23 00 - 1

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 31 23 00 EXCAVATION AND FILL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Existing Utilities: Protect from damage any utility lines or conduits uncovered during the Work until they have been examined by the Architect or Owner. If such lines are found to be abandoned and not in use, remove without extra cost. If such lines are found to be in use, carefully protect and carry on Work around them.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL AND BACKFILL MATERIAL

A. Select Fill (Under Foundations, Interior Slabs on Grade): Imported granular, nonexpansive pit run material as approved by the Geotechnical Engineer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION

A. Excavate the site as required for walls, foundations, piers, areas, pits, etc., to depths indicated. Excavate so that building foundations shall bear on new structural fill extending to the undisturbed soil. Trenches for foundations, walls, piers, etc. shall have bottoms of full width. If, through error, trenches are carried deeper than required, fill excess depth with concrete, or earth fill as directed. Exercise care in excavating near existing site features and foundations, so as not to undermine existing elements.

B. Bailing or Pumping: Immediately pump or bail out water found in excavations, whether rain or seepage. Keep excavations free from water at all times.

3.02 FILL AND BACKFILL

A. Over-Excavation Fill: Fill back to elevations as required for foundations and slabs. B. At proper time, fill as required and backfill around walls, piers, etc. Install backfill in even lifts on

both sides of foundation walls to prevent excessive pressure on one side. C. Placing Fill and Backfill: Do not place brush, sod, frozen material or other perishable or unsuitable

materials in the fill. Distribute material on the fill to avoid formation of lenses differing substantially from the surrounding material. Deliver materials to the fill surface in a manner to result in a well and uniformly compacted fill. Before compactions, spread fill materials in approximately horizontal layers not greater than eight (8”) inches thick with upper surface approximately horizontal.

D. Compaction: When an acceptable, uniform moisture content is obtained, compact each layer by mechanical method acceptable to the Geotechnical Engineer to the following densities as determined by ASTM D698:

Fill Under Foundations 95% Interior Fill Beneath Slabs 95% Interior Utility Trenches Upper four feet (4’) 95%

Lower portion 90% The use of free water (puddling ) will not be allowed.

3.03 UNDER-SLAB GRAVEL A. Place, spread and compact under-slab gravel to 95% density as determined by ASTM D698.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Excavation: Obtain the Geotechnical Engineer’s approval of depth and extent of excavation for

structures before starting filling operations. B. Filling: Obtain the Geotechnical Engineer’s approval of fill and the method of placing and

compaction before starting compacted fill or backfill. Obtain written approval of the completed compacted fill and backfill from the Geotechnical Engineer. Sufficient tests will be made to assure compliance with these Specifications. If, because of unsatisfactory test results it is necessary to retest after corrective work, the cost of all tests other than the initial tests shall be paid by the Contractor.

C. Moisture-Density Determination: Samples of representative fill materials to be placed will be obtained by the Geotechnical Engineer for determination of maximum density and optimum moisture for these materials. Unless indicated otherwise, tests for this determination will be made using

EXCAVATION AND FILL 31 23 00 - 2

methods conforming to requirements of ASTM D698. Copies of the results of these tests will be furnished to the Contractor. These test results will be the basis of control for compactive effort.

D. Density Tests: The density and moisture content of each layer of compacted fill will be determined by the Geotechnical Engineer in accordance with ASTM D698, D4253, D4254. Recompact any material found not to comply with the minimum specified density until the required density is obtained.

E. Field Engineering: The responsibility for lines, grades and levels necessary for proper location and execution of the Work rests upon the Contractor who will retain a competent instrument person for this purpose. Carefully protect bench marks and reference points.

END OF SECTION 31 23 00 - EXCAVATION AND FILL

STRUCTURAL FOAM BLOCK SYSTEM 31 23 23- 1

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK Metropolitan Foundry Theatre P#1709 SECTION 31 23 23 STRUCTURAL FOAM BLOCK SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide and install expanded polystyrene (EPS) rigid stabilization blocks for support of the stadium

seating floor, as indicated by the Contract Documents 1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. All submittals shall be in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements, Section 01300, Submittals. B. Samples of foam and gripper plate. C. Shop Drawings including plan and section layouts for each auditorium.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Expanded polystyrene blocks shall be in accordance with ASTM C578-92 and shall conform to the

following physical properties: Polystyrene Blocks Density 1.50 pct Compressive Strength (at 5% deformation ASTM D16121 12-17 psi Flexural Strength ASTM C209 40-50 psi Tensile Strength ASTM D1623 18-22 psi Shear Strength. ASTM C273 26-32 Shear Modulus ASTM C273 460-500 Modulus of Elasticity 320-360 Coefficient of Thermal Expansion 0 ASTM D696 0.000035

2.02 MATERIALS A. Expanded polystyrene blocks shall be fabricated in 48”x96” size sheets, and the thickness shall be as

required on the Drawings. B. The thickness of the blocks shall be such that at least two (2) blocks exist in vertical section to ensure

overlapping of the joints. In no case shall the block thickness be less than 12 inches. C. Blocks shall be attached by “stitching” plates AMF Corporation’s “Gripper” plates or Approved

Substitute at the rate of two (2) plates for each 4 foot x 8 foot section of block. 2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. AFM Corporation (AFM Perform Guard) B. Approved Substitute PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Carefully inspect the installed Work of all other trades and verify that all such Work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with Manufacturer’s instructions for installation of polystyrene blocks including installation of “Gripper’ plates and proper overlapping of joints.

B. Properly fit blocks around diagonal structural supports as necessary to maintain a solid infill. C. Before installation begins, verify that the sidewall construction for the stadium seats is complete and

offers the required one-hour fire assembly (studs with 5/8” Type X drywall on both sides).

END OF SECTION 31 23 23 - STRUCTURAL FOAM BLOCK SYSTEM

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK Metropolitan Foundry Theater P# 1709 SECTION 31 63 29 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS

DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS 31 63 29 - 1

SECTION 31 63 29 - DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS

PART 1 GENERAL



1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Machine drilled shaft, rock sockets, and shear rings. B. Concrete and reinforcement. C. Shaft liner, if required.

1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Requirements for concrete.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 336.1 - Standard Specification for the Construction of Drilled Piers; 2001. B. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014. C. ASTM A252 - Standard Specification for Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe Piles; 2010. D. ASTM A929/A929M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process for

Corrugated Steel Pipe; 2001 (Reapproved 2013).

1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting prior to the start of the work of this Section.

1. Require attendance by all affected installers.

1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Reinforcement and placement drawings showing locations and elevations of piers, pier caps, pier

cap details, and connection of piers and pier caps to other structural elements including tie beams, pilasters, columns, grade beams, and walls.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of piers, pier diameter, and pier length. Accurately record the following: 1. Sizes, lengths, and locations of piers. 2. Sequence of placement. 3. Final base and top elevations.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of

documented experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS A. Casing: Temporary casings of steel conforming to ASTM A283/A283M, Grade C; ASTM A36/A36M; or ASTM

A929/A929M; of sufficient strength to withstand handling and drilling stresses, concrete pressures, and surrounding earth and water pressures.

B. Shaft Liner: Use on of the following at Contractor's Option. Use only one type of shaft liner for all piers. 1. ASTM A252, Grade 1; single length steel pipe, with plain ends, of diameter and wall thickness indicated.

C. Concrete Reinforcing, Materials, and Mix: Specified in Section 03 30 00. 1. Conform to ACI 336.1 for slump and maximum aggregate size.

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK Metropolitan Foundry Theater P# 1709 SECTION 31 63 29 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS

DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS 31 63 29 - 2

D. Equipment: Appropriate for dewatering excavated shaft.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION A. Construct piers in accordance with ACI 336.1. B. Drill vertical pier shafts to diameters and depths to achieve minimum capacities and socket lengths into soil

material capable of providing minimum end bearing and skin friction capacities as specified on Drawings. C. Place steel casings immediately after drilling. Set firmly in place. If casing is to be temporary, install shaft liner

with sufficient strength to withstand concrete pressures. D. Place reinforcing steel in accordance with Section 03 30 00. E. Place concrete in single, continuous pour for each pier, in accordance with Section 03 30 00, with equipment

designed for vertical placement of concrete so that concrete is positively conveyed to the location of placement, and discharged from placement equipment within 10 feet of the level of placement.

F. Coordinate casing withdrawal with concrete placement so that concrete pressure head exceeds anticipated outside soil and water pressure above bottom of casing at all times during withdrawal.

G. Extend reinforcement or provide dowels for connection of caps, grade beams, and other structural elements as indicated on Drawings.

H. Set tops of piers and pier caps to elevations indicated on Drawings.

3.02 TOLERANCES A. Install piers in compliance with ACI 336.1, except as follows:

1. Maximum Variation From Vertical: 1.5 percent of vertical pier length. 2. Maximum Variation From Design Top Elevation: Plus 1 inch, minus 3 inches. 3. Maximum Out-of-Position: The lesser of 10 percent of pier diameter or 3 inches.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing agency will:

1. Inspect drilling, determine suitability of bearing soils, inspect reinforcing, inspect concrete placing, and approve such conditions as meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents prior to pouring each pier.

2. Log top and bottom of each pier shaft to determine depth required to reach satisfactory bearing. 3. Submit daily reports containing shaft identification, diameter, design and actual bottom elevations, top

elevation, tolerance deviations, amount of over run or under run, bearing surface description and condition, water conditions during drilling and at time of concrete placement, and unusual conditions observed.

B. Perform concrete tests and reinforcing inspections to requirements of Section 03 30 00. Provide testing (strength, slump, air and temperature) for every pier, but not more than one set of testing per truck load.

3.04 UNACCEPTABLE PIERS A. Unacceptable Piers: Piers that fail, are placed out of position, are below elevations, or are damaged. B. Provide additional piers or replace piers failing to conform to specified requirements.
